SAP Signavio Process

Manager User Guide

15.14
 Our guides available at [Link] contain video
examples, these examples are not included in the PDF versions.
For more information, please contact the SAP Signavio doc-
umentation team.

Version 15.14 2
Contents

1 Welcome to the SAP Signavio Process Manager user guide 18

2 Signing up 19
2.1 Create your Business Transformation Suite account 19
2.2 Supported browsers 20

3 Log in to the Business Transformation Suite 21

3.1 Log in with your account credentials 21
3.2 Log in using a shared link 21
3.3 Log in to the on-premises solution 22
3.4 Next steps 22

4 Getting started 23
4.1 The explorer 23
4.2 The editor 23
4.3 QuickModel 23
4.4 The dictionary 24
4.5 SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub 24
4.6 The Diagram and Revision Comparison Tool 24
4.7 BPMN and DMN Simulation 24
4.8 Support 24
4.9 Next steps 25
4.10 What kind of SAP Signavio user am I 25
4.10.1 I am a business process (BPMN) modeler 25

4.10.2 I am a business decision modeler 25

4.10.3 I am an enterprise architecture modeler 26

4.10.4 I'd like to create a process diagram, but don't know BPMN very well 26

4.10.5 I am a SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub user 26

4.10.6 I want to review and approve diagrams before they are released 26

4.10.7 I am a workspace administrator 27

Version 15.14 3
 4.11 Explorer overview 27
4.12 The Explorer view 28
4.12.1 The icon view 28

4.12.2 The list view 29

4.12.3 Refreshing the Explorer view 30

4.12.4 Display of the current path 31

4.13 The Explorer menu 31

4.13.1 New 31

4.13.2 Edit 31

4.13.3 Import/Export 32

4.13.4 Reporting 32

4.13.5 Share 32

4.14 Personal profile settings 34

4.14.1 Global settings 35

4.14.2 Local settings and information 36

4.15 Working with folders and diagrams 37

4.15.1 The folder structure 37

4.15.2 The 'Shared documents' and 'My documents' folders 38

4.15.3 Creating a new folder 39

4.15.4 Renaming a folder or diagram 40

4.15.5 Moving folders and diagrams 40

4.15.6 Copying diagrams 41

4.15.7 Removing folders or diagrams 42

4.15.8 Restoring diagrams and folders 43

4.16 Viewing diagram details 44

4.16.1 Notification settings 44

4.16.2 Preview and version history 45

4.17 Today's top tips 45

4.18 The BPM Academic Initiative 46
4.19 Frequently asked questions 47
4.19.1 How can I quickly display diagrams without opening the Editor? 47

4.19.2 How can I disable email notifications? 48

Version 15.14 4
 4.19.3 My browser does not display SAP Signavio's applications correctly. What
can I do? 48

5 Modeling 49
5.1 Create a diagram 49
5.2 Editor overview 49
5.2.1 User menu 50

5.3 Open and save diagrams 51

5.3.1 Open a diagram 51

5.3.2 Save a diagram 51

5.3.3 Restore older revisions of a diagram 52

5.3.4 Next steps 53

5.4 Editor toolbar and keyboard shortcuts 53

5.4.1 Editor Toolbar 53

5.4.2 Keyboard Shortcuts 55

5.4.3 Next steps 57

5.5 Add and connect elements 57

5.5.1 Add elements from the shape repository 57

5.5.2 Add elements from the interactive shortcut menu 58

5.5.3 Add pools and lanes 58

5.5.4 Connect elements with flows 59

5.5.5 Copy elements 59

5.5.6 Remove elements 60

5.5.7 Next steps 60

5.6 Move and change elements 60

5.6.1 Move elements and labels 60

5.6.2 Rename elements 60

5.6.3 Change element size 61

5.6.4 Adjust canvas space 61

5.6.5 Change the element type 62

5.6.6 Edit attributes 63

5.6.7 Attributes in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub 64

5.6.8 Next steps 64

Version 15.14 5
 5.7 Format diagrams 64
5.7.1 Align and distribute elements 64

5.7.2 Format elements and labels 65

5.8 Work with modeling conventions 66

5.8.1 Modeling conventions report 67

5.9 The dictionary 68

5.9.1 Working with the dictionary 68

5.9.2 Use the dictionary while modeling 78

5.9.3 Merging dictionary entries 82

5.9.4 Referencing external data sources 84

5.9.5 Recommendations: Dictionary content management 85

5.9.6 Tutorial: How to use the dictionary as a modeler 87

5.10 Process hierarchies 95

5.10.1 Next steps 95

5.11 Create subprocesses 95

5.11.1 When to use subprocesses 96

5.11.2 Subprocess elements 96

5.11.3 Add subprocesses to a diagram 96

5.11.4 Change linked diagrams 98

5.11.5 View linked elements 98

5.12 Add Live Insights 98

5.12.1 Access the Live Insights shapes 99

5.12.2 Visibility of Live Insights 99

5.12.3 Overview over Live Insights shapes 99

5.12.4 Link a shape to a widget 100

5.12.5 Use shape with a manual value 101

5.12.6 Next steps 101

5.13 Link to files in diagrams 101

5.13.1 Use dictionary entries to link documents 102

5.13.2 Use a custom attribute to link documents 102

5.14 Display attribute overlays 103

5.14.1 Display attribute overlays while modeling 104

Version 15.14 6
 5.14.2 Display attribute overlays in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub 104

5.15 Compare revisions 104

5.15.1 Open the diagram comparison tool 105

5.15.2 Display options 105

5.15.3 Select revisions 106

5.15.4 Diagram change information 106

5.15.5 Next steps 107

5.16 Custom graphics 107

5.16.1 Validation criteria 113

5.16.2 Modeling with custom graphics 115

6 Modeling notations 116

6.1 Business Process Modeling and Notation (BPMN) 116
6.1.1 Model a BPMN diagram 117

6.1.2 Set BPMN attributes 121

6.1.3 Responsibility assignment according to RACI 126

6.1.4 Setting key performance indicators (KPIs) 128

6.1.5 Create views 131

6.1.6 Risk Management 135

6.1.7 Migrating diagrams to BPMN 2.0 138

6.1.8 Converting EPC diagrams to BPMN 2.0 139

6.1.9 FIM attributes for public administration 142

6.1.10 Frequently asked questions 144

6.2 Customer journey maps 145

6.2.1 What are customer journey maps? 145

6.2.2 Creating and editing customer journey maps 151

6.2.3 Integrating customer journey maps into your process landscape 152

6.3 Decision Model and Notation (DMN) 154

6.3.1 Next steps 156

6.3.2 Model a decision 156

6.3.3 Define a decision logic 167

6.3.4 Define a hit policy and the completeness requirement 178

6.3.5 Using advanced literal expressions (functions in DMN decision elements) 184

Version 15.14 7
 6.3.6 Link DMN elements and diagrams 199

6.3.7 Create dictionary entries for input or output data in decisions 202

6.3.8 The DMN Test lab 204

6.3.9 DMN simulation 219

6.3.10 Comparing DMN diagrams and revisions 221

6.4 Value chains 224

6.4.1 Available diagram elements 225

6.4.2 Additional editing options 226

6.5 ArchiMate 227

6.5.1 What is ArchiMate? 227

6.5.2 Creating and editing ArchiMate diagrams 228

6.6 Case Management Model and Notation (CMMN) 230

6.6.1 About CMMN 230

6.6.2 CMMN in SAP Signavio Process Manager 231

6.6.3 Creating and editing CMMN diagrams 231

6.6.4 Integrating CMMN diagrams 241

6.7 Further notations 242

6.7.1 Organizational charts 243

6.7.2 Choreography diagrams 243

6.7.3 Conversation diagrams 243

6.7.4 Event-driven process chains 243

6.7.5 UML use case diagrams 244

6.7.6 UML class diagrams 244

7 Modeling with QuickModel 245

7.1 QuickModel editor overview 245
7.1.1 Show or hide task attributes 247

7.1.2 Main attributes for tasks 247

7.2 Create a diagram with QuickModel 247

7.2.1 Add tasks and specify attributes 248

7.2.2 Link dictionary entries 249

7.2.3 Reorder the tasks 249

Version 15.14 8
 7.2.4 Remove a task 249

7.2.5 Next steps 249

7.3 Edit a diagram with QuickModel 250

7.3.1 Editing options 250

7.3.2 Collapsed suprocesses 251

7.3.3 Editing limits for non-linear diagrams 251

7.3.4 Open a diagram in the QuickModel editor 251

7.3.5 Toggle between graphical and QuickModel editor 251

7.3.6 Link dictionary entries 251

7.3.7 Next steps 252

8 Simulating BPMN diagrams 253

8.1 Access the BPMN simulation tool 253
8.2 BPMN simulation tool functions 254
8.3 Step-by-step simulation 254
8.3.1 Run the step-by-step simulation 255

8.4 One-case simulation 255

8.4.1 Rub the one-case simulation 256

8.5 Multiple-case simulation 257

8.5.1 Run the multiple-case simulation 258

8.5.2 Simulation outcomes 259

8.5.3 Simulation result metrics 260

8.6 Managing simulation scenarios 265

8.6.1 Costs 265

8.6.2 Duration 266

8.6.3 Frequency 267

8.6.4 Resources 268

8.6.5 Configure the cost & resource analysis attribute 270

8.7 Exporting simulation results 270

8.7.1 Overview 271

8.7.2 Costs 272

8.7.3 Total costs charts 272

Version 15.14 9
 8.7.4 Total cycle time 273

8.7.5 Total time charts 274

8.7.6 Resource consumption 274

8.7.7 Resource consumption charts 275

8.7.8 Bottlenecks 276

8.7.9 Bottlenecks charts 276

8.7.10 Scenario tabs 276

8.8 Troubleshooting issues with the BPMN simulation feature 277

9 Search 279
9.1 Full text search 279
9.2 Advanced Search 280
9.3 Smart Folders 281
9.3.1 Manage smart folders 282

9.4 Search results 282

9.5 Return to the default explorer view 283

10 Collaboration 284
10.1 Inviting modelers to edit a diagram 284
10.2 Inviting stakeholders to comment on a diagram 286
10.2.1 Inviting collaborators in the editor to comment 287

10.2.2 Inviting new stakeholders via email 288

10.2.3 Hint on links in invitation emails 289

10.2.4 Simplified views on diagrams 289

10.2.5 Withdrawing commenting rights 291

10.3 Comments 293

10.3.1 View comments 293

10.3.2 Filter comments by status 293

10.3.3 Filter comments by element 293

10.3.4 Add comments to a diagram 294

10.3.5 Add comments to an element 294

10.3.6 Reply to comments 294

10.3.7 Mention others in comments 294

Version 15.14 10
 10.3.8 Edit comments 295

10.3.9 Reject comments 295

10.3.10 Resolve comments 295

10.3.11 Delete comments 296

10.3.12 Comment notifications 296

10.4 Granting read-only access to diagrams 296

10.5 Publishing diagrams in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub 297
10.5.1 Revoke a published diagram 300

10.5.2 Opening a diagram's published revision 302

10.6 Inviting users to access a diagram in SAP Signavio Process Col-

laboration Hub 302
10.7 Organizing diagrams 302
10.8 The notification and activity feed 303
10.8.1 Notification configuration 304

10.8.2 Additional functions 304

10.9 Translating diagrams 308

10.9.1 Changing the language 308

10.9.2 Translating diagrams 310

10.9.3 Translating diagrams into multiple languages at the same time 311

10.9.4 Migrating diagrams to a different language 312

10.9.5 Translating diagram, folder and file names 314

10.9.6 Next steps 315

10.10 Executing processes in SAP Signavio Process Governance 315

10.11 Working with approval workflows 316
10.11.1 Start an approval workflow 317

10.11.2 Processing an approval task 318

10.11.3 Processing open approval tasks 319

11 Creating reports 322

11.1 Process documentation and templates 322
11.2 Analysis 323
11.3 Process model metric and process characteristics 323

Version 15.14 11
 11.4 User and group assignment 324
11.5 Governance report 324
11.6 Generating process documentation reports 324
11.6.1 Generate a process documentation (PDF) report 324

11.6.2 Generate a process documentation (Word) report 326

11.7 Responsibility assignment matrix / RACI report 327

11.8 Responsibility handovers matrix report 328
11.9 IT system usage matrix reports 330
11.9.1 Generate the IT system usage matrix (by diagrams) report 331

11.9.2 Generate the IT system usage matrix (by roles) report 332

11.10 Job profile report 333

11.11 Risk & controls report 333
11.12 Modeling conventions report 335
11.13 Document usage matrix report 336
11.14 Process characteristics with element details report 338
11.15 Process model metrics report 339
11.16 Creating quantitative process analysis reports 340
11.17 Process cost analysis report 341
11.18 Resource consumption analysis report 343
11.19 User/Group assignment report 345
11.20 Viewing governance reports 346
11.20.1 The governance report's usage metrics 347

12 Importing 350
12.1 Import an SAP Signavio archive (SGX) file 350
12.1.1 Import a SAP Signavio archive (SGX) file 351

12.1.2 Next steps 352

12.2 Import a BPMN 2.0 XML diagram 352

12.2.1 Import errors and warnings 352

12.2.2 Next steps 353

12.3 Import the APQC Process Classification Framework 353

Version 15.14 12
 12.3.1 The representation of the APQC framework in SAP Signavio Process
Manager 353

12.3.2 Import a APQC spreadsheet 354

12.4 Import a XPDL 2.1. diagram 355

12.5 Import a ARIS Markup Language (AML) diagram 355
12.6 Import a Microsoft Visio diagram 356
12.7 Upload documents and pictures 356
12.7.1 Limitations 356

12.7.2 Considerations 357

12.7.3 Upload a document or picture to the SAP Signavio file storage 357

12.7.4 Update a document or picture 358

12.7.5 Download documents and pictures 359

12.7.6 Supported file types 359

12.8 Import dictionary entries 360

12.8.1 Next steps 362

12.9 Import a set of dictionary items as a JAR file 362

12.9.1 Preparation and requirements 363

12.9.2 Import a JAR file 365

13 Exporting 366
13.1 Export dictionary entries 366
13.2 Export a diagram as PDF 367
13.2.1 Export options 368

13.3 Export a diagram as an image 370

13.3.1 Export options 371

13.4 Export a diagram as a SAP Signavio archive (SGX) 371

13.5 Export a BPMN diagram as XML 372
13.5.1 Export options 372

13.6 Export a diagram as XML 373

13.7 Export a DMN diagram as XML 373
13.7.1 Customize the export 374

13.7.2 Next steps 374

Version 15.14 13
 13.8 Exporting DMN diagrams as drools rules 375
13.8.1 Customize the export 378

13.9 Exporting diagrams to Red Hat Decision Manager projects on

GitHub 379
13.9.1 Pushing diagrams to Red Hat Decision Manager projects 381

13.10 Translate content with PO files 382

13.10.1 Exported files 383

13.10.2 Export content for translation 385

13.10.3 Import translated content 385

13.10.4 Next steps 386

14 Publishing diagrams to external systems 387

14.1 Enabling diagram embedding 387
14.1.1 Disabling diagram embedding 389

14.2 Embed a diagram as an image 390

14.3 Embedding diagrams as HTML code 390
14.3.1 The diagram preview 391

14.4 Embedding diagrams in MediaWiki 394

14.4.1 Installing the SAP Signavio Embed Extension 394

14.4.2 Embedding a diagram 394

14.5 Embedding diagrams in Microsoft SharePoint wiki pages 395

14.6 Embedding diagrams as a Google gadget 396
14.7 Supported blog and content management systems 397

15 Workspace administration 398

15.1 Administrator profile 398
15.2 Add administrators 398
15.3 Get started 398
15.4 Next steps 399
15.5 Prepare the workspace - overview 399
15.6 Find the workspace ID 401
15.6.1 Workspace ID in SAP Signavio Process Manager 401

Version 15.14 14
 15.6.2 Workspace ID in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub 401

15.6.3 Workspace ID in SAP Signavio Process Intelligence 401

15.7 Manage users and access rights 401

15.7.1 Next steps 401

15.7.2 Manage users and groups 402

15.7.3 Manage access rights 409

15.7.4 Activate feature sets 415

15.7.5 About Licenses 417

15.7.6 Possible issues: JavaScript & cookies 419

15.7.7 Manage security settings 420

15.7.8 Single sign-on using SAML 424

15.7.9 Managing access to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub for Active
Directory services 432

15.8 Configure general software settings 435

15.8.1 Explorer settings 435

15.8.2 Editor settings 435

15.8.3 Help settings 436

15.8.4 General settings 436

15.9 Configure language settings for all users 436

15.9.1 Add a language 437

15.9.2 Set a default language 437

15.9.3 Remove a language 438

15.10 Settings for SAP Signavio Journey Modeler 438

15.10.1 Licenses 438

15.10.2 Access rights to journey models 438

15.10.3 Layout and formatting 439

15.11 Managing approval workflows 439

15.11.1 Activating the approval workflow feature 439

15.11.2 Configuring Approval Workflows 440

15.11.3 Access control for approval workflows 442

15.11.4 Diagram states 443

15.11.5 Participants 445

15.11.6 Approval Expiration 446

Version 15.14 15
 15.11.7 Reapprovals 449

15.11.8 Creating and editing approval workflows 449

15.11.9 Deactivating the approval workflow feature 460

15.12 Manage notations, attributes, and the dictionary 460

15.12.1 Next steps 460

15.12.2 Manage the dictionary 461

15.12.3 Add and manage notation subsets 461

15.12.4 Define default colors and font formats for element types 464

15.12.5 Add and manage custom attributes 466

15.12.6 Add custom categories for dictionary entries 472

15.12.7 Set up a dictionary category for DMN modeling 476

15.12.8 Manage definitions for risks and controls 477

15.12.9 Manage attribute visualization layers 480

15.12.10 Managing modeling conventions 483

15.12.11 Managing external data sources 488

15.12.12 Creating and managing process documentation templates 494

15.13 Embedding SAP Signavio diagrams in 3rd-party systems 512

15.13.1 Embedding SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub via an iframe 512

15.14 Link training content from SAP Enable Now to BPMN processes 515
15.15 Integrating SAP Signavio Process Manager with SAP Signavio
Process Governance 516
15.15.1 Setup 516

15.15.2 Process design 517

15.15.3 Process deployment 518

15.15.4 Adjusting deployed processes 518

15.16 SAP Signavio Process Manager for SAP Solution Manager 7.2 518
15.16.1 Process structure on the SAP side 519

15.16.2 Set up the integration with SAP Solution Manager 7.2 519

15.16.3 Next steps 520

15.16.4 Configure SAP Solution Manager 520

15.16.5 Configure SAP Signavio Process Manager 524

15.16.6 Configure attribute mappings 527

15.16.7 Import Solution Manager content to the dictionary 528

Version 15.14 16
 15.16.8 Copy processes from SAP Solution Manager 7.2 531

15.16.9 Export to Solution Manager 534

15.16.10 Troubleshooting 537

15.17 System integration scenarios 542

15.17.1 Migrating content from other process modeling tools 542

15.17.2 Synchronizing data between SAP Signavio Process Manager and enter-
prise architecture and document management systems 543

15.17.3 Access to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub 543

15.17.4 Integrating SAP Signavio Process Manager with project management

systems and wikis 544

15.17.5 Single sign-on 544

15.17.6 Integrating SAP Signavio Process Manager with ERP systems 544

15.17.7 Combine content from SAP Enable Now with BPMN processes 545

15.17.8 Integrating SAP Signavio Process Manager with business process exe-
cution (BPX) engines 545

15.17.9 Generating custom reports 546

15.17.10 Translating SAP Signavio Process Manager content with external tools
and services 546

15.18 Purchasing additional licenses 547

15.19 API access to SAP Signavio Process Manager 547
15.19.1 The SAP Signavio Process Manager REST API 548

15.19.2 The SAP Signavio Process Manager Mash-up (JavaScript) API 549

15.20 Business Transformation Suite 550

15.20.1 Enable the Business Transformation Suite for your workspace 550

15.20.2 Configure SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub 551

15.20.3 Preview new SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub 552

15.21 Configuring Classic SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub 553

15.21.1 General configuration 553

15.21.2 Appearance 557

15.21.3 Attributes 559

15.21.4 Configuring access to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub 561

15.21.5 Integrate SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub in a Microsoft

SharePoint installation 563

Version 15.14 17
1   Welcome to the SAP Signavio Process Manager user guide

1 Welcome to the SAP Signavio Process

Manager user guide
If you are new to SAP Signavio, we recommend to read the sections Getting star-
ted and What kind of SAP Signavio user am I.
If you are already familiar with SAP Signavio Process Manager, navigate the
table of content on the left or use the search to find the sections that are most rel-
evant to you.
For additional information, take a look at:
o Featured Videos
o Tutorial Videos
o The SAP Signavio Blog
o White Papers
o Customer portal

Version 15.14 18
2   Signing up

2 Signing up
SAP Signavio is a web application. You access your workspace by logging into
your account on the SAP Signavio server.
Go to [Link] and click the Try it button in the upper right
corner of the page to register for the software. Alternatively, if you received an
invitation email to the SAP Signavio software, you can click the link in the email to
get to the page. If you are using the On Premise version of SAP Signavio, get the
local URL from your workspace administrator.

If you register for a trial account with an email address that has been
invited to join a SAP Signavio workspace, this license will be auto-
matically added to your new account.

To optimize worldwide availability, we provide three Software-as-a-Ser-

vice systems:
o [Link] is hosted in the USA.
o [Link] is hosted in Germany.
o [Link] is hosted in Australia.

When you register to create your workspace, you can decide which
system you want to use.

2.1 Create your Business Transformation Suite

account
1. Go to the registration page or click the link you received in your invitation
email.

2. Follow the steps on the screen to set up your account.

Version 15.14 19
2   Signing up

When you received an invitation email, you need to use the email
address to which the email was sent in order to sign up with the
proper license.

3. Use your account email and password to log in to the Business Trans-
formation Suite.

2.2 Supported browsers

SAP Signavio Process Manager supports all popular browsers. If you experience
problems with SAP Signavio Process Manager, you may be using an outdated
browser that is not fully compatible with our system. The following web page
provides a detailed list of supported browsers and assesses the compatibility of
your browser automatically:
[Link]

If the page indicates that your browser seems to be compatible, some

features may not be fully supported. We recommend you switch to a
browser that fully supports all features, to have an optimal user exper-
ience.

Version 15.14 20
3   Log in to the Business Transformation Suite

3 Log in to the Business Transformation

Suite

3.1 Log in with your account credentials

After you've created your Business Transformation Suite account (see section
Create your Business Transformation Suite account), use your account email
and password to log in.
In case your workspace administrator has created the account for you, you
received an email to reset your password. When SSO is enabled for your work-
space, you log in using a shared link (see section Log in using a shared link).

1. Go to the login page:

o Login page (hosted in EU)
o Login page (hosted in Australia)
o Login page (hosted in US)

2. Enter your account email and password and click Login.

o If you receive the error message that the login with email and pass-
word is disabled, SSO is enforced for your workspace and you need to
log in using a shared link (see section Log in using a shared link).

3. Select your workspace and click Login. SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub launchpad opens. Continue with section launchpad.

If you don't have the Suite license, SAP Signavio Process Man-
ager explorer or SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub
opens, depending on your user license.

3.2 Log in using a shared link

When SSO is enabled for your workspace, you log in through a shared link. The
link is shared with you, for example, in an invitation email or on a wiki page.

Version 15.14 21
3   Log in to the Business Transformation Suite

We recommend that you bookmark the shared link for future logins.
Depending on your workspace configuration, you might only be able to
log in to the Business Transformation Suite through the shared link.

1. Click the link.

2. Follow the steps you see on the screen. Your account will be authenticated
by a third-party application.
3. After successful log in, SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub launchpad
opens. Continue with section launchpad.

3.3 Log in to the on-premises solution

When SSO is enabled for your workspace, you log in through a shared link. The
link is shared with you, for example, in an invitation email or on a wiki page.

1. Go to the local URL or click the shared link to open the login page. You can
get the local URL from your workspace administrator.
2. Enter your account email and password and click Login. SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Manager explorer opens.

3.4 Next steps

o Launchpad
o Create a diagram
o Move and change elements

Version 15.14 22
4   Getting started

4 Getting started
This chapter provides an overview of the features of SAP Signavio Process Man-
ager.

4.1 The explorer

After logging in, the explorer opens in your browser. It allows you to navigate
through diagrams and files stored in your workspace. Here you can create new
diagrams and publish them in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub or share
them by other means. As SAP Signavio supports open standards, importing dia-
grams from other systems is easy. In the explorer, you can adjust your personal
settings. Administrators can also configure workspace settings here. For details,
see section Explorer overview.

4.2 The editor

The editor can be accessed by opening a diagram or creating a new one. Using
the editor, you can create and edit all kinds of supported diagrams. For details,
see section Modeling.
Besides BPMN 2.0, SAP Signavio supports Decision Model and Notation
(DMN), ArchiMate, and many Further notations.

4.3 QuickModel
QuickModel gives you the possibility to create simple BPMN-diagrams in
seconds by use of a spreadsheet-like interface. Diagrams created in this applic-
ation can be edited in the editor like any other diagram to add complexity or
update the process. See section Modeling with QuickModel for details.

Version 15.14 23
4   Getting started

4.4 The dictionary

The dictionary allows you to manage and re-use specific modeling elements. It
also allows you to ensure all your modelers are using the same terms and ele-
ments in your organization-specific modeling environment.

4.5 SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub

The launchpad of SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub provides access to
your published process landscape, see section Your launchpad.

4.6 The Diagram and Revision Comparison Tool

The diagram and revision comparison tool helps you to keep track of changes.
See section Compare revisions for details.

4.7 BPMN and DMN Simulation

You can run BPMN Simulation and DMN simulation to analyze key performance
indicators and bottlenecks and apply your business decision logic directly within
the tool. The DMN Test lab helps you to continuously check whether your
decision logic is consistent with your initial requirements. See sections Sim-
ulating BPMN diagrams and DMN simulation for details.

4.8 Support
Our team is constantly improving and extending SAP Signavio Process Manager.
You will find the latest version number and our release notes at [Link]
[Link]/release-notes/.
Do you have any questions?
Please contact our SAP Signavio service experts on the SAP ONE Support
Launchpad.
You can also send a support request from the editor. Go to the user menu and
select Send feedback from the drop-down list.

Version 15.14 24
4   Getting started

4.9 Next steps

o Explorer overview
o Working with folders and diagrams
o Modeling

4.10 What kind of SAP Signavio user am I

The following sections explain the different user types of SAP Signavio Process
Manager. If you already know in what way you would like to use the software, you
can select the topic that is relevant for you.

4.10.1 I am a business process (BPMN) modeler

Learn how to collaboratively model business processes in BPMN (Business Pro-
cess Model and Notation) or EPC (Event-driven Process Chains) with SAP
Signavio Process Manager. In addition to BPMN and EPC, we support all popular
open modeling languages for business users.
In section Business Process Modeling and Notation (BPMN), you learn how to
create, edit, and work with BPMN diagrams.

4.10.2 I am a business decision modeler

Use the Decision Manager to model business decisions in a structured and form-
alized manner all stakeholders can easily understand using the Decision Model
and Notation (DMN) . Integrate your DMN diagrams seamlessly into your BPMN
process landscape.
In the section Decision Model and Notation (DMN), you learn about creating,
editing and managing decision diagrams.

Version 15.14 25
4   Getting started

4.10.3 I am an enterprise architecture modeler

Use the ArchiMate Edition to create a visual, business domain-crossing descrip-
tion of your enterprise architecture. Employ ArchiMate together with your BPMN
process landscape.
In the section ArchiMate, you learn about creating and editing Enterprise Archi-
tecture diagrams.

4.10.4 I'd like to create a process diagram, but don't know BPMN
very well
Learn how to use the QuickModel to create valid BPMN processes through a
spreadsheet-like interface. Create your first processes in just a couple of minutes
or add and maintain element attributes in a fast and well-structured manner.
In the section Modeling with QuickModel, you learn how to use the application to
quickly create BPMN diagrams.

4.10.5 I am a SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub user

Get to know SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub: view process diagrams
and discuss them with your colleagues.
In the section SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub, you learn how to use
the tool to work on diagrams together with colleagues and external stakeholders.

4.10.6 I want to review and approve diagrams before they are

released
Make use of a Approval Workflows to ensure that diagrams have been approved
by specific users or user groups before they are published in SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Collaboration Hub.
In the section Working with approval workflows , you learn how to start and work
with approval workflows.

Version 15.14 26
4   Getting started

4.10.7 I am a workspace administrator

Learn how to configure your workspace in order to get the most out of SAP Sig-
navio Process Manager and to maximize the benefit considering the unique
needs of your organization.
Moreover, learn how to integrate SAP Signavio products into your organization's
IT infrastructure and enable smooth and hassle-free process, business decision
and enterprise architecture documentation, utilizing your existing IT systems to
the fullest extent.
As a workspace administrator, you will find information about configuring the soft-
ware in the Workspace administration section of the manual.

4.11 Explorer overview

The explorer is the entry and management point of SAP Signavio Process Man-
ager. In the explorer you can manage folders and diagrams, create new dia-
grams, export diagrams, generate reports, as well as publish and embed
diagrams. You can also edit your profile settings and manage the administrative
aspects of your workspace. You can access the editor, SAP Signavio Process
Collaboration Hub and other functions in the software via the explorer.
From the explorer view you have access to all tools that SAP Signavio Process
Manager offers.
The explorer is structured as follows:
o View

The central area displays the file contents of the selected folder.
Double-click diagrams in the editor to open them. Unread diagram com-
ments are displayed as small speech bubbles attached to the cor-
responding files. You can switch between the views, The icon view or
The list view. At the bottom of the central view is the activity feed and the
diagram preview.
o Menu
The toolbar with a drop-down menu allows you to access different functions.
Read more in the section The Explorer menu.

Version 15.14 27
4   Getting started

o Search function
The search function is a useful tool to quickly find diagrams. In addition to
the full text search, the advanced search option offers you a method to add
specific search criteria. You can find a detailed description in the Search
section.
o Folder tree
The folder tree on the left allows you to quickly navigate within your work-
space. Read more at Working with folders and diagrams.
o Diagram details

The notification and activity feed allows you to view and manage the history
of a diagram and to modify notification settings of diagrams and folders. By
pressing the space bar you can open the preview panel (see Viewing dia-
gram details) and the version overview (see The notification and activity
feed) of a diagram at the bottom.
o Personal profile
You can customize the explorer by adjusting your Personal profile settings
according to your needs.

4.12 The Explorer view

4.12.1 The icon view

In this view, diagrams and folders are represented as icons. For diagrams, a
small preview is provided that allows you to find the diagram you are looking for
faster.
Details about a selected diagram can be found at the bottom of the Explorer in the
activity panel (see Viewing diagram details) .

Version 15.14 28
4   Getting started

When working on diagrams collaboratively--for example, in SAP Signavio Pro-

cess Collaboration Hub--it is possible to comment on diagrams and diagram ele-
ments. Unread comments that were created by users who are not members of
your workspace will be marked with a little speech bubble symbol in the Explorer.

Unread comments are also displayed in the icon view

To view your colleagues' comments, open the respective diagram in the Editor.
To read more about commenting, go to section Comments.

4.12.2 The list view

Diagrams and folders are listed along with additional information about each file.
Selecting an element activates the diagram preview in the preview panel at the
bottom if the panel is extended.

Sort list entries

Clicking the title of a row sorts the elements by the respective column.

[Link] Managing the list view

You can individually configure which of the diagram attributes are shown as
columns in the table view. All attributes on diagram level and the attributes Revi-
sion , Last Change , Last Author and Published are available.
To configure the list view, proceed as follows:

Version 15.14 29
4   Getting started

1. Click Setup , then Edit general configuration . A dialog box will open.
2. In the Explorer section, you can edit the table columns preferences. Click
Add attribute to add another attribute to the list view.

You can rearrange the order of the attributes using the arrow icons and con-
figure the size and the position of the attribute column. To delete an attrib-
ute from the list view click the trash button.

3. Click Save to save your settings. The list view is updated with the attributes
you have configured.

4.12.3 Refreshing the Explorer view

After saving a diagram in the Editor (after renaming it, for example), the Explorer
view may not be up-to-date anymore. In this case, a dialog asking you to refresh
pops up.

Note to refresh the Explorer view

Sometimes, you may want to refresh the Explorer manually. Use the Refresh but-
ton in the top right corner of the Explorer.

Version 15.14 30
4   Getting started

Manually refresh the view if the system does not register a change

4.12.4 Display of the current path

In both the list and in the icon view, you see the file path on top of the list. If you
want to jump to a parent folder, click the corresponding folder name.
The following example shows how to jump back to the 'Shared documents' folder:

Use the diagram path for quick navigation

4.13 The Explorer menu

4.13.1 New
In the dropdown menu New, you can create new folders and diagrams. The new
folder is created at the location that is currently open in the explorer. If you create
a new diagram, a blank canvas opens in the editor in a new tab. The menu item
QuickModel opens a new BPMN 2.0 diagram in QuickModel.

4.13.2 Edit
Here, you can open the editor or QuickModel to edit diagrams, simulate BPMN
(see Simulating BPMN diagrams) and DMN (see DMN simulation) diagrams
and test DMN diagrams (The DMN Test lab). To gain an overview of activities

Version 15.14 31
4   Getting started

about a specific diagram you can display comments on diagrams in SAP Signavio
Process Collaboration Hub and compare versions of diagrams (see Compare
revisions). The folder content currently displayed in the explorer can be moved,
copied, deleted, and renamed. BPMN 1.2 diagrams can also be migrated to the
newer BPMN 2.0 format.

4.13.3 Import/Export
You can import and export files in SAP Signavio Process Manager. This means
you are able to upload files to your workspace and also download diagrams from
your workspace onto your computer in different formats.

4.13.4 Reporting
The Reporting menu allows you to create different kinds of reports about dia-
grams. This enables business users to analyze their process hierarchy offline
with decision makers and analysts, regardless of their familiarity with BPMN mod-
eling.

4.13.5 Share
With the Share menu, you can use your Shared Documents folder to publish dia-
grams to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub and share documents in a vari-
ety of ways with your colleagues.

[Link] Approval workflows

Working with approval workflows are evaluating processes that diagrams have
to go through before they are automatically published to SAP Signavio Process
Collaboration Hub. You can start approval workflows as well as edit published dia-
grams. Approval workflows are managed and executed in SAP Signavio Process
Governance. If you are interested in further functionalities of SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Governance, you can get more information here: [Link]
[Link]/products/workflow-accelerator/.

Version 15.14 32
4   Getting started

To use approval workflows in the On Premises Edition, SAP Signavio

Process Governance needs to be installed alongside SAP Signavio
Process Manager on your server.

[Link] Invitations to comment/edit

The second section of the menu lets you invite modelers to edit. You can also use
it to invite SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub users and external stake-
holders to comment on diagrams.

Invite to comment

You can invite anyone to comment on a diagram - all you need is their email
address. They will receive an email with a link that leads directly to the cor-
responding diagram in the commenting view. Unregistered users can view and
comment only on the specific diagrams they were invited to.
The menu item Manage feedback invitations lets you revoke any invitations to
comment on a diagram.

Invite modeler to edit

You can invite modelers registered in your workspace to edit a diagram. As all
modelers are able to edit all diagrams in the Shared documents folder by default,
this function serves as notification to let fellow modelers know a diagram needs
their attention. You can clarify the reason why you are pointing a modeler towards
a certain diagram by editing the text of the email in the invitation dialog. The link
you send leads directly to the diagram, open and ready to be edited.
The option to Invite to fill out QuickModel follows the same basic concept, only
instead of the Editor, the link leads to the diagram in Modeling with QuickModel.

[Link] SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub

In this menu section, you can view diagrams in SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub, publish and unpublish diagrams, and invite users to open dia-
grams.

Preview

SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub offers a structured and detailed over-
view on diagrams. Before publication, you can check how a SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Collaboration Hub user would see the diagram. This option can also be

Version 15.14 33
4   Getting started

useful for modelers who need to to become familiar with complex diagrams
before editing them. Also, SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub provides a
full screen view for diagrams.

Publish

You can select one or several diagrams or folders and publish them (see Pub-
lishing diagrams in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub). The cor-
responding diagrams will be visible for all users in the folder tree. They will not be
accessible for colleagues who have been invited to comment on a specific dia-
gram by email but do not possess a SAP Signavio account.

Unpublish

You can use this option to remove a diagram from the folder tree. This option has
no influence on feedback invitations. If you would like to revoke those as well,
please click on the menu item Manage feedback Invitations and remove the cor-
responding e-mail addresses from the list.

Invite to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub

If you click this option, you can send an invitation to any e-mail address.

[Link] Embed diagram

With the dialog that opens, you can embed the corresponding diagram into
external systems (see Publishing diagrams to external systems) like webpages
or wikis in several ways, from simple HTML to Microsoft SharePoint.

4.14 Personal profile settings

You can use personal profile settings to customize SAP Signavio Process Man-
ager according to your needs. Profile settings are centrally managed in the My
profile dialog, which can be accessed via Setup - My profile.

Version 15.14 34
4   Getting started

In the 'My profile' dialog you can customize your user profile

If you have registered multiple workspaces with the same email

address, the settings for password, language and user name apply
globally for all workspaces. The settings or information about licenses,
groups, tips, and subscriptions apply to the current workspace.

4.14.1 Global settings

Global settings apply to all the workspaces you are registered with.
In the My profile dialog, you can add or edit the following information:

Version 15.14 35
4   Getting started

Parameter Description
These three fields make up your user name. It appears whenever you inter-
Academic title,
act with the software or a colleague, like in diagram version histories in the
first name, last
activity feed or when you invite someone to collaborate. Changes in the
name
user name are only displayed after reloading the page.
The email address you are registered with at SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Manager. You will get notifications from the SAP Signavio
software to this address if you have subscriptions.
Email
Note : Because this email is associated with your license, please
contact our SAP Signavio service experts on the SAP ONE Sup-
port Launchpad if you want to change it.
Company/Org. The name of your organization.
Here you can specify the language for your personal profile. After clicking
Language
Save, the page will be reloaded in the selected language.
To change your password, simply type the new password in the cor-
responding field, then again in the field below and click Save. The pass-
Password
word requirements can be set by the administrator. More information can
be found in the section Manage security settings.

4.14.2 Local settings and information

Local settings and information apply only to the workspace you are currently work-
ing in.
Parameter Description
This entry tells you what SAP Signavio licenses you are registered for. If
Edition
you need additional licenses, please contact your administrator.
The user groups you are a member of are listed here. Administrators can
Groups add and delete users to user groups as explained at Manage users and
groups.
Display
Activate the checkbox if you would like to see a new tip every day after
today's top tip
login.
automatically
All your subscriptions are listed here. You can delete those that are no
longer needed by clicking Remove. By default, new users are automatically
Subscriptions
subscribed to weekly email updates about changes to the 'Shared doc-
uments' folder.

Version 15.14 36
4   Getting started

4.15 Working with folders and diagrams

Folders allow you to organize and structure your workspace, even if you have a
large number of diagrams.
Diagrams placed in Shared documents can be viewed and edited by all users of
a workspace. Workspace administrators can enable the My documents folder
which is private. Other users can't view or edit them. Read more about how to
work with these folders in this section.
Notes on working with multiple users and workspaces can be found in the Man-
age users and access rights section.

4.15.1 The folder structure

The main workspace folder is Shared documents The My documents folder can
additionally be enabled by a workspace admin.
Within these folders, you can create subfolders to organize your diagrams.

Select a folder in the folder structure to see its content

Clicking the arrow next to the folder/s name or on folder/s name itself will col-
lapse or extend the folder. This way, you can quickly switch between folders and
still keep track, even if you have an extensive folder structure.

Version 15.14 37
4   Getting started

Expand or collapse a folder by clicking the arrow in front of its name

If the name of a folder is cut off due to the width of the folder column, the full
name will appear when hovering over it with your mouse. You can also extend the
folder column by dragging its border line to the right:

Extend the folder structure column

4.15.2 The 'Shared documents' and 'My documents' folders

With the 12.8.0 release workspace administrators can choose to dis-

able the My documents folder for every user in the workspace. This
prevents documents from being inaccessible. It also fosters col-
laboration by restricting drafts to Shared documents . For new tenants
the folder My documents is disabled by default but can be enabled by
an administrator under Setup > Edit general configuration .

Each registered user has a main folder: Shared documents . Aditionally, admin-
istrators can enable the folder My documents .

Version 15.14 38
4   Getting started

You can move diagrams from one folder to another .

[Link] My documents

Workspace administrators can enable the My documents folder for all users
under Setup > Edit general configuration . Diagrams in this folder and its sub-
folders are private. Other users can't view or edit them.

[Link] Shared documents

This folder contains diagrams you can work on alone and together with other
modelers.
There are two ways to collaborate with colleagues: joint modeling within your
workspace, and inviting colleagues to comment on diagrams.
o Only colleagues who are registered in your workspace are able to actually edit
diagrams. Find out more about defining access rights to diagrams and the Dic-
tionary at Manage access rights.
o Each person invited to comment on a diagram is able to do so - also those who
have no SAP Signavio Process Manager account. In the section Inviting stake-
holders to comment on a diagram, you will learn how to invite process stake-
holders to comment on a diagram.

4.15.3 Creating a new folder

To create a new folder, proceed as follows:

1. If you want to create a subfolder, first navigate to the folder in which you
want to locate the new folder.

Version 15.14 39
4   Getting started

2. In the menu bar, click New > Folder . A dialog pops up, in which you can
enter the folder name.

3. Specify the folder name and then click OK . The new folder is now visible in
the folder structure.

4.15.4 Renaming a folder or diagram

1. In the Explorer select the folder or diagram you want to rename.
2. In the main menu click Edit > Change name/description
3. Change the name. In multi-language workspaces translate the changed
name to all available languages.
4. Click Rename to save your changes.

4.15.5 Moving folders and diagrams

To move published folders and diagrams, you need publish access

rights on the published elements and on the target folder.

1. Select the folder or diagram you want to move to a different location.

2. In the menu bar, click Edit > Move . The corresponding dialog box opens.
3. Now select the new folder.
4. Click Move to complete the moving operation. The view of the folder will
then be updated.

Version 15.14 40
4   Getting started

If you don't have publish access rights on the published elements and on
the target folder, the following dialog opens:

5. Finally, click Move . The folder or diagram is moved to the selected location.

4.15.6 Copying diagrams

You can only copy diagrams and groups of diagrams, not entire
folders.

1. Select the diagram you want to copy. To copy several diagrams at once,
hold the Ctrl key while selecting them. Or, draw a selection frame around
the diagrams.

Version 15.14 41
4   Getting started

2. In the menu bar, click Edit and then Copy . The Copy dialog opens.

3. Select which folder you'd like to place the copy in.

4. Optionally, you can select one of the following options by activating the cor-
responding checkbox:
o Copy linked models, too Please note that BPMN call activities are not
copied.
o Copy all revisions of the diagram .

For system performance reasons, only one option can be selected.

5. Click Copy . The copied file is then located in the selected target folder.

4.15.7 Removing folders or diagrams

1. Select the folder or diagram to be removed in the main area of the Explorer.
To select multiple folders, keep Ctrl pressed while selecting, or draw a
selection frame around them.
2. In the menu bar, click Edit > Delete . A confirmation dialog appears.

Version 15.14 42
4   Getting started

3. Click Yes to delete the selected object.

The selected objects are moved only in Trash, from which you
can restore objects if necessary. Objects will be permanently
deleted after you empty Trash.

4. To delete objects permanently, select the Trash folder in the folder nav-
igation. All objects in Trash are displayed.
5. Select the objects you want to delete permanently.

6. In the menu bar, click Remove . A confirmation dialog appears.

7. Confirm by clicking Yes . The selected items are permanently deleted.

4.15.8 Restoring diagrams and folders

Diagrams and folders that have been deleted are moved to Trash folder. If you do
not explicitly remove them from there, they can be restored.
To restore a diagram or folder from the Trash folder, proceed as follows:

Version 15.14 43
4   Getting started

1. Go to the Trash folder. It can be found in the folder tree on the left.
2. Select the files you want to restore.

3. Click Restore in the menu bar.

4.16 Viewing diagram details

The notification and activity feed allows you to view and manage version history,
and to edit notification settings for diagrams and folders. If you have selected one
or more diagrams or folders, the feed is displayed as a lower bar in the Explorer.
When you select a diagram file, the diagram, along with the date and author of
the most recent changes, is displayed:

The notification and activity panel provides diagram details

4.16.1 Notification settings

As soon as changes to a diagram or folder are made, notifications are sent at con-
figurable intervals as emails. In the notification and activity feed, you can con-
figure the notification settings of the selected diagrams or folder.

Version 15.14 44
4   Getting started

The following options are available:

o daily
o weekly
o monthly
o cancel subscription

Options for the notification settings

4.16.2 Preview and version history

The activity feed allows you to get a preview of the selected diagram and to view
and manage the version history. You can find detailed information about this fea-
ture in the section The notification and activity feed.

4.17 Today's top tips

Today's top tip is displayed every day when you first open the Explorer:

You can re-open the current tip of the day via the Explorer's help menu :

Version 15.14 45
4   Getting started

You can (de-)activate the automatic display of tips in your profile settings:

4.18 The BPM Academic Initiative

The BPM Academic Initiative is a joint program of SAP Signavio and several
international universities to support business process management in academic
teaching and research. As part of the Academic Initiative, SAP Signavio allows
students and teachers to use the academic process modeling platform at aca-
[Link] for free, given the purpose is non-commercial and non-pro-
ductive.

Version 15.14 46
4   Getting started

Note the following differences between SAP Signavio's academic platform and
the commercial offering:
o It is illegal to use the academic platform for commercial or productive pur-
poses.
o All content users create on the academic platform may be made publicly avail-
able for research purposes (if requested, anonymized).
o SAP Signavio doesn't provide any performance or availability guarantees for
the academic platform. SAP Signavio may deploy code to the academic plat-
form before it is deemed mature enough for our commercial systems.
o The focus of the academic platform is process modeling. Many advanced pro-
cess management and collaboration features are not available. The same
applies to document uploads and interfaces for system integrations.
o While SAP Signavio generally handles requests from users of our academic
platform, questions and issues of paying customers are given a higher priority.
SAP Signavio doesn't commit to responding to inquiries of users of the aca-
demic platform within a specific timeframe.

If you accidentally registered for the Academic Initiative at aca-

[Link], please create a new account for one of the following sys-
tems:
o [Link] (Europe)
o [Link] (Americas)
o [Link] (APAC)

If you want to transfer your data from the academic platform to one of our pro-
duction systems, please contact our SAP Signavio service experts on the SAP
ONE Support Launchpad.

4.19 Frequently asked questions

4.19.1 How can I quickly display diagrams without opening the

Editor?
The fastest option is to use the diagram preview (see section Viewing diagram
details). Select a diagram in the Explorer and hit the space bar or use the arrow
symbol at the bottom left of the main window to expand the preview section.

Version 15.14 47
4   Getting started

SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub preview allows you to quickly nav-
igate the diagrams of your workspace. To open SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub preview, open the Explorer and select Share - Preview in SAP
Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.

4.19.2 How can I disable email notifications?

By default, the system informs you about every change made to a diagram you
are working on in a team. There are multiple ways to disable notifications:
o Select the diagram in the explorer, open the activity feed (press the space bar
) and click Don't notify me.
o Open your profile settings under Setup - My profile in the Explorer and scroll
down to the notification settings to adjust them.

4.19.3 My browser does not display SAP Signavio's applications

correctly. What can I do?
o Please ensure your browser supports SAP Signavio. Read more in section
Supported browsers.
o After a system update, in rare cases it is necessary to refresh the internal
storage (cache) of your browser.
For this, open the application in your browser and use one of the following
commands (depending on your operating system):
o Windows: Ctrl + F5
o Apple: Cmd + R
o Linux (typically): F5

Version 15.14 48
5   Modeling

5 Modeling
This section explains how you create models in all notations in SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Manager in the following sections:
o Create a diagram
o Open and save diagrams
o Editor toolbar and keyboard shortcuts
o Add and connect elements
o Move and change elements
o Format diagrams
o Work with modeling conventions

For information about modeling with specific notations, see section Modeling
notations.

5.1 Create a diagram

In SAP Signavio Process Manager, new diagram files are created in the explorer.
You edit diagrams in the editor.
To create a new diagram, click New in the explorer and select a modeling nota-
tion from the drop-down list. The editor opens with a blank canvas.

5.2 Editor overview

In the editor, you design, edit and format diagrams. You can also perform checks
on your diagrams. This overview can help you find the functions you need.

Version 15.14 49
5   Modeling

1 Shape repository Contains all modeling elements available for a nota-

tion, read more in section Add elements from the
shape repository

2 Canvas The area on which you design and edit diagrams,

read more in section Move and change elements

3 Dictionary Reuse modeling elements, read more in section Work-

ing with the dictionary

4 Toolbar The tools to edit and format diagrams, you find a

detailed description of the tool bar in the section
Editor toolbar and keyboard shortcuts

5 Share Invite users to comment on the diagram, read more in

section Inviting users to access a diagram in SAP
Signavio Process Collaboration Hub

6 User menu Here you can change the editing mode, open the
other SAP Signavio products and log out

7 Attributes Edit attributes of your modeling elements, read more

in section Edit attributes

8 Views Create and edit views, read more in section Create

views

5.2.1 User menu

The user menu has several sections.

Version 15.14 50
5   Modeling

The options in the section Editing mode depend on the current notation. For
example, for BPMN diagrams you have the following choices:
o QuickModel
o Graphical Editor
o Simulation
o Diagram comparison

If you have access to other products of the Business Transformation Suite, you
find them in the Products section. When you click a product name, the selected
product opens in a new tab.
In the Help section, you find the link to the user guide. You can also send us feed-
back or contact SAP Signavio Support.
You can log out of SAP Signavio Process Manager by clicking Logout.

5.3 Open and save diagrams

In SAP Signavio Process Manager, you open diagrams in the explorer. You're
editing diagrams in the editor.

5.3.1 Open a diagram

1. Open the explorer and navigate to the diagram.

2. Double-click the diagram. Alternatively, select the diagram and click Edit
> Edit diagram in the explorer menu.
The diagram is opened in the editor in a new browser tab.

5.3.2 Save a diagram

While you keep the editor browser tab open, your changes are saved auto-
matically in the background. When you save the diagram, you create a new dia-
gram revision.
All items related to a diagram by links are listed when you save a diagram.
To save a diagram, follow these steps:

Version 15.14 51
5   Modeling

1. Click in the toolbar.

2. When you save a diagram for the first time, enter a descriptive name and
select the directory for saving the diagram.
You can edit the diagram name later.

3. Add a comment about your current changes.

Adding comment helps other modelers and collaborators to understand and
track your changes. Your comments are shown in the in the feed in the
explorer.

4. Depending on the modeling notation, you can open the modeling con-

vention checks by clicking . This closes the Save dialog.

You can save the diagram with errors and warnings.

5. Click Save.
A new revision of the diagram is saved.

5.3.3 Restore older revisions of a diagram

You can restore a previous revision of a diagram in the activity feed.
Follow these steps:

1. Select a diagram.

2. Click Expand in the bottom panel of the explorer. Alternately, you can press
the space bar.
The panel expands, showing a preview of the diagram.

3. To access previous revisions, click Feed. The activity feed is displayed.

4. Select the revision you want to restore and click Restore revision.

5. Add a comment and confirm in the dialog.

The previous revision is restored.

Version 15.14 52
5   Modeling

5.3.4 Next steps

o Work with modeling conventions
o Compare revisions

5.4 Editor toolbar and keyboard shortcuts

5.4.1 Editor Toolbar

Save diagram
Save a copy: You can save the diagram as a copy. The copy is saved
in the same directory as its original.

Export diagram as PDF

Cut selected elements to clipboard

Copy selected elements to clipboard

Paste clipboard to canvas

Delete selected elements

Undo/ Redo

Align modeling elements, distribute elements, adjust size of elements to

match

Show or hide the grid on the canvas

Adjust space between modeling elements

Version 15.14 53
5   Modeling

Zoom in/out of the canvas

Reset the canvas to its default size

Fit the diagram to the canvas size

Change font size in elements

Bold

Italic

Change font color

Change line color of modeling elements

Change fill color of modeling elements

Remove current formatting

Apply formatting to other elements

Show all comments

Show risk and controls

Version 15.14 54
5   Modeling

Show all elements with attachments

Perform checks
The following checks are available by default:
o Syntax check
o Simulation capability
o Cost and resource analysis checks

Based on the modeling notation additional checks might be available

Select attribute visualizations (overlays)

Change workspace language

5.4.2 Keyboard Shortcuts

Shortcuts for Windows Shortcuts for Mac

Open dia- In the explorer, double click the dia- In the explorer, double click the dia-
gram gram name gram name
Open dia- In the explorer, select the diagram In the explorer, select the diagram
gram pre- and press Space and press Space
view
Save dia- Ctrl + S ⌘ +S
gram
Copy Ctrl + C ⌘ +C
selection
Paste Ctrl + V ⌘ +V
selection
Cut selec- Ctrl + X ⌘ +X
tion
Delete Del Del
selection
Undo Ctrl + Z ⌘ +Z

Redo Ctrl + Y ⌘ +Y

Version 15.14 55
5   Modeling

Shortcuts for Windows Shortcuts for Mac

Press Ctrl + + to make everything Press ⌘ + + to make everything

larger larger
Zoom Press Ctrl + - to make everything Press ⌘ + - to make everything
smaller smaller
Press Ctrl + 0 to reset Press ⌘ + 0 to reset

Press F11 to use full-screen mode, Press ⌘ + Ctrl + f to use full-screen

Full-
press F11 again to exit full-screen mode, press ⌘ + Ctrl + f again to exit
screen
mode full-screen mode
Resize ele- Hold Ctrl and drag the element Hold ⌘ and drag the element
ment
connector to resize in all dir- connector to resize in all dir-
ections ections
Hold Shift and drag the element Hold Shift and drag the element
connector to resize proportionally connector to resize proportionally
Hold Alt and drag the element Hold Alt and drag the element
connector to resize without snap- connector to resize without snap-
ping ping

Hold Alt or Ctrl while moving an Hold Alt or ⌘ while moving an

element to move without auto- element to move without auto-
matic snapping or orientation matic snapping or orientation
Move ele- lines lines
ments Hold Shift+Alt or Shift+Strg to Hold Shift+Alt or Shift+Strg to
move an element along a hori- move an element along a hori-
zontal or vertical line, without dis- zontal or vertical line, without dis-
played orientation lines played orientation lines

Adjust Press Ctrl + M and add or Press ⌘ + M and add or remove

space
remove space, press Ctrl + M space, press ⌘ + M again to
between
elements again to deactivate deactivate

Select ele- Select one or more elements element Select one or more elements element
ments of and press Ctrl + I and press ⌘ + I
the same
type

Version 15.14 56
5   Modeling

5.4.3 Next steps

o Format diagrams

5.5 Add and connect elements

You have the following options to add elements to a diagram:
o You can drag elements from the shape repository onto the canvas.
o You can use the interactive shortcut menu when you click an element on the
canvas.
o You can copy and paste elements.

5.5.1 Add elements from the shape repository

The shape repository in the left panel of the editor lists all modeling elements
available for a notation. For notations with lots of elements, elements are grouped
into subsets. To change subsets, click the current subset and select a different
subset from the drop-down list.
In a subset, elements are grouped thematically.
To add an element, follow these steps:

1. Click the element you want to add to your diagram.

2. Hold the mouse button and drag the element onto the canvas. Green icons

indicate where you can place an element.

3. To label an element, double-click the element and enter the label text in the
text box.
The label is saved when you click outside the text box. Available dictionary
entries are suggested while you type.

Version 15.14 57
5   Modeling

5.5.2 Add elements from the interactive shortcut menu

Which elements are shown in the interactive shortcut menu depends

on the selected subset of modeling elements. If you miss an element in
the shortcut menu, check which set of modeling elements is selected
in the shape repository.

To add an element, follow these steps:

1. Select an element in the diagram.

The shortcut menu opens. Depending on the selected element, the shortcut
menu suggests elements.

2. Click the icon of the element you want to add. The new element is added to
the diagram.
The connector type between the selected element and the new element is
set automatically.

When you want to add an element and set its position, click the element icon and
drag the element to its position. The new element is added to the diagram where
you release the mouse button.

5.5.3 Add pools and lanes

Add a pool by dragging the Pool/Lane element onto the canvas. Collapsed pools
can't contain elements.
Add a lane to a pool by dragging the Pool/Lane element onto a pool.
To add more lanes to a pool, drag a Pool/Lane element onto the left or right edge
of a lane.
To add a sublane, drag a Pool/Lane element onto the center of a lane.
To reorder lanes, you have the following options:
o Click the header and drag the lane to it's new location
o Click the header and use the arrow icons that are shown in the lane to move
it

Version 15.14 58
5   Modeling

5.5.4 Connect elements with flows

To connect elements with flows, drag the flow onto the target element. You can
also use the flow icons from the interactive shortcut menu.
When a connection is possible, green marks are shown on the edges on the ele-
ment.

When a connection isn't possible, red marks are displayed on the edges of the
element.

You can drag a new element onto a connector that already connects two ele-
ments. Then, the new element is added and connected automatically.

[Link] Add gateways to flows

When you drag a gateway onto a flow, the flow is split and connected to the gate-
way.

5.5.5 Copy elements

You can copy elements to create similar elements. You can also copy parts of old
diagrams to reuse in new diagrams.

1. Select the element you want to copy. Hold the Shift or Ctrl key to select mul-
tiple elements.

2. Click to copy, click to cut and click to paste elements. You can
also use the shortcuts Ctrl + C to copy, Ctrl + X to cut and Ctrl + V to paste
elements.

Version 15.14 59
5   Modeling

o Copying elements between different diagrams can take a while,

because they are copied to the server first.
o An internet connection is required for copying elements between
diagrams, but not for copying elements inside one diagram.

5.5.6 Remove elements

1. Select all elements you want to remove. To select multiple elements, press
and hold the left mouse button and draw a frame around the elements, or
press and hold the Ctrl key while you click the elements.

2. Press the Del key on your keyboard or click in the toolbar.

The elements are deleted.

5.5.7 Next steps

o Move and change elements
o Format diagrams
o Work with modeling conventions

5.6 Move and change elements

While modeling, you can change the position of elements and labels.
You can also adjust the space between elements or change the canvas size.
You can change the element type.

5.6.1 Move elements and labels

To move an element or a label to a new position, select and drag it.

5.6.2 Rename elements

To change the name of a label, double-click the element. Available dictionary
entries are suggested automatically.

Version 15.14 60
5   Modeling

5.6.3 Change element size

1. Select the element.

2. Click the bottom right corner or top left corner and drag the corner.

For more options, keep one or more of the following keys

pressed while you drag the element:
o Alt: Resize without snapping to other elements and ori-
entation lines
o Ctrl: Resize in every direction
o Shift: Resize the element proportionally

5.6.4 Adjust canvas space

You have two options to adjust the canvas area.
o You can add or remove space between elements.
o You can shrink or extend the whole canvas.

Shrinking the canvas isn't possible if there are elements in the affected
area.

To add or remove space between elements, follow these steps:

1. Enable the space adjusting function by clicking in the toolbar, or use

the shortcut Ctrl + M.
The mouse cursor turns into a cross and two lines are displayed on the can-
vas.

2. Where you want to adjust the space, click, hold and move the cursor.
Space is added or removed depending on your movements.
This works in all directions.

3. Release the mouse button.

Version 15.14 61
5   Modeling

4. Disable the space adjusting function by clicking in the toolbar, or use

the shortcut Ctrl + M.

To shrink or extend the whole canvas, follow these steps:

1. Move you cursor to one edge of the canvas.

Two arrow icons are displayed, and .

2. Click the inward-pointing arrow to shrink the canvas, click the outward-

pointing arrow to expand the canvas.

[Link] Zoom

To view the complete diagram on your screen, use the zoom icons, and .

o
To make everything on the canvas larger, click .

o
To make everything on the canvas smaller, click .

To return to the standard zoom level and view the diagram in its default size, click

To fit the diagram to your canvas size, click .

5.6.5 Change the element type

Changes that affect the appearance and behavior of an element, but

not its type, can be made in the attribute panel. For example, to
change a task into a script task, you set the attribute Task type to
Skript.

You can change the element type. For example, in BPMN the following trans-
formations are possible:

Version 15.14 62
5   Modeling

o task to subprocess
o plain start event to message start event
o collapsed pool to expanded pool

To transform an element, follow these steps:

1. Select the element you want to transform.

2. Click below the element.

3. Select the new element type.

The element is transformed.

In the following example a parallel gateway is changed into an exclusive gate-

way.

5.6.6 Edit attributes

Modeling elements have several properties you can edit. These properties are
called attributes. You can use attributes to change the appearance of an element
(for example the background color or label). Attributes can also be necessary to
execute a process, for example the decision logic in a DMN diagram is an attrib-
ute.
You edit attributes in the attribute panel on the right side of the editor.
o To change the attributes for one element, select the element and open the
attributes panel.
o To change diagram-wide attributes, click any empty space on the canvas and
open the attributes panel.

The first section of the attribute panel contains custom attributes,

which can be defined by your workspace administrators.

You can change attributes for one element and diagram-wide attributes.

[Link] Select all elements of the same type

Select all elements of the same type to change them at once.

Version 15.14 63
5   Modeling

o To select all elements of one type, select one element and press Ctrl + I. All
elements of the same type are selected.
o To select all elements of multiple types, select elements from each type and
press Ctrl + I. All elements of the chosen types are selected.

5.6.7 Attributes in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub

Attributes are displayed when diagrams are viewed in SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub. Which attributes are shown for SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub users depends on visibility settings for their user group.
Attributes can be populated from a linked diagram if an attribute with the same ID
is available for both the linking element and the linked diagram. For details, see
section Displayed attributes of SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub user
guide.
Your workspace administrator can create attributes with the same ID for different
elements. The workspace administrator guide explains how to do that in section
Add and manage custom attributes.

5.6.8 Next steps

o Format diagrams
o Work with modeling conventions

5.7 Format diagrams

To add clarity and to customize a diagram, you can re-align and resize elements
and change their color, size, label, border and background style.

5.7.1 Align and distribute elements

Use the alignment menu in the toolbar to align or distribute selected ele-
ments.
Select the elements to align or distribute and choose from the following options:

Version 15.14 64
5   Modeling

Alignment Left Aligns elements along their left edges, with the ele-
ment positioned farthest to the left as the reference
element

Alignment Aligns elements vertically through their centers, using

Center the mean value of all centers

Alignment Right Aligns elements along their right edges, with the ele-
ment positioned farthest to the right as the reference
element

Alignment Top Aligns elements along their top edges, with the
highest element as the reference element

Alignment Aligns elements horizontally through their middles,

Middle using the mean value of all middles

Alignment Bot- Aligns elements along their bottom edges, with the
tom lowest element as the reference element

Distribute ele- You need to select at least 3 elements for this func-
ments hori- tion.
zontally Distributes elements evenly on a horizontal axis, the
outer 2 elements keep their position

Distribute ele- You need to select at least 3 elements for this func-
ments vertically tion.
Distributes elements evenly on a vertical axis, the
outer 2 elements keep their position

Same Size Resizes the elements to the size of the largest ele-
ment in the selection

5.7.2 Format elements and labels

You can change the attribute values of an element in the attribute panel to
change its appearance:

Version 15.14 65
5   Modeling

o Change the label either by clicking the element or the attribute name.

o
Change the element color by clicking in the toolbar.

o
Change the border color by clicking in the toolbar.
o Change the color gradient of an element's background to a flat design. To
do this, enable Flat design under More Attributes in the attribute panel.

You can change the labels with the following tools in the toolbar:

o
Change the font size

o
Make the font bold

o
Make the font italics

o
Change the font color

[Link] Copy and apply formatting

1. Select the element that has the format you want to copy.

2. Click in the toolbar.

3. Select the element you want to apply the formatting to. The copied format-
ting is applied.

To apply the default format to an element, select the element and click .

[Link] Select all elements of the same type

Select all elements of the same type to change them at once.

o To select all elements of one type, select one element and press Ctrl + I. All
elements of the same type are selected.
o To select all elements of multiple types, select elements from each type and
press Ctrl + I. All elements of the chosen types are selected.

5.8 Work with modeling conventions

Version 15.14 66
5   Modeling

Access to this feature depends on your license.

Modeling conventions make it easier to use a consistent modeling style.

A modeling convention consists of modeling guidelines regarding notation set,
labeling, process structure and diagram layout
With modeling convention checks, you can find out if a diagram violates these
guidelines. You can run a check while modeling or when you save a diagram.
Additionally, you can create a modeling conventions report after a check that con-
tains an summary of the errors. Modeling conventions can be defined by your
workspace administrator.
To run the check, you have several options:

o
Click in the editor toolbar and select the convention.
o Depending on your workspace settings, a prompt for a check when saving a

diagram can be integrated. In this case, click in the save dialog.

o Select Help > Modeling Conventions in the menu of the explorer.

Elements which violate conventions are flagged with an exclamation mark. To

view a short info about the violation, hover over the exclamation mark. Addi-
tionally, the information is summarized in a table below the process diagram.
In the table, click the element to view it in the diagram. If available, click the link

icon for more information about a guideline.

5.8.1 Modeling conventions report

You can create a modeling convention report for one or multiple diagrams in the
explorer. The report contains a summary of violations of modeling conventions
and is generated as an XLSX file.
To create a report, follow these steps:

1. Select Reporting > Modeling Conventions in the explorer.

2. Select the diagrams and modeling conventions you want to include.

Version 15.14 67
5   Modeling

3. Click Start analysis.

An XLSX file is generated.

5.9 The dictionary

The dictionary is the central object management repository in SAP Signavio. A
dictionary entry represents an object that is relevant for one or more of your pro-
cesses. With the dictionary you can manage and re-use specific modeling ele-
ments. The dictionary also helps you make sure all your modelers are using the
same terms and the same elements in your organization-specific modeling envir-
onment.
The dictionary is a crucial component to achieve a consistent and well-structured
business objects management in your diagrams.

5.9.1 Working with the dictionary

Access rights for the complete dictionary and dictionary categories are
set by your workspace administrator. The actions available to you
depend on your access rights.

The dictionary allows you to search, view, create, edit, delete, and publish dic-
tionary entries.
To open the dictionary, click the Dictionary folder in the navigation tree on the left
side in the explorer. The dictionary opens in a new browser tab.

Version 15.14 68
5   Modeling

Select a dictionary entry. Its full description, a list of attached documents and a
list of diagrams referencing that entry is displayed.

[Link] Navigating the dictionary

You can navigate the dictionary by using the dictionary categories.

1. Click the category that you want to display (for example, 'Roles').
2. Use the alphabet links at the top to navigate to the entry you are looking for
faster.

[Link] Finding out where a dictionary entry is used

To find out where a specific dictionary entry is referenced in your process land-
scape, select the entry and click Show usages. A dialog opens and displays the

Version 15.14 69
5   Modeling

type and name of the referencing elements, as well as the names of the ref-
erencing diagrams. Clicking Load next allows you to view links to the referencing
elements to analyze the whole chain of references:

[Link] Switching the language

If there are multiple languages activated for your workspace, you can switch
between them by clicking the language symbol.

Dictionary entries that have not been translated into the currently selected lan-
guage are displayed in their default language and marked with a country flag.

[Link] Full-text search

You can find specific entries with the full-text search.

1. Enter your search terms in the search field.

2. Press Enter. The search results are listed. The order indicates the entries'
relevance regarding the search. For example, an entry with your search
terms in the title will rank higher than one with the terms only in the

Version 15.14 70
5   Modeling

description.

[Link] The activity feed

Similar to the activity feed in the explorer, the dictionary feed allows you to man-
age revisions.

The revision feed opens automatically once you select a dictionary entry. When
selecting a revision in the feed, you can trigger the following activities:
o Restore
Restores your entry to a previous version. Note that this does not delete revi-
sions, but allows you to switch between them.
o Publishing
Makes this revision available in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.
By default, the newest revision is automatically published upon creation.

Version 15.14 71
5   Modeling

o Unpublishing
Revokes the revision's publication in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration
Hub.

The buttons to publish and unpublish revisions are only active in

categories for which Publishing Mode has been set to Manual .
See Add custom categories for dictionary entries for details.

[Link] Managing dictionary entries

Creating new dictionary entries

To create a new dictionary entry, proceed as follows:

1. Click New in the top toolbar. TheNew Entry dialog opens.

2. In the New Entry dialog box, make the following configuration:

Version 15.14 72
5   Modeling

Parameter Description
Category A number of possible attributes can be defined for a dictionary entry. Start
with selecting a category for the entry, as the category may affect the cus-
tom attributes that can be defined for the entry. Read more about the con-
figuration of dictionary categories in section Add custom categories for
dictionary entries.
Language Select the desired language in the drop-down menu. Attribute values of dic-
tionary entries can be defined in multiple languages. Please make sure that
the title of the entry is defined in at least one language. You can link dic-
tionary entries by their name by beginning to type the title of the entry that is
supposed to be linked and choosing it from the auto-completion drop-down
menu. This is useful if a dictionary entry contains other dictionary entries in
its title. For example, the dictionary entry Prepare loan application for
check by risk manager can reference loan applicationand risk manager
as further entries. Readers - especially SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub users - can now easily navigate to these entries via the
established references.
Title Enter the name of the dictionary entry (mandatory).
Description Enter a short description. You can format this description, as you already
know it from common writing programs or the Editor.
Relevant To attach documents, edit the attribute Attached documents.
documents
Class name This name is not available by default. An administrator must
enable it.
The class name is relevant when exporting a DMN diagram to
Drools files. When modeling, the standard name of the dictionary
entry is always used. Read more in section Add export names to
data input objects.

Technical This name is not available by default. An administrator must

name
enable it.
The technical name is relevant when exporting a DMN diagram to
XML or Drools files. When modeling, the standard name of the dic-
tionary entry is always used. Read more in section Export a DMN
diagram as XML and Exporting DMN diagrams as drools rules.

3. Click Create to save the dictionary entry.

Version 15.14 73
5   Modeling

Editing dictionary entries

To edit an existing dictionary entry, follow these steps:

1. Choose the dictionary entry you want to edit and click Edit. The edit dialog
for dictionary entries opens.

2. Edit the dictionary entry.

3. Click Save.

If the category of the dictionary term you are trying to edit is set to
automatically update when making changes, the diagram ele-
ments that refer to this entry will be updated automatically. This
will create new versions of the diagram. If there are many dia-
grams affected, it may take up to 30 seconds to save your
changes.

Version 15.14 74
5   Modeling

Deleting dictionary entries

To delete an existing dictionary entry, proceed as follows:

1. Select the dictionary entry you want to delete.

2. Click the Delete button in the top toolbar. A confirmation dialog will tell you
about the diagrams that will be affected.

3. Click Yes to confirm deletion. If you don't want to delete the entry after all,
click No.

Referencing documents

You can reference external documents for a dictionary entry while creating or edit-
ing it.

1. Select a dictionary entry and then click Edit. The Edit entry dialog box
opens.

2. Scroll to the attribute Relevant documents and select Add a new doc-
ument. The dialog Link files/ pictures opens.

Version 15.14 75
5   Modeling

3. Select a file from your SAP Signavio team directory. Alternatively, you can
upload a new file/picture from your local file storage.
4. Click Add. The selected file is added to the dictionary entry.

Please take the chapter Managing external data sources into

account.

Publishing dictionary entries

If a dictionary entry is set to manual publishing mode and has been altered
without being republished, an appropriate warning notice will appear, when the
dictionary entry is used in the Editor.

If this is the case, make sure that the current dictionary entry is also published
when publishing the diagram.
To publish a dictionary entry, proceed as follows:

Version 15.14 76
5   Modeling

1. First select the entry you want to publish.

2. Open the activity feed at the bottom by clicking Expand.

3. Click the desired revision of the dictionary entry in the activity feed. An
information dialog box opens.

4. Click Publish. The dictionary entry is now published in SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Collaboration Hub.

Version 15.14 77
5   Modeling

5.9.2 Use the dictionary while modeling

Access rights for the complete dictionary and dictionary categories are
set by your workspace administrator. The actions available to you
depend on your access rights.

Most dictionary functions can be used directly in the editor.

While modeling, you can do the following:
o Use suggested dictionary entries
o Search for available dictionary entries
o Create new dictionary entries

[Link] Use suggested dictionary entries

Available dictionary entries are suggested when you enter a label name.

This feature supports wildcards (*). For example, typing C*O may
return the entries CIO, CFO, and CEO.

To reuse dictionary entries, follow these steps:

1. Enter a label for the diagram element. While you type, dictionary entries are
suggested below the element.

By default, only dictionary entries whose category type matches the ele-
ment type are suggested.

2. Click an entry to link it to the element. The entry's title is now the element's
label and the attribute values of the dictionary entry are applied. Elements

that reference dictionary entries are marked with the dictionary icon .

Example:

Version 15.14 78
5   Modeling

[Link] Search for available dictionary entries

To find available dictionary entries, use the search below the shape repository.
Follow these steps:

1. Enter a search term. Search results are listed as you type.

2. You can apply a filter to include only specific dictionary categories.
3. When the search was successful, drag the dictionary entry onto the diagram
canvas. The dictionary entry is referenced and its attribute values are
applied to the element.

[Link] Create new dictionary entries

You can add new dictionary entries while modeling.

To create a new dictionary entry, follow these steps:

1. Enter the label of a diagram element.

2. Click . The New entry dialog opens.

3. A category for the dictionary entry is automatically preselected, depending
on the element. You can change the category in the drop-down menu.
4. Enter a short description of the dictionary entry. You can format the text.
5. To add documents to a dictionary entry, click Add a new document and add
the link in the dialog. You can add multiple documents.
6. Click Create.
The dictionary entry is created and the diagram element references this

Version 15.14 79
5   Modeling

entry. Elements that reference dictionary entries are marked with the dic-

tionary icon .

Example:

New entries are created in the language currently selected for the diagram. To
translate entries, open them in the dictionary. See section Working with the dic-
tionary.

[Link] Open dictionary entries

If an element references a dictionary entry, you can view the entry by clicking

.
To edit the entry, click Open in dictionary. The full dictionary entry opens in a
new browser tab.

[Link] Remove links to dictionary entries

When you want to link an element to a different dictionary entry, you first need to
remove the current link.
Follow these steps:

1. Open the entry by clicking the dictionary icon .

2. Click Remove link and confirm the removal in the dialog.

[Link] Publish dictionary entries

If a dictionary entry is set to manual publishing mode and has been altered
without being republished, the editor displays a warning.

Version 15.14 80
5   Modeling

To avoid this, make sure you publish the current entry dictionary along with the
diagram you're creating.

[Link] Overwrite dictionary entries locally

This section describes local changes for attributes. To edit a dictionary entry, see
section Editing dictionary entries.
To specify a value for the current process context, you can overwrite attribute val-
ues from a referenced dictionary entry locally.

Local modifications are not applied to the dictionary. When you over-
write dictionary entries, these changed element properties are no
longer managed centrally in the dictionary. This can cause incon-
sistencies between elements that reference the same dictionary entry.

To overwrite the value of an attribute, follow these steps:

1. Open the attribute panel. All attributes that are defined by a dictionary entry

are marked with the dictionary icon .

2. In the diagram, select the element with the attribute you want to change.

3. Click the attribute value in the attribute panel.

You are warned that local changes do not affect the dictionary entry.

4. Click OK to continue. Depending on the attribute, an editing dialog opens.

5. Enter the attribute value. When the new value is applied, the attribute is

marked with a red dictionary icon .

You can't overwrite a dictionary attribute value with its default

value.

Remove local changes

To undo the local change of an attribute value, follow these steps:

Version 15.14 81
5   Modeling

1. Open the attribute panel. All attributes with local changes are marked with a

red dictionary icon .

2. Click the red dictionary icon .

3. The dialog Dictionary entry opens. Here, the local changes and the attrib-
ute in the dictionary entry are shown.

4. To reset the value to the value from the dictionary entry, click Revert.
The reversion is confirmed.

5. Close the dialog with Close.

5.9.3 Merging dictionary entries

The Dictionary allows you to keep all the terms that are often used in your dia-
grams in one easy-to-reference place. However, over time the use of terms can
change, entries with a similar meaning but different description might be added,
and extraneous copies of existing entries might be created when many modelers
work together. Duplication can also happen when importing Signavio archive
(.SGX) files, because entries from these files will automatically be added to the
Dictionary. Regardless of the source, merging dictionary entries will help you
keeping the Dictionary in good condition.
The following example shows the merging of the entries ACME AG and ACME
Inc. , so that there is only one entry for the German and the English naming con-
vention of the company.
o Open the Dictionary and choose the category the entries can be found in.
o Choose the first dictionary entry you want to merge. (If desired, you can select
multiple entries at once.)

Version 15.14 82
5   Modeling

o Click the toolbar button Merge Dictionary Entries .

o Enter the name of the second dictionary entry into the field Add Dictionary
Entry . Use the auto-completion here. You can merge as many entries as you
want using this method.

Use the auto-completion to add more entries

o Choose the elements to be added to the resulting entry. Attached documents,
linked dictionary items, and links are added to the target entry automatically.

Select the fields that will be included in the resulting entry

o Click Merge and confirm the warning.

Version 15.14 83
5   Modeling

o The entries are merged. The resulting entry will be displayed, and can now be
edited.

5.9.4 Referencing external data sources

To be able to reference external data sources, you need to implement

and configure the corresponding interface first. Read more at
Managing external data sources

Once an external service has been set up, it can be selected in the Dictionary
under Simple Type - External Enumeration of Values .
In the Dictionary, all categories that can be used to define input data can have dic-
tionary entries that make use of external data. To be able to define input data for
a category, the check-box Use as DMN input data has to be activated.
To reference an external data source in a dictionary item, use Simple Type in the
Type Definition field and choose ExternalService as Value Domain . Now, the
field Service allows you to select one of the services that have been registered:

When the dictionary item is used in a decision table, the service response will
determine the data type, for example enumeration or hierarchy.

Version 15.14 84
5   Modeling

5.9.5 Recommendations: Dictionary content management

The dictionary is included with SAP Signavio Process Manager and can be used
in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub and integrated with SAP Signavio
Process Governance. This document explains how to create useful dictionary
content for your workspace, how to maintain the dictionary and how to keep it con-
sistent over time.

[Link] Getting started

The initial dictionary contains the default categories and exemplary entries for
most categories. The default categories cannot be deleted. The exemplary
entries give you an idea how entries can look like for the different categories.
You can add custom categories and subcategories.
While dictionary entries and categories differ from company to company and
between industry sectors, the following four categories are usually useful for all
customers:
o Organizational units
o Roles

o Departments

o External participants

o Documents
o IT systems
o Risks & controls

Often, activities and events are not suitable for standardization across
a workspace and therefore hard to define as dictionary entries. You
can leave the default categories Activities and Events empty.

When you have existing definitions and possible entries for one category or mul-
tiple categories, we recommend that you add these existing content to the dic-
tionary. Dictionary entries can be added one by one using the dictionary
interface. There are two additional ways to add dictionary entries:
o You can import dictionary entries in batches as Microsoft Excel files.

Version 15.14 85
5   Modeling

o Dictionary entries can be created while processes are modeled in SAP Sig-
navio Process Manager by your modeling users. We recommend this process
when you have no existing definitions to import.

Importing new entries as Microsoft Excel (XLS or XLSX) files

You can import existing definitions into the dictionary as Excel files. You import
one category or one subcategory at a time. For a successful import, the structure
of the Excel file needs to fulfill certain requirements.
To make sure that the structure of the Excel file matches the requirements, export
one of the available dictionary categories and use this file as a template.
Export dictionary entries
Import dictionary entries

Creating new entries in the editor

Every modeling shape provides the option to directly create a new dictionary
entry without leaving the current model. When no preexisting definitions to pop-
ulate the dictionary are available, modelers can fill the dictionary while they are
mapping processes.
Create new dictionary entries

Assigning dictionary managers

To keep the dictionary consistent and to avoid the creation of duplicates, we

recommend that you have designated dictionary managers. Only this group of
users should get write permissions to the entire dictionary.
To enable all modelers to suggest new entries, create suggestion categories. You
can limit writing access to these suggestion categories. Detailed permissions per
dictionary category can be set in the user management.
Every dictionary entry has a unique ID that is used to link the entry to an element.
This means the suggested dictionary entries can be used by all modelers while
still in the suggestion category. The link between dictionary entries and modeling
shapes stay intact when dictionary managers change the category of entries.
The dictionary managers should regularly take over entries from the suggestion
categories so that new entries are added to the main categories in reliable inter-
vals. Dictionary managers can subscribe to the suggestion categories to get noti-
fied about changes automatically.
Set access rights for the dictionary

Version 15.14 86
5   Modeling

Editing dictionary entries

[Link] Avoiding duplicates

There are several ways duplicate entries are created:

o Modeling users create a new entry, but a similar entry already exists.
o When you import Excel files with dictionary entries, the option Create new
entries for all rows is enabled
o SGX files are imported, with the enabled option to import the contained dic-
tionary entries

When several languages are set for your workspace, users can select a language
for a dictionary entry. This can result in duplicate entries that are not easily recog-
nized because they are in different languages.
When you use suggestion categories and designated dictionary managers, they
should detect duplicates when they move entries out of the suggestion category.
When you import Excel files with dictionary entries, select the options carefully to
avoid undesired results.

[Link] Merging dictionary entries

When you have duplicate dictionary entries, you can merge entries so that no
information gets lost.
Merging dictionary entries

[Link] Deleting dictionary categories and entries

You can delete dictionary entries and all dictionary categories you have created.
It is not possible to delete the default categories.
Before you can delete a dictionary category, you have to delete all entries in that
category, or move them to different categories.
Deleting dictionary entries

5.9.6 Tutorial: How to use the dictionary as a modeler

This tutorial describes how to use the Dictionary as a business process/business
decision modeler.
You will learn how to...

Version 15.14 87
5   Modeling

o ...reference and create dictionary objects directly from the modeling canvas.
o ...drag & drop existing dictionary entries as modeling elements from the ele-
ment repository onto the canvas.
o ...manage changes to diagram elements.

Following our recommendations will increase your modeling speed as well as the
consistency and completeness of your process landscape.
Let's start by creating a new process as part of our example process landscape.
First, we create a pool for our company. The pool ACME AG can be dropped from
the dictionary entry repository on the left side of the modeling canvas. It is directly
available under Frequently used dictionary items :

Drag & drop from the element the dictionary entry repository
In the attribute panel on the right-hand side we can see that element attributes
have been filled in automatically, based on the attribute values of the dictionary
item:

Version 15.14 88
5   Modeling

The attribute values are fetched from the referenced dictionary entry
Subsequently, we want to add the organizational role Approver as a lane.
We are not sure if a corresponding dictionary entry exists, so we simply start to fill
in the corresponding label. As we type, the dictionary entry Approver is sug-
gested as a reference.
We select the entry to assign it to the lane:

Select the dictionary entry you want to reference

If the default Dictionary settings have not been changed, only dic-
tionary items that match the corresponding element type are sug-
gested. In our case, only organizational units and IT systems are
suggested and e.g. no events or activities. IT systems can be

Version 15.14 89
5   Modeling

referenced from pools and lanes because they are similar to organ-
izational units in their ability to execute tasks. For example, the task
'Send email' can be executed by both an employee and an IT system.

Now we add a start event and name it Employment contract received

We can assume that this event is only occurring in this one diagram, so we don't
need to create a dictionary entry for it.

Subsequently, we create the task Review employment contract. No dictionary

entry is suggested by the system. Let's now assume that we need to create the
same task in a different process later on. Thus, we create a new dictionary entry
by clicking the dictionary icon at the lower left corner of the element:

Create a new dictionary entry

The dictionary entry is now available in the dictionary element repository.
The document employment contract already exists:

Version 15.14 90
5   Modeling

Reference the dictionary item 'employment contract'

Now, we want to link the IT system that the approver needs to use. We don't know
which system to use exactly, so we use the filter function of the dictionary ele-
ment repository to gain an overview over our IT systems:

Filter the dictionary for IT systems

We identify Personnel System as the correct IT System and drag it onto the mod-
eling canvas:

We can refer to the steps described above to continue adding elements to our
model.

Version 15.14 91
5   Modeling

Generally, we recommend to re-use dictionary entries wherever it makes sense

and to create or reference dictionary entries for all elements that are likely to be
re-used. This prevents duplicates and inconsistent information in your SAP Sig-
navio workspace.
However, when revising the process, we find that the role Approver is too generic
for our purpose:

The dictionary entry does not provide specific information

To adjust the element, we have three options:
o Edit the element ( not recommended ):
We can edit the attribute documentation and adjust it to a more specific
description.

Before editing the attribute, a warning will appear:

A warning is displayed, as element attribute and dictionary item attribute will no

longer be consistent
After the attribute was edited, a warning icon next to the attribute indicates that
the value is not consistent with the corresponding value of the referenced dic-
tionary item:

Version 15.14 92
5   Modeling

The warning sign indicates the inconsistency between element attribute and dic-
tionary item attribute
However, this procedure is not recommended, as it makes it very hard to detect
the difference between the approver in our current lane and other lanes ref-
erencing the approver object. Moreover, it is no longer possible to centrally man-
age the attribute value via the Dictionary.

[Link] Adjust the dictionary entry:

We can click the dictionary item and select Open in dictionary :

Now, we can click Edit and adjust the dictionary entry our needs:

This option is recommended if the dictionary entry is generally not correct or

lacks information. This does not apply in our case.

Version 15.14 93
5   Modeling

[Link] Create a new dictionary entry (recommended in our case)

As our approver is a human resource/legal specialist, we need to add more spe-

cific information. However, we can assume that the approver reference in other
diagrams doesn't match our new specification. In that case, we will need to click
the dictionary icon next to the entry and select Remove link :

We confirm the action and rename the lane with a more specific term, for example
Legal approver (HR) . Subsequently, we add a new dictionary entry:

We recommend to avoid inconsistencies between dictionary entries

and referencing elements and to avoid re-purposing dictionary entries
because of one specific reference . In such cases, the creation of a
new Dictionary is usually the best alternative.

Version 15.14 94
5   Modeling

5.10 Process hierarchies

You create process hierarchies to map the processes on all levels of your organ-
ization.
With value chain diagrams, you can create high-level perspectives on your pro-
cess landscape. The diagram elements are linked in chronological order to show
the hierarchical relationships between processes and process groups. With the
collapsed process element, you can link BPMN diagrams to the value chain dia-
gram.
BPMN is used to map the detailed processes. The processes in BPMN diagrams
are also showing different process levels. You create a high-level overview of a
main process and in separate diagrams you model subprocesses. Then you link
these subprocesses to the main process. We recommend linking subprocesses
with the collapsed subprocess element, which links to subprocesses defined in
separate models.

5.10.1 Next steps

o Value chains
o Create subprocesses

5.11 Create subprocesses

When you create a high-level overview of the main process, you model sub-
processes in separate diagrams and link these subprocesses to the main pro-
cess.
There are two ways to add subprocesses to diagrams, as expanded or collapsed
subprocesses.
With the expanded subprocess element, subprocesses are shown with the main
process. Since this does increase diagram size and visual complexity, we recom-
mend using the collapsed subprocess element, which links to subprocesses
defined in separate models.

Version 15.14 95
5   Modeling

5.11.1 When to use subprocesses

Subprocesses can be complete processes or partial processes. They can only be
executed as parts of a larger process.
You can reuse subprocesses in multiple diagrams. We recommend using a sub-
process in the following cases:
o a part of the process is the same for several processes
o a part of the process is changed often
o a part of the process is executed differently but the main process is the same

A subprocess needs to be a process, with a start and end event. When you have
a complex activity that cannot be meaningfully divided into different tasks, use a
task element in your process model.

5.11.2 Subprocess elements

The notations in which you use subprocesses are usually value chains and
BPMN models. In value chains, you use the Collapsed Process element. In
BPMN diagrams , you use the Collapsed Subprocess element.
Elements that link to other diagrams are marked with a + icon. This is the Col-
lapsed Subprocess element in BPMN:

5.11.3 Add subprocesses to a diagram

The following descriptions apply to BPMN diagrams, linking diagrams

to elements is similar for other notations.

You have the following options to create subprocesses:

o When you have a complex diagram, you can group parts into subprocesses.
o You can add a Collapsed Subprocess element to your diagram.

Version 15.14 96
5   Modeling

o From the subprocess element, you can create a subprocess diagram

that is automatically linked.
o When you already have a subprocess defined, you can add a sub-
process element to the main diagram and link your defined sub-
process to this element.
You can link diagrams in your workspace, or diagrams in other loc-
ations via URL.

[Link] Group diagram elements into a subprocess

1. Open the BPMN diagram.

2. Select the process elements you want to group. It is possible to select only
one element.

3. Click below your selection and select Collapsed subprocess.

4. Enter a name for the subprocess and click Create linked subprocess.
The subprocess is saved as a new diagram. In the original diagram, a Col-
lapsed Subprocess element replaces the subprocess.

The new diagram is created in the same folder as the original diagram. Refresh
the explorer to view it.

[Link] Link a diagram to a subprocess element

1. Select a Collapsed Subprocess element in your diagram and click the +

symbol.
The Establish link dialog opens.

2. Select one of the options to add a link:

o Use existing diagram. Select the diagram to link in the folder struc-
ture.
o Use web link. Paste the URL to the input field.

3. If the preview is too small, enlarge the Establish link dialog.

4. Click Link diagram.

The diagram is linked to the subprocess element.

Version 15.14 97
5   Modeling

[Link] Create a new subprocess from the subprocess element

1. Select a Collapsed Subprocess element in your diagram and click the +

symbol.
The Establish link dialog opens.

2. Enter a diagram name in the text field.

3. Select the diagram type.

4. Click Link diagram.

A diagram is created and opened in a new tab.

5.11.4 Change linked diagrams

Once you have added a linked subprocess to a process, you can open the linked
diagram from the subprocess element.
In a Collapsed Subprocess element in your diagram, click the + symbol.
A preview of the currently linked diagram is displayed. If the preview is too small,
enlarge the Establish link dialog.
o To open the diagram in a new browser tab, click Open.
o To select a new diagram to link, click Edit link.
o To remove a diagram link, click Remove link.

5.11.5 View linked elements

You can view all related items in the attribute panel in the section Diagram rela-
tions.
In addition, all items related to a diagram by links are listed when you save a dia-
gram.

5.12 Add Live Insights

With the Live Insights shapes, you can add insights and KPIs you want to monitor
to BPMN diagrams and value chains.

Version 15.14 98
5   Modeling

For that, you add a Live Insights shape to your diagram and link it with a widget
from SAP Signavio Process Intelligence. Users can then view the Live Insights in
SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.
In SAP Signavio Process Intelligence, thresholds need to be defined for the wid-
gets that are linked to Live Insights shapes. In SAP Signavio Process Manager,
the color of the shape indicates how the current result of the widget relates to the
defined thresholds. The following example shows how the sentiment shape
reflects the current widget result:

The color of a shape is only visible in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.
In SAP Signavio Process Manager, the shapes stay grey.

5.12.1 Access the Live Insights shapes

You find the Live Insights shapes in the Live Insights shape repository. A work-
space administrator can enable this shape repository for you.

5.12.2 Visibility of Live Insights

The visibility of Live Insights in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub is sub-
ject to requirements. Read more in section Visibility of embedded widgets.

5.12.3 Overview over Live Insights shapes

The following Live Insights shapes are available:

Version 15.14 99
5   Modeling

Shape Description Example

Indicator Displays process performance data in form of a plain icon.

Traffic Displays process performance data in form of a traffic light.

Light

Cockpit Displays process performance data in form of an cockpit icon.

Value Displays a value including its unit if a unit is configured in

the widget.
The following applies:
o You can only link a Value widget to this shape.
o In SAP Signavio Process Intelligence, the widget
needs to be configured with SiGNAL code.
o You can't set a manual value for this shape.

Sentiment Displays process performance data in the form of a sentiment

icon.

Trend Displays process performance data in form of a trend icon.

Progress Displays process performance data in form of a progress bar.

bar

Ring chart Displays process performance data in form of a ring chart.

5.12.4 Link a shape to a widget

Follow these steps:

1. In SAP Signavio Process Intelligence, get the ID of the widget you want to
add to your diagram. Read more in section Get the widget ID.

2. In SAP Signavio Process Manager, open your diagram and add or select a
Live Insights shape.

3. Open the attributes panel and paste the widget ID to Driving widget.

Version 15.14 100

5   Modeling

4. In addition, you have the following options:

o Name: Enter a name for the shape.
o Documentation: Enter a description for the shape.
o Additional widget: Add more widgets by pasting their IDs. The wid-
gets are displayed in the details panel of the diagram when users click
the Live Insights shape.
Only the driving widget sets the shape color.

5. Save your diagram.

5.12.5 Use shape with a manual value

Follow these steps:

1. In SAP Signavio Process Manager, open your diagram and add or select a
Live Insights shape.

2. Open the attributes panel and enter the value you want to display in Manual
value.

3. In addition, you have the following options:

o Name: Enter a name for the shape.
o Documentation: Enter a description for the shape.
o Additional widget: Add more widgets by pasting their IDs. The wid-
gets are displayed in the details panel of the diagram when users click
the Live Insights shape.

4. Save your diagram.

5.12.6 Next steps

Get the widget ID

5.13 Link to files in diagrams

From a diagram or from diagram elements, you can link to online documents, files
in your document management system, or files in your network.

Version 15.14 101

5   Modeling

There are two ways of linking documents to diagrams:

o To access documents from different elements or diagrams, link them to dic-
tionary entries.
o To make the document accessible only from one diagram, use a custom
attribute.

5.13.1 Use dictionary entries to link documents

We recommend to create dictionary entries to link documents to elements. You
can reuse dictionary entries throughout your process landscape.
To link a document to a dictionary entry, follow these steps:

1. From the explorer, open the dictionary.

2. Add a new dictionary entry or edit an available entry:

o To create a new entry, click New.

o
To open an existing entry, select the entry and click Edit.

3. In Relevant documents, add the link.

The documents aren't uploaded to SAP Signavio Process Man-

ager. Ensure that all users can access the linked documents.

5.13.2 Use a custom attribute to link documents

Custom attributes are defined by your workspace administrator. The name for the
custom attribute used for linking documents is specific to your workspace.
You have several options for adding a file to a diagram:
o You can upload a file to the SAP Signavio file storage.
o You can link to a file in the SAP Signavio file storage.
o You can link to files in your document management system, in your network,
or to online documents.

Version 15.14 102

5   Modeling

SAP Signavio Process Manager is not designed as a document man-

agement system. We recommend linking to documents instead of
uploading documents.

To add a link to a document to your diagram, follow these steps:

1. Select the diagram element to which you want to add a linked document. If
you don't select an element, the link is added to the diagram.

2. Open the attribute panel.

3. In the section Custom Attributes, select the custom attribute used for link-
ing documents in your workspace.

4. Click the icon.

5. Click Add a new document.

6. Select one of the options:

o To upload a file, enable Upload a new pictureand select the file.
o To link to a file in the SAP Signavio file storage, enable Choose a pic-
ture from your file storage and select the file.
o To link to a file in your document management system or in your net-
work, enable Link a file/picture on a web resource or network stor-
age and add the URL.

7. To save, click Add.

5.14 Display attribute overlays

Attribute overlays are attribute visualization layers. With attribute overlays, you
can show attributes directly on the diagram. You can use different icons and col-
ors for overlays.
You can add attribute overlays to diagrams and diagram elements.
Attribute visualization layers are available for the following diagram types:
o BPMN diagrams
o Value chain diagrams

Version 15.14 103

5   Modeling

o ArchiMate diagrams
o Organization charts

Attribute overlays are managed by your workspace administrator. They also set
the rules that determine when an attribute overlay is displayed.

We recommend to add attribute overlays as the last step when editing

a diagram, because when you change anything, you need to add the
overlay again.

5.14.1 Display attribute overlays while modeling

o
To select an attribute overlay, click in the toolbar.

It is possible to display several attribute overlays at once.

5.14.2 Display attribute overlays in SAP Signavio Process

Collaboration Hub
If a diagram contains attribute overlays, the number of available overlays and the
number of visible overlay categories are displayed.
Users can show or hide overlays and select which overlays they want to view.

5.15 Compare revisions

With the diagram and revision comparison tool you can track changes to revi-
sions made to your diagrams. In addition to the Explorer Comparison view, here
you can do the following:
o Compare two revisions of the same diagram side by side with revisions such
as additions, edits, and deletions.
o View changes made by other users on a diagram.
o Approve and apply changes made by other users on a diagram.
o Improve collaboration between users working on a diagram (see section Col-
laboration).

Version 15.14 104

5   Modeling

o Locate duplicate diagrams after you have imported diagrams to your work-
space (see section Importing).

5.15.1 Open the diagram comparison tool

You can open the diagram comparison tool in the following components: 
o In the explorer, select a diagram or two diagrams you want to compare and
click Edit > Compare revisions/diagrams.
o In the BPMN simulation, editor, and QuickModel, click Diagram comparison in
the user menu.
o In the activity feed, select a diagram revision from the feed and click Open to
Compare.

5.15.2 Display options

With the Zoom Slider you can change the size of a diagram. When using the
Zoom Slider, both diagrams move simultaneously. You can navigate to different
sections of a diagram by holding left-click and moving the diagram.
To use the Zoom Slider on an individual diagram revision, disable the Syn-
chronized Scrolling option.

Version 15.14 105

5   Modeling

5.15.3 Select revisions

The comparison view displays all edits made to a diagram in your workspace in
the form of revisions. You can view revisions of a diagram in two ways:
o Using the revision drop-down menu option.
o Using the choose revisions/diagrams option.

[Link] Using the revision drop-down menu option

To view different revisions of your diagrams using the Revision drop-down menu,
follow these steps:

1. On the first revision window, select the required revision from the Revision
drop-down menu.

2. On the second revision window, select the required revision from the Revi-
sion drop-down menu.

3. The comparison and revision tool displays the selected revisions for the dia-
gram side by side.

[Link] Using the choose revisions/diagrams option

To view different revisions of your diagram using the Choose revisions/diagram

option, follow these steps:

1. On the diagram and revision comparison tool, click Choose revi-

sions/diagrams.

2. On the Choose revisions/diagrams page, select the diagram and revision

version for Diagram A and Diagram B.

3. Click Compare.

5.15.4 Diagram change information

The diagram comparison displays structural and logic differences between dia-
grams or diagram revisions. Hover over each icon of an element to get more
detailed information.
The following table lists all changes:

Version 15.14 106

5   Modeling

Change Description
Icon
New elements : An element has been added to the diagram.

Changed attribute : Attributes for the element have been changed.

Changes in the Dictionary : A Dictionary entry has been added, removed or

changed on this element.
Changes in roles : The role the element was assigned to has changed.

Deletions : An element has been removed from the diagram.

At the bottom of the window, you find information about the number of changes
for every change category. You can select which changes are shown.

5.15.5 Next steps

Restore older revisions of a diagram

5.16 Custom graphics

Access to this feature depends on your license.

You can upload custom graphics for use in Customer journey maps, Value
chains, and BPMN 2.0 diagrams. Uploaded files must be in SVG format and indi-
vidually no larger than 20 KB.
The following elements can be customized:
Customer journey maps
o Persona
o Touchpoint
o Moment of truth
o Customer
o Decoration

Value chains

Version 15.14 107

5   Modeling

o Process
o Collapsed process

BPMN 2.0 diagrams

o IT System
o Additional Participant

Custom graphics are tied to the workspace to which they are uploaded--if you
have multiple workspaces and want to use custom graphics in each, you must
upload them separately to each workspace.

Custom graphic files do not count towards the file limit for a work-
space.

To upload custom graphics, do the following:

1. Create or save the image you want to use as an SVG file.

2. In SAP Signavio Process Manager, navigate to the Setup button in the tool-
bar. Select Define notations/attributes from the drop-down menu. The
Define notations/attributes dialog will open.
3. In the Modeling language section, select either customer journey map,
value chain, or BPMN 2.0 diagram.

Version 15.14 108

5   Modeling

4. In the Diagram element types section, select the element type you want to
set the custom graphic for. Note that not all elements are able to be cus-
tomized.

Version 15.14 109

5   Modeling

5. In the Custom attributes section, click the Custom Graphics tab. Click the
Add button. The Upload Custom Graphic dialog will open, with details
about the upload requirements for SVG files.

Version 15.14 110

5   Modeling

6. Click Choose File and select the file you want to upload. The Name field
will by default be filled with the file name. A preview of the image will be dis-
played below. Edit the name if you want, and then click Add.

Version 15.14 111

5   Modeling

7. SAP Signavio Process Manager will perform a validation while your file
uploads, to make sure it fits all requirements (see "Validation criteria" sec-
tion below).
o If the validation is successful, your custom graphic will be displayed in a
list in the Custom Graphics tab.

Version 15.14 112

5   Modeling

o If the validation fails, a dialog will be displayed, showing you the original
image and what the image will look like after being scrubbed. If the
scrubbed image is fine, click Add scrubbed image.
o If the validation fails, it may also be that the uploaded SVG does not
meet our requirements.

8. Your custom graphic will be displayed in a list in the Custom Graphics tab,
where you can now set and use it for modeling.

5.16.1 Validation criteria

SVG is a flexible, powerful file format. However, this flexibility makes it vulnerable
to security exploits. To prevent possible security problems, SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Manager will check each SVG file you try to upload and scrub anything
potentially malicious from the file. It will then show you a preview dialog, so you
can see the differences between the original and scrubbed file. If the scrubbed
file is acceptable to you, you can then continue with the upload.

Version 15.14 113

5   Modeling

The requirements for SVG files are:

o The root element of the SVG must contain the required attributes either width
and height or viewBox. The width and height attributes must be absolute size.
o The attributes of the SVG file must not contain JavaScript in attributes
o The elements and attributes of the SVG file must not contain URLs
o The SVG file must not exceed the size limit of 20 KB
o The SVG file must not exceed the supported complexity of 2000 anchor points

Here is the list of allowed tags and attributes for SVG files:
Tags: "svg", "style", "g", "path", "ellipse", "circle", "polygon", "rect", "line", "poly-
line", "defs", "clipPath", "mask", "use", "radialGradient", "linearGradient", "stop"

Version 15.14 114

5   Modeling

Attributes: "version", "xmlns", "xmlns:svg","xmlns:xlink", "xlink:href", "xlink:type",

"xlink:actuate", "xlink:show", "viewBox", "zoomAndPan", "xml:space", "con-
tentStyleType", "contentScriptType", "preserveAspectRatio", "id", "class",
"name", "style", "transform", "d", "points", "x", "x1", "x2", "y", "y1", "y2", "cx", "cy",
"r", "rx", "ry", "width", "height", "fill", "fill-opacity", "fill-rule", "opacity", "offset",
"stroke", "stroke-width", "stroke-opacity", "stroke-dasharray", "stroke-miterlimit",
"stroke-dashoffset", "stroke-linecap", "stroke-linejoin", "type","clip-path", "mask"

5.16.2 Modeling with custom graphics

Once uploaded, custom graphics can be used in customer journey maps, value
chains, and BPMN 2.0 diagrams.
To use custom graphics in a model:

1. Open your existing customer journey map, value chain, or BPMN diagram,
or create a new one from scratch, in the Editor.
2. Select an element you have defined a custom graphic for.
3. In the Attributes panel under Main Attribute, click the arrow next to the
Image field.
4. Select your custom graphic from the drop-down menu.
5. Your element will now change from the default graphic to the custom
graphic you defined.

Models with custom graphics can be imported, exported and published to SAP
Signavio Process Collaboration Hub the same as standard models.

Version 15.14 115

6   Modeling notations

6 Modeling notations
In this section, you find the editing features of the different modeling notations:
o Section Business Process Modeling and Notation (BPMN) explains how
to model business process diagrams in the editor.
o With Value chains, you create high-level perspectives on the process hier-
archy in your organization.
o Customer journey maps depict a customer's perspective on a product or
service that contains specific touch points that link customer experience
with process architecture.
o With Decision Model and Notation (DMN), you model decision diagrams to
describe frequently made decisions of an organization. It is also possible to
simulate decisions and define and execute test case for DMN decision
logic.
o Enterprise architecture diagrams enable you to visualize your corporate IT
system architecture within and across business domains. You can learn
how to model in section ArchiMate.
o In addition, SAP Signavio Process Manager supports a set of Further nota-
tions that are of lesser importance in practical process management scen-
arios.

6.1 Business Process Modeling and Notation (BPMN)

BPMN is an industry standard for modeling business processes. The standard is
published by the Object Management Group (OMG) and supported by a variety of
vendors and consultants.
SAP Signavio Process Manager supports BPMN 2.0, including all modeling ele-
ments and attributes. With this version of the standard, you can define activities,
control flow, data flow, organizational dependencies, and system dependencies
of business processes.
The syntax rules of BPMN are enforced by the editor.
SAP Signavio is committed to BPMN, has been and continues to be involved in
the standardization process, and promotes BPMN in industry and academia.

Version 15.14 116

6   Modeling notations

6.1.1 Model a BPMN diagram

This section describes the special features of modeling a BPMN diagram. Find
more on modeling instructions that apply to all notations in section Modeling.

[Link] Select a notation subset

By default, multiple subsets for the BPMN notation are available.

Which subsets or which elements within a subset are available to you

depends on the settings of your workspace. Your workspace admin-
istrator can customize the subsets.

To select a notation subset, follow these steps:

1. From the explorer, open your diagram.

The editor opens.

2. In the shape repository on the left, select the subset you want to use.
The elements of the subset are displayed in the shape repository. You can
change the subset any time.

Example

[Link] Modeling elements

The modeling elements correspond to the BPMN standard. Find an overview in

the element guide Business Process Model and Notation: An introductory
guide.
The following elements are additionally available:

Version 15.14 117

6   Modeling notations

o Live Insights
Add insights and KPIs you want to monitor to diagrams, read more in sec-
tion Add Live Insights.
o IT systems
Define artifacts as IT systems.
o Additional participant
Add more participants to an activity.

For the following elements, we provide detailed instructions:

o Create subprocesses
o Add pools and lanes
o Connect elements with flows
o Work with BPMN connectors
o Attached intermediate events or boundary events

[Link] Work with BPMN connectors

When connecting two elements, the connector type is automatically determined

according to the BPMN standard. For example, connectors between tasks are
sequence flows, while connectors to annotations or data objects are asso-
ciations.

Add, move, or remove bending points

To show the bending points of a connector, hover over it. You can drag any exist-
ing bending point to a new location.
To add a bending point, click the connector and drag the new bending point to its
location.
To remove a bending point, you have the following options:
o drag the bending point to a location that is on a line with the two neighboring
bending points
o drag the bending point onto a neighboring bending point

Example

Version 15.14 118

6   Modeling notations

Move connector sections

You can move horizontal or vertical connector sections that are between bending
points or between a bending point and another element. To do so, hover over the
connector, click the yellow area, and drag it onto it's new location.

Example

[Link] Attached intermediate events or boundary events

The BPMN specification uses the term boundary event instead of

attached intermediate event.

With attached intermediate events, you can react on events that occur during the
execution of a task. For example, if a customer cancels an order while it is still
being processed, the order processing needs to stop and tasks need to be
executed that cancel the order.

Version 15.14 119

6   Modeling notations

o To attach an intermediate event to a task, drag it onto a task. A green border

in the task indicates that the event can be attached. Some intermediate
events, like the link intermediate event, can't be attached to a task.

The following event types are available:

Event type Description

Canceling The occurring event cancels the task and determines how to proceed.

Non-can- The path defined at the event is executed in addition to the executed
celing task.

Attached intermediate events are canceling events by default.

o To change an event to non-canceling, select it and disable the option More
Attributes > Cancel activity in the attributes panel.

Canceling events are displayed with a solid border, the border of non-canceling
events is a dotted line.

Example

[Link] Change the diagram orientation

BPMN diagrams are horizontally oriented by default.

We recommend to set the orientation before you start modeling.

Changing the orientation can change the diagram layout significantly

and even break the layout. Previous layout states can't be restored.

To change the orientation, follow this step:

Version 15.14 120

6   Modeling notations

o In the attributes panel, under Main Attributes > Diagram orientation, select
the horizontal or vertical orientation.

[Link] Check the diagram syntax

You can check the syntax of a BPMN diagram.

o
In the toolbar, click > Check syntax. Errors are shown in the diagram.
To get more details on an error, hover over it.

Further checks are available, read more in section Work with modeling con-
ventions.

[Link] Next steps

o Simulating BPMN diagrams
o Inviting modelers to edit a diagram
o Export a BPMN diagram as XML

6.1.2 Set BPMN attributes

Modeling elements have several properties you can edit. These properties are
called attributes. You can use attributes to change the appearance of an element
(for example the background color or label). Attributes can also be necessary to
execute a process, for example the decision logic in a DMN diagram is an attrib-
ute.
You edit attributes in the attribute panel on the right side of the editor.
o To change the attributes for one element, select the element and open the
attributes panel.
o To change diagram-wide attributes, click any empty space on the canvas and
open the attributes panel.

The first section of the attribute panel contains custom attributes,

which can be defined by your workspace administrators.

You can change attributes for one element and diagram-wide attributes.

Example:

Version 15.14 121

6   Modeling notations

[Link] Frequently used BPMN attributes

BPMN includes a range of attributes. The following table lists the most important
attributes.

Version 15.14 122

6   Modeling notations

Attribute Elements Default Use

Standard: task is is executed multiple

times

MI Parallel: task is executed multiple

times in parallel
task, sub-
Loop type None
process

MI Sequential task is executed multiple

times sequentially

Specifies the task

Send, Receive, User,

task None
Task type Manual, Service, Busi-

ness rule, Script task

A compensation activity is used to can-

cel the result of another activity that has
Is for com- task, sub-
false already been completed.
pensation process

A transaction contains several activities

Is a trans- that must be completed successfully for
subprocess false
action the flow to continue. If any of the activ-
ities was not completed successfully,

Version 15.14 123

6   Modeling notations

Attribute Elements Default Use

all of them must reversed to their ori-

ginal state.

In an ad hoc subprocess, you define

the steps, but not the order.

Is ad hoc subprocess false

A call activity links to a globally defined

process or subprocess. The called pro-
task, sub-
cess controls the flow. Non-standard
Is a call activ- process,
false start events are ignored.
ity event-sub-
process

The subprocess linked to the element is

subprocess,
Subprocess listed as the reference. Usually, a
event-sub- none
reference BPMN diagram in the same workspace
process
is linked.

Version 15.14 124

6   Modeling notations

Attribute Elements Default Use

Multiple similar organizations or pro-

Is multi cess participants can be contacted dur-
instance par- pool false ing a process. For example, project
ticipant proposals can be requested by multiple
companies.

After a gateway, one sequence flow

can be the default flow that is followed
in case no other condition is true.
sequence
Condition type Standard
flow

States can further refine the life cycle of

data objects. You can use any label for
State data object none your states. For example, you can dis-
tinguish between 'new', 'completed' and
'rejected'.
Data objects can be read (input) or writ-
ten (output) during a process.
Input/Output data object none

input, output

Subprocesses, event-subprocesses and pools can be collapsed and expanded.

[Link] Add documentation to an element

You can add documentation to an element to include more details. For example,
if a rarely executed task requires instructions, you can add these instructions as
documentation.

The element documentation can also be accessed in SAP Signavio

Process Collaboration Hub.

To add documentation to an element, follow these steps:

Version 15.14 125

6   Modeling notations

1. In Main Attributes, click Documentation.

2. Click the icon. The documentation editor opens.

3. Enter and format the documentation.

4. Save with Ok.

6.1.3 Responsibility assignment according to RACI

The responsibility assignment matrix RACI is used to represent responsibilities
for activities.
RACI is an acronym for the key responsibilities:
o R for responsible: performs the activity
o A for accountable: approves the activity
o C for consulted: is consulted for the activity
o I for informed: is informed about the activity

Responsibilities can be assigned to diagram elements.

[Link] Assign responsibilities in a diagram

For BPMN diagrams, there are different ways to assign responsibilities:

o You can use lanes or the element Additional participant.
o You can assign custom attributes to tasks.

Assign responsibilities with lanes and additional participants

Add a lane to set all activities in this lane as responsible (R) in the RACI matrix.
It's not possible to assign additional RACI responsibilities to a lane element.
The element Additional participant can be linked to an activity with the connector
Association (undirected). The connector has the attribute Responsibilities to
assign responsibilities.

1. Add an Additional participant element to your diagram.

2. Connect the Additional participant and the Task with an Association (undir-
ected) connector.

Version 15.14 126

6   Modeling notations

3. In the Attributes panel, assign one of the four RACI Responsibilities to the
connector.
The responsibility is displayed as the connector label in the diagram and lis-
ted for the activity when you export a RACI matrix.

Assign responsibilities to tasks as custom attributes

To assign responsibilities to tasks, custom attributes for RACI need to

be available in your workspace. Custom attributes can be defined by
your workspace administrator.

1. Select a task in the diagram.

2. Open the attribute panel.

3. In the section Custom Attributes, click the responsibility you want to add.

4. Click the icon.

5. Enter a role. Available dictionary entries are suggested as you type.

6. Select the role from the list. The role is added to the attribute.
You can add multiple roles for one responsibility. Roles that are already
assigned are displayed below the text field.

7. Click Save.
In the diagram, there is no visible change.
When you export a RACI matrix, the assigned responsibilities are listed.

To preview the dictionary entry for a responsible role, click the role.

To open the dictionary entry, click the icon and click Open.

To remove a role, click the icon and click Remove.

[Link] Export a RACI matrix

The RACI matrix lists the 4 RACI assignments and an additional responsibility
where no RACI category was used:

Version 15.14 127

6   Modeling notations

o R - Responsible
o A - Accountable
o C - Consulted
o I - Informed
o X- Participates

To export a RACI matrix for one or multiple diagrams, follow these steps:

1. Select Reporting>Responsibility assignment matrix / RACI (XLS).

2. In the dialog, select the diagrams.

When you select multiple diagrams, one matrix including all diagrams is gen-
erated.
When a diagram has no responsibilities assigned, the matrix remains
empty.

3. Click Start analysis.

An XLS file is generated.

6.1.4 Setting key performance indicators (KPIs)

Key performance indicators have to be set for a quantitative analysis. The indic-
ators can be set for task execution probabilities and frequency. They also inform
about cost and execution time.
Diagrams have to be structurally and semantically correct to create a quantitative
analysis. SAP Signavio Process Manager provides tools that allow you to check
the corresponding properties of process diagrams.
KPIs can be set for each element in the Attributes section on the right in the
Editor. Select an element, then click the two arrows above Attributes to extend
the section on the right. The KPI values for the corresponding analyses are set
under Cost and Resource Analysis and More Attributes. Simply click the cor-
responding headlines to expand the KPI settings. When you are finished setting
the KPI values for one element, simply click the next element in the central sec-
tion and add the corresponding values on the right. When you are finished adding

Version 15.14 128

6   Modeling notations

the necessary values to all elements, you can click the arrows on the left of the
grey 'Attributes' header to close the Attributes menu and proceed with the cal-
culation.
The following attributes are key values for the process cost and resource con-
sumption analyses:
o Frequency (per year): Start Event

Denotes how often a process is started via this entry point. Multiple start
events that represent alternative entry points for the process are allowed.
e.g. "1000"
o Execution (minutes): Task (BPMN), Function (EPC)

Denotes how long it takes on average to complete the task. This value is
required for a resource consumption analysis.
e.g. "2.5"
o Execution costs (currency): Task (BPMN), Function (EPC)

Denotes the costs that come up during the activity. This key value is
required for a process cost analysis.
e.g. "5"
o Probability: Sequence Flow

Denotes the probability for choosing this sequence flow after a decision
gateway/XOR-connector. This is supposed to be a value between 0 and
1.
e.g. "0.2"

'20%' has to be denoted as '0.2'.s

o Cost center: Task (BPMN), Function (EPC)

This is an optional value and represents the cost center for the activity
costs.
e.g. "KS 1008"

Version 15.14 129

6   Modeling notations

o Apply in calculation: All elements

Uncheck to exclude an element from the analysis.

"yes" / "no"

Floating point numbers are accepted either in the form of "2.5" or "2,5"
but will be automatically converted to the notation of "2,5".

[Link] Checking completeness

After setting the KPI, you can trigger a check for completeness to ensure that all
required values are present for analysis.

Click the toolbar and select Cost and resource analysis check.
This check might take several seconds.
Some elements may now be marked with one of the following icons:
o The white exclamation mark on orange denotes that key values are missing
for an element. It is also attached to elements that will be ignored during an
analysis, as it is not logically contained in those measurements. (For example,
a sending intermediate message event will be ignored during an analysis.)

This does not interfere with the analysis calculation, but some of the calculations
may not be able to run properly due to missing data.

o The white exclamation mark on red denotes a heavy structural or logical mis-
take. Additionally, some modeling elements preventing an analysis are
marked with this symbol--for example, a complex gateway cannot be included
in a process analysis.

This sign marks that an element interferes with the analysis calculation.
Hover over one of these symbols to get more details about the problem
that occurred.

Version 15.14 130

6   Modeling notations

Get information about an error

An analysis calculation can be triggered only after all severe mistakes (indicated
in red) have been removed.
After removing them, switch to the Explorer.

6.1.5 Create views

You can create different views for different audiences. In a view, you include what
you want to show an audience and exclude what the audience does not need to
see.
Examples for using different views of process models:
o A model contains both user activities and elements for technical imple-
mentation. The audience wants to focus on the technical implementation.
o A model contains different variants of one process. The audience should
only view one variant.
o A model contains the expected path of a process and a number of excep-
tions. The audience doesn't need to see the exceptions.

Version 15.14 131

6   Modeling notations

You can create as many views as you need.

[Link] Create and change views

1. Extend the right panel and scroll to Views. All available views are listed.
o To create a new view, click Create new view.
o To configure an existing view, click the view.
The view configuration opens.

2. In the configuration, select the objects to exclude from a view.

You can preview the result and the original diagram.

3. Enter a name and a description for your view.

4. Click Save changes.

[Link] Navigate the view configuration

Click and drag a preview to scroll to other areas of the diagram.

Use the zoom slider to zoom in and out of the diagrams.
By default, you move both diagram versions in the preview. To move the dia-
grams separately, disable Synchronous Scrolling.

[Link] Edit a view

You can exclude all Comments , Data objects, IT Systems, or Roles above the
original view.
o Data objects: contains data objects, data storage and messages
o IT Systems: contains IT systems
o Roles: contains pools, lanes, collapsed pools and additional participants
o Comments : contains all comments on the diagram

You can show or hide each element. In the original view, disable elements to
exclude them from a view.
For pools, you have additional options. Select an option from the drop-down list at
the bottom of the pool.

Version 15.14 132

6   Modeling notations

o Pool is opened: The pool and its content are included in the view. You can
define view options for all contained elements.
o Pool is collapsed: The pool content is not shown.
o Only content: No roles that are defined by the pool and its lanes are shown.
Message flows attached to the pool are hidden.
o Pool is hidden: Neither the pool nor its content is included in the view. Mes-
sage flows attached to the pool are hidden.

When you uncheck a pool, all elements in that pool are excluded from a view.
To keep the original diagram size and the original placement of the shown ele-
ments, disableReduce free space.
The preview is refreshed after every change.

[Link] Duplicate a view

To create a duplicate view from an existing view, follow these steps:

1. Click the original view to open it.

2. Edit the view.

3. Click Save as duplicate....

4. Enter a name for the new view and click OK.

A new view is created.

[Link] Delete a view

1. Click the view to open it.

2. Click Delete view.

3. Confirm the deletion in the dialog.

The view is deleted.

[Link] Editing views from within the Editor

It is possible to include or exclude diagram elements from one or multiple views

while editing a diagram--without opening the views configuration. This makes it
fast and easy to edit existing views.
o Choose one or multiple elements.

Version 15.14 133

6   Modeling notations

Changes in the include option can be applied to single or multiple elements

o Behind each view that is stored in the attribute editor. check boxes will appear.
Those can be empty, checked or, if multiple elements were selected, colored
green:

Only some of the selected elements are included in the view, but not all.

Checked
All selected elements are included in the view.

Empty
None of the selected elements is included in the view.
o Check or uncheck the boxes, to add/remove the elements selected from one of
the views.

[Link] Check views while modeling

When you have views available, you can check while modeling if an element is
visible in a view.

Version 15.14 134

6   Modeling notations

Open the view panel and click an element. The view which contains the element
is marked.

[Link] Exporting views

You can include views when you export a diagram as an SVG, PNG, PDF, or a
BPMN 2.0 XML file. The SGX export contains all views for a diagram. Read more
about exporting diagrams in section Exporting.

6.1.6 Risk Management

Access to this feature depends on your license.

In this article, you will learn how to define custom risk management tables in the
Dictionary.

[Link] Creating risks and controls in the Editor

In SAP Signavio Process Manager, you can document the risks and controls dir-
ectly in your process landscape. This is obtained via the element attribute.

To use this feature, you need to configure it first, see section Manage
definitions for risks and controls for details.

To add a risk to a diagram element, proceed as follows:

1. Ensure that you defined Risks and Controls as described in Manage defin-
itions for risks and controls
2. Select the element.
3. In the attribute panel under Custom Attributes click the defined category.
The Risk Management dialog opens.
4. Enter the name for the risk. While typing a name, the system automatically
proposes possible names of existing risks.

Version 15.14 135

6   Modeling notations

Suggestions pop up as you type

If you use an already existing risk attribute from the Dictionary, you
can change locally the corresponding value. Please be aware that this
could lead to inconsistency and should be avoided. For more detailed
information see section Overwrite dictionary entries locally.

4. If you decide to create a new risk, you can now enter the risk definition.

The risk definition

Version 15.14 136

6   Modeling notations

5. For each risk, you can add controls:

Add a control

6. Click in the toolbar to visualize controlled and uncontrolled risks:

To create an overview over all risks and controls, you can create reports, see sec-
tion Risk & controls report.

[Link] Editing risks and controls in the Dictionary

When you need to update a specific risk or control, you can do this centrally in the
Dictionary. The update will affect all diagrams that reference this risk or control
immediately.
Of course, you can also add new risks and controls in the Dictionary (see Use the
dictionary while modeling).
To add risks and controls to the Dictionary, open the Dictionary and create new
entries of the type Risk or Control:

Version 15.14 137

6   Modeling notations

Create a new risk in the Dictionary

To ensure your risks and controls definitions are updated when a process
changes, you can employ approval workflows, see section Working with
approval workflows , that enforce a review by a risk management specialist
before a process revision is published in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration
Hub or otherwise released into a production environment.

6.1.7 Migrating diagrams to BPMN 2.0

SAP Signavio Process Manager provides a possibility to migrate BPMN 1.2 busi-
ness process diagrams to BPMN 2.0. This may be interesting for you if you want
to reuse old diagrams modeled in BPMN 1.2 with new elements from BPMN 2.0.
The diagram content will not be changed during this procedure.
Follow these steps:

1. Select the diagram you want to migrate.

2. Click Edit > Migrate to BPMN 2.0 in the top drop-down menu of the
explorer.

Version 15.14 138

6   Modeling notations

Migrate a BPMN 1.2 diagram to BPMN 2.0.

The diagram can now be edited and saved as a BPMN 2.0 diagram.

6.1.8 Converting EPC diagrams to BPMN 2.0

SAP Signavio Process Manager allows you to automatically convert Event-driven
Process Chains (EPCs) to BPMN 2.0 diagrams.
To convert one or multiple diagrams, open the explorer, select the corresponding
diagram(s) and go to Edit - Migrate EPC to BPMN 2.0:

Version 15.14 139

6   Modeling notations

Now, you can decide whether to convert Position/Roles and Organizations to

BPMN 2.0 Pools and Lanes. The system handles the assignment to Pools/Lanes
via the custom Relation attribute Responsibility. To properly assign a function to
a Positions/Role or Organization, you need to set the corresponding attribute
value to responsible:

Specify the responsibility type.

The system will create empty Pools/Lanes for all Positions/Roles and Organ-
izations that lack a corresponding responsibility assignment.
If you don't activate the corresponding checkbox, the system will convert Pos-
ition/Roles and Organizations to the SAP Signavio-specific BPMN extension
Additional Participant instead.
Click Migrate to proceed:

Version 15.14 140

6   Modeling notations

Configure the converter and start the conversion.

EPC and BPMN 2.0 are not entirely congruent notations. The following
EPC elements cannot clearly be mapped to BPMN 2.0 elements and
are ignored by the converter:
o Letter
o Email
o Fax
o Phone
o Entity
o Form
o Resource

If you use these elements in your EPC diagrams, we strongly recom-

mend you to review and edit the generated BPMN 2.0 diagrams after
the conversion.

Version 15.14 141

6   Modeling notations

6.1.9 FIM attributes for public administration

This articles introduces the FIM-BPMN-extensions, which are relevant

for the German public administration. The plugin for the editor is
accessible on request.

The German Federal Ministry of the Interior created a BPMN extension for struc-
turing BPMN-diagrams: the so called FIM attributes (trans. Federal Information
Management). These attributes equip processes in departments and sectors of
the public administration with reference attributes, to compare them with more
clarity on a national level.
This refers mostly to common activity types like receive information or decide:
These are activities that occur commonly in the processes of the public admin-
istration, but different local authorities have different ideas of implementing them.
For example: Many local administrations use different forms to receive inform-
ation for public services, although on the basis of these information they have to
decide over the same factual matters. The FIM initiative strives to standardize the
processes to reduce bureaucratic expenditure – and uses therefore the instru-
ments of process management:
In the BPMN extension, these processes are ordered into groups through FIM.
the reference activity groups are marked with different labels on the right top
corner of the activity (subprocess). In consequence, the FIM-Groups are easy to
recognize.
The principle of the FIM initiative is: "Same content should always be described
alike."
You can also use the add-on outside of the public administration context: It is a
useful tool to structure sub-processes and to standardize content that belongs to
the same reference group.

[Link] Adding an FIM attribute

1. Choose a collapsed sub process in the Editor and drop it onto the canvas.
2. Select the activity and open the attribute menu on the right side. Choose
now under main attributes, reference activity groups the correct FIM attrib-
ute from the drop-down menu.

Version 15.14 142

6   Modeling notations

[Link] Overview of the FIM-attributes

The attribute labels can be used flexibly, but usually they refer to:

1. Receive information describes the arrival of new information or documents.

2. Provide Information describes the forwarding of information or documents,
especially to external participants(, e.g civilians or (other) enterprises).
3. Check formally describes proving something on the basis of procedural
law.
4. Check materially describes proving something on the basis of substantive
law.
5. Decide refers to a decision based on an expert assessment.
6. Create e.g. a new document.
7. Execute participation involves an external participant into the process.
8. Execute other activity is optional, und can be used if no other type applies.

A list of all FIM-attributes

More information on how to create subprocesses are available in the section

Create subprocesses .

Version 15.14 143

6   Modeling notations

[Link] Creating attributes for FIM reference activities

1. Open the Explorer and select Setup - Define notations/attributes.

2. Select Business Process Diagram (BPMN 2.0) as the modeling language
and Collapsed Subprocess as the element type and click Add in the Cus-
tom attributes section. Now, you can define the attribute name and type.

Read more at Add and manage notation subsets.

6.1.10 Frequently asked questions

[Link] How can I add a second lane to a pool?

You can drag lanes from the shape repository in the left panel. Drag the lane onto
the head of a pool and a new lane will be created. Find more information about
pools and lanes in section Add pools and lanes.

[Link] How can I change the orientation of a diagram (horizontal/vertical)?

You can change the orientation of a diagram in the attribute column under Main
Attributes . Simply click the set value ( horizontal or vertical ) of the attribute Dia-
gram Orientation and change it correspondingly. The Editor will automatically re-
align the elements in the diagram after you confirm.

[Link] How can I link a document to a task?

Custom attributes can be defined for each modeling element. Open the Explorer,
click Setup and choose Define notations/attributes . Now, select a subset (e.g.
Business Process Diagram (BPMN 2.0) and BPMN (complete)), the diagram ele-
ment type (e.g. Task) and click Add custom attribute . Name the attribute and
choose the data type Link/URL. Click Create .
Whenever a diagram is opened in the Editor, you can select a task and link a doc-
ument to it using the attribute Editor.

Version 15.14 144

6   Modeling notations

6.2 Customer journey maps

This section describes the customer journey map notation that was
introduced in 2017. The user guide for our new SAP Signavio Journey
Modeler can be found here.

Customer journey maps (CJMs) provide customer-centered entry points to your

business process landscape. CJMs are high-level intuitively readable diagrams
that focus on the customer experience instead of internal processes. They help
you understand how your customers perceive your products and services in the
context of their everyday lives and how their key decisions, which for example
lead to a purchase or churn, are motivated.

6.2.1 What are customer journey maps?

Customer journey maps are graphical representations of the steps a customer
absolves when interaction with your organization. They can include a wide variety
of information, including things like critical decisions, touchpoints, departments
involved, IT systems, or any other points that are specific to your organization.
When creating a customer journey map, you model your organization from the
outside in. Hence, customer journey maps provide customer-centered entry
points to your business process and/or enterprise application landscape.

[Link] Customer journey map elements

The following sections explain the customer journey map elements you can use
in SAP Signavio Process Manager.

Persona

Personas represent typical customers. A persona's attributes and their asso-

ciated banners define their motivations, goals and pain points, as well as typical
characteristics like preferred media channels and IT savviness.

Version 15.14 145

6   Modeling notations

A female and a male persona.

Personas can be either female or male, depending on their gender attribute.

Customer

A customer element represents a persona at a specific step of a customer jour-

ney. You can configure customer elements to express their feelings and attitudes
as gestures, for example as a thumbs up.

A customer.

As personas, customers can be either female or male, depending on their gender

attribute.

Outcome

Outcomes define what your customers are trying to get out of their experience.
For example, an outcome of the customer journey of a banking customer might
be obtain loan. Outcomes can be either successes (hoisted flag) or failures (flag
on the ground).

Version 15.14 146

6   Modeling notations

Successes and failures.

Step

Steps (connected through paths) show the sequence of events at a high level and
form the backbone of a customer journey map around which supporting elements
are arranged.

A sequence of steps.

Path

Paths connect different steps to define the flow of a customer journey.

Touchpoints

Touchpoints represent steps where your customer comes into direct contact with
your brand. Each touchpoint relates to at least one of your business processes
and roles or IT systems. Touchpoints can be either physical (for example: a cash
desk) or virtual (for example: social media).

Version 15.14 147

6   Modeling notations

Different touchpoints

Moment of truth

Moments of truth are key decision points that can make or break your business’s
chance for succeeding with the customer. They are either barriers (requiring cus-
tomer empowerment) or signposts (requiring a customer decision).

Version 15.14 148

6   Modeling notations

Moments of truth: barriers and signposts.

Trigger

Triggers start a customer journey. They can be either ideas (inspiration-driven) or

demands (driven by need).

A trigger.

Text

Text labels describe specific customer journey map elements or element groups.

Version 15.14 149

6   Modeling notations

A text describing a customer's thoughts at a specific journey step.

Banner

Banners are post-it-style notes that contain important textual information about a
customer journey map element or about the customer journey in general. The
icon and default color of a banner depends on the elements type attribute, which
can be idea (light bulb), demand (bell) or goal (flag).

Banners of different types.

Decoration

Decoration elements provide additional visual information to support specific pro-

cess steps. For example, a package decoration element might indicate a delivery.

Version 15.14 150

6   Modeling notations

Different decoration elements.

6.2.2 Creating and editing customer journey maps

To create a new customer journey map, open the Explorer and click New - Cus-
tomer journey map:

Creating a new customer journey map.

The system opens the Editor with an empty diagram canvas in a new tab.
You can work on the customer journey map like a diagram of any other type.

[Link] Grouping elements

In order to create groups, you must include one step element.

Version 15.14 151

6   Modeling notations

Grouping elements makes it easier to model your process landscape, because it

lets you move multiple elements together as though they were one single ele-
ment.
You can group elements in one of three ways. In the Editor:

o
Select a set of elements and click in the left bottom corner of the selection
rectangle.
o
Select a set of elements and click the in the toolbar.
o Select a set of elements and press the shortcut "Ctrl + G"

To ungroup elements, do one of the following in the Editor:

o
Select a group and click in the left bottom corner of the selection rectangle.
o
Select a group and click the ungroup button in the toolbar.
o Select a group and press the Shortcut "Ctrl + Shift + G"

After grouping elements in the Editor, open your customer journey map in SAP
Signavio Process Collaboration Hub. Click on each group and you will see all
information about each element in the group displayed in the annotation.

[Link] Navigating through customer journey maps

If you publish to or preview your customer journey map in SAP Signavio Process
Collaboration Hub, you can use the arrow keys on your keyboard to navigate
through each step.
To do so, either select a step with your mouse, or simply press the right arrow key
on your keyboard. The step you selected will be highlighted, while the rest of the
map will be greyed out.
If your step contains grouped elements, an information panel with information
about each element will also be displayed for the highlighted step.

6.2.3 Integrating customer journey maps into your process

landscape
In customer journey map diagrams, touchpoints (see section Touchpoints )
depict interaction points between your organization and your (potential) cus-
tomers. In other words, touchpoint elements are entry points to your process and

Version 15.14 152

6   Modeling notations

application landscape. When creating touchpoints in customer journey maps, you

should reference the business process diagrams, roles and/or IT systems that
are involved in the corresponding customer interaction.

[Link] Creating custom attributes for the touchpoint element

To allow referencing process diagrams and - in the form of dictionary entries -

roles and IT systems, create a set of custom attributes for the touchpoint element
type (see section Add and manage custom attributes). We recommend creating
the following custom attributes:
As
Name Description Type
list?

Process Links to the business processes the customer

Diagram link X
links triggers/interacts with

Links to the IT systems through which the

IT sys- Dictionary link (Cat-
(potential) customer has contact with the X
tems egory: IT systems)
brand or organization

Links to the roles through which the (poten- Dictionary link (Cat-
Roles tial) customer has contact with the brand or egory: organ- X
organization izational units)

Creating a custom attribute to reference IT systems.

Version 15.14 153

6   Modeling notations

[Link] Referencing diagrams and dictionary entries at touchpoint elements

To reference a diagram or dictionary entry at a touchpoint, select the touchpoint

element in the Editor and open the attribute panel. Select the attribute you want
to edit - for example Process links - and add the reference:

Adding a process reference to a touchpoint element.

6.3 Decision Model and Notation (DMN)

Access to this feature depends on your license.

SAP Signavio Process Manager only supports DMN version 1.2.

DMN version 1.2 introduced the diagram element decision service to the
specification. This element is not supported.
You find the specification at [Link]

With DMN, you can describe and model frequently made decisions of an organ-
ization, which answer the following questions:
o Which information is required for a decision?
o Are there any preceding decisions?

Version 15.14 154

6   Modeling notations

o Are there external or internal guidelines?

o What are the dependencies?

DMN is not suitable for modeling strategic decisions.

The notation is designed to be readable by all types of business users in order to
ease collaboration for all stakeholders.
DMN and BPMN diagrams can be linked so that processes can be viewed sep-
arately from decisions, with the advantage that the process is streamlined and
the decision is traceable.
DMN consists of the decision requirements diagram and the decision table.
The decision requirements diagram is the graphical representation of the
decision rule. For example, the diagram below describes what information and
decisions are needed to screen an applicant and decide whether to hire or not.

From the decision table, the appropriate decision is read for each supplied input.
For example, in the table below it is defined whether or not an applicant must
have specific technical knowledge, be fluent in certain foreign languages, and
must have gained experience abroad.

Version 15.14 155

6   Modeling notations

6.3.1 Next steps

Model a decision
Define a decision logic

6.3.2 Model a decision

Before you start modeling a decision, it is helpful to answer the following ques-
tions:
o Which decisions have to be made?
o What is the goal of a decision?
o Can a decision be split into partial decisions?
o Which requirements are needed to make a decision?
o Is the logic for a decision determined by external laws or internal
guidelines?

Modeling a decision involves the following steps:

1. Create a DMN diagram.

To do so, add decision elements and connect them. Read more in section
Available diagram elements.

2. For each decision, add rules to decision table and define a hit policy.

Version 15.14 156

6   Modeling notations

Read more in section Define a decision logic. The section also describes
how to create simple literal expressions.
To calculate sums using literal expressions, read more in section Using
advanced literal expressions (functions in DMN decision elements).

3. You can simulate the DMN diagram.

To do so, apply data to it and check the results. Read more in section DMN
simulation.
In addition, you can run test cases to check whether your DMN diagram
meets specific requirements.

Read more in section The DMN Test lab.

4. You can integrate your decision model with a BPMN business process.
Read more in section Link a DMN diagram to a BPMN diagram.

In this section, the diagram elements and editing functions that are only available
for this notation are described.
For general creation and editing options that are available for all notations, read
more in section Modeling.

[Link] Available diagram elements

In the shape repository, you can choose whether to use the core elements or a
complete set of DMN 1.1 elements.

Example:

Version 15.14 157

6   Modeling notations

Decision

A decision element determines a result based on input data and a decision logic.
Each decision element provides a table for the decision logic. You can open the
decision table by clicking in the decision element.
To describe a decision, use a question-answer-scheme. By default, the attribute
panel provides the attributes Question and Answers for documenting this
scheme for each decision.
You can split a decision into one main and several sub decisions. To do this, you
link several decision elements in the necessary order. Read more in section
Create a sub decision.

Input data

Via the input data element, you provide information for decisions. One input data
element can be used by multiple decisions and business knowledge models.

Version 15.14 158

6   Modeling notations

If you must model numerous data input elements, you can simplify this by using
the complex data input element. Read more in section Create complex input
data elements.

Business knowledge model

With the business knowledge model element, you add a function containing busi-
ness knowledge, for example, in form of business rules, an additional decision
table, or an analytic model.
Via this element, you can reuse decision logic. Read more in section Reuse
decision logic via business knowledge models.

Knowledge source

With the knowledge source element, you describe the source of rules for a
decision, for example laws, regulations, and guidelines.

Multi instance decision

A multi instance decision is a sub decisions which is executed several times. The
result of a multi instance decision is a value or a list that is used as input for
another decision. Read more in section Create a multi instance decision.

Group

Use this element to group diagram elements that belong together.

Text annotation

Use this element to add information to the diagram or a diagram element.

Information requirement

This connector links any input data or decision element to the decision that
requires the information.

Knowledge requirement

This connector links any business knowledge model that must be used by the
decision logic, to the decision.

Authority requirement

This connector links any diagram element that acts as a source of guidance or
knowledge to another diagram element.

Version 15.14 159

6   Modeling notations

You can connect an input data element with a dependent knowledge source or a
knowledge source element with any dependent decision.

Association (undirected)

This connector links text annotations to other DMN elements.

[Link] Create complex input data elements

If a decision requires numerous input data, you must model many input data ele-
ments. You can simplify this by creating a complex input data element in which
you define all input data as attributes.

Example:
To determine a discount, you need data on the purchase value and the cus-
tomer status. Instead of creating an input data element for both pieces of
information, you create one complex data input element and configure the pur-
chase value and the customer status as its attributes. In the decision table,
both attributes are available.

To create a complex input data element, follow these steps:

Version 15.14 160

6   Modeling notations

1. Select the data input element you want to configure as complex.

2. In the attributes panel, set the value of the attribute Type definition to Com-
plex type.

Example:

3. To add attributes to the data input element, click the button next to the
Attributes attribute.
The configuration dialog opens.

Example:

Version 15.14 161

6   Modeling notations

4. Type a name and select a type.

Depending on the type, you can define further properties.

5. Confirm with Save.

The attribute is created.

6. To add more attributes, open the configuration dialog again by clicking the
button.

[Link] Create a sub decision

When a lot of information has to be considered for a decision, you can outsource
part of the information to sub decisions. This makes the diagram easier to under-
stand as the dependencies and input values are easier to see. The logic of each
decision is also easier to define.

Example DMN diagram without sub decisions:

Version 15.14 162

6   Modeling notations

Example DMN diagram with sub decisions:

Version 15.14 163

6   Modeling notations

For sub decisions, the decision element is used. To create a sub decision, add a
decision element and connect it with the decision that needs the result of the sub
decision as input.

[Link] Create a multi instance decision

Multi instance decisions are sub decisions that provide input for other decisions.
They are similar to a for-loop in a computer program: They iterate decisions and
expressions over a selected list. The list is contained within the input data where
the input data is either a list or a complex input data type.

Example:
Each position of the purchase agreement is validated to determine the validity
of the entire agreement.

To create a multi instance decision, follow these steps:

1. Add a Multi Instance Decision element to your diagram and name it.

2. Add an Input Data element, which represents the list, and name the ele-
ment.

Version 15.14 164

6   Modeling notations

3. In the attribute panel, define the input data element as a list in the Is list
attribute.

4. Connect the two elements.

To do so, select the multi instance decision element and from its shortcut
menu, drag the connector icon to the input data element.

Example:

5. To specify the list over which the multi instance decision must iterate, click
in the element.

The configuration dialog opens.

You can also open this dialog via the Iteration attribute in the attribute
panel.

6. Select your input data element as the input list.

Version 15.14 165

6   Modeling notations

7. Select the aggregation to specify what will happen with the result of the
multi instance decision.

8. Confirm with Save.

In the multi instance decision, an input data element is added representing
the values of the list.
Don't define this element as a list, otherwise the multi instance decision is
set up incorrectly.

9. Define the internal logic of the multi instance decision.

To do so, add a decision and place it in the multi instance decision. Connect
the decision with the input data element that is also located in the multi
instance decision.

Example:

Setting up the multi instance decision is complete.

Now, you can link it to the decision that needs the result of the multi
instance decision as input.

Example:

Version 15.14 166

6   Modeling notations

[Link] Next steps

Define a decision logic

Link DMN elements and diagrams

6.3.3 Define a decision logic

Decision logic specifies the details of a decision. This means you define rules in
form of a decision table or literal expression to describe which combinations of
data lead to certain results. In addition to the rules, you must define what hap-
pens when inputs meet multiple or no rules. This is done by specifying a hit
policy.
In this section, the options for defining a decision logic are explained.
To learn how to specify the hit policy and set the completeness requirement, read
more in section Define a hit policy and the completeness requirement.

Version 15.14 167

6   Modeling notations

[Link] Define a decision table

Decision logic can be presented as a table. A business rule that exists in your
company is represented by a decision rule in the decision table. All cells in a table
row form a decision rule.
Table inputs are specified in columns. Each input has a specific data type. The
output column shows the result of the applied business rule. Like the inputs, each
output also has a data type.
The decision rule then compares input data with the values in the cells.

Add rules to a decision table

To create decision rules, you must configure input data in the Inputs column and
map them to output data in the Output column.
Any input data modeled on the canvas is already available when you open
decision table. You can add missing input data by defining input columns in the
table.
All input data defined via the table is added as input data elements to the canvas
when the table is saved. You also need to define decision rules and map the out-
puts.
To define input data and add decision rules, follow these steps:

1. Open the decision table. To do so, select the decision to which you want to
add rules and click .

The decision logic configuration dialog opens.

Version 15.14 168

6   Modeling notations

You can also open this dialog via the Decision logic attribute in the attribute
panel.

2. Configure the input data. To do so, follow these steps:

a. Double-click New Input in the column header, and enter a name for
the input data.
If a dictionary entry exists, you can select it.

Example:

b. Below the input data name, double-click Text, select the type of the
input data, and define its options.

If you have chosen a dictionary entry as data input, it depends on the

entry's configuration whether you need to specify the data type.

The following data types are available:

o Enumeration
o Text
o Number
o Boolean
o Hierarchy
o Date

3. In the same way, configure the output data in the Outputs column.

Version 15.14 169

6   Modeling notations

4. In the same way, you can configure the Annotations column to add inform-
ation to the decision rules.

5. Define the first decision rule:

a. Double-click the left area of the first table cell. A list opens.

b. Select an operator to define the relation between the input and the out-
put.
Read more on operators in section Decision table operators.

c. Double-click the right area of the same cell. Again, a list opens.

d. Select or enter an input value.

e. In the Outputs column, double-click the cell and enter an output value.

6. With the buttons at the top of the table, you can add more rules, input data,
output data, and annotations.

7. To define more rules, you have the following options:

o You can continue defining rules cell by cell as described above.
o With Add rule > Duplicate rule, you can copy and paste existing rules.
o With Import/Export > Text Import, you can add text-based decision
rules instead of defining the rules cell by cell. Read more in section
Import decision rules to the decision table.

8. Select a hit policy for the decision table and specify the completeness
requirement.
In case of a multi hit policy, you can also select an aggregation. Read more
in section Define a hit policy and the completeness requirement.

9. With Verify, you can check the logic for completeness and consistency.
Below the table, all combinations of input values are displayed that aren't
covered by a decision rule.

10. Confirm with Apply.

Your decision logic is set up.

Version 15.14 170

6   Modeling notations

Decision table operators

Version 15.14 171

6   Modeling notations

Operator Symbol Description

Returns true if the

equal input value equals
For dates: on the specified
value.
Returns true if the
not equal input value doesn't
For dates: not on equal the specified
value.
Returns true if the
less input value is less
For dates: before than the specified
value.
Returns true if the
less or equal input value is less
For dates: until than or equals the
specified value.
Returns true if the
greater input value is
For dates: after greater than the
specified value.
Returns true if the
input value is
greater or equal
greater or equal
For dates: from
than the specified
value.
Returns true if the
contains input value con-
For numbers: included tains the specified
value.
not contains Returns true if the
For numbers: not included input value doesn't

Version 15.14 172

6   Modeling notations

Operator Symbol Description

contain the spe-

cified value.
Returns true if the
input value begins
begins with
with the specified
value.
Returns true if the
input value ends
ends with
with the specified
value.
Returns true if the
input value is also
element of
in the list of the
decision table.
Returns true if the
input value isn't in
not element of
the list of the
decision table.
Returns true if the
input list contains
and only items the list
elements of and contains only
in the decision
table contains as
well.
Returns true if the
input list contains
at least one item
contains any of
the list in the
decision table con-
tains.

contains none of Returns true if the

Version 15.14 173

6   Modeling notations

Operator Symbol Description

input list doesn't

contain any item
the list in the
decision table con-
tains.
Returns true if the
input value is
defined (not
empty) and valid.
For example, if
you only consider
valid numeric values
equal or greater
than zero, all
numeric values
less than zero and
all non-numeric val-
ues aren't valid.
Returns true if the
input value is
defined (not
empty), but invalid.
For example, if
you only consider
not valid numeric values
equal or greater
than zero, all
numeric values
less than zero and
all non-numeric val-
ues are invalid.

defined Returns true if the

Version 15.14 174

6   Modeling notations

Operator Symbol Description

input value is
defined (not
empty).
Returns true if the
not defined input value isn't
defined (empty).

Import decision rules to the decision table

Instead of defining the decision rules cell by cell, you can import text-based
decision rules into the table. The columns still need to be configured as described
above. The individual rules can be in the form of a list, separated by the delimiters
tab, semicolon, or comma.
The import function doesn't overwrite or delete existing rules. Imported rules are
always added.
Text-based rules must have the following structure:
o Relational operators like = and <= must be part of the field they relate to.
o For each rule, you need to start a new line.
o The import only supports the following literal expressions:
o not(value)

o not(value1, ..., valueN)

o !=value

To add text-based decision rules, follow these steps:

1. Open the decision table and click Import/Export > Text Import in the top-
right corner.
The text import dialog opens.

2. Select a delimiter.

3. Either enter the decision rules or copy them, for example from a text file or
spreadsheet, to the editor field.

4. Click Import.

Version 15.14 175

6   Modeling notations

The rules are added to the table. You can add more by opening the text
import dialog again.

Example:

[Link] Define a literal expression

As an alternative to the logic in the decision table, you can define logic via a literal
expression.

If a literal expression is defined, it supersedes the decision logic in the

decision table.

Literal expressions represent predefined logical algorithms or rules that can be

used to automatically create output results for decisions, often but not necessarily
in a formal expression language. You can use literal expressions to add logic that
can't be expressed in the decision table, for example, function calls, interim val-
ues, or list manipulation.

Version 15.14 176

6   Modeling notations

Literal expressions are written in FEEL, the 'friendly enough expression lan-
guage' specified as part of the DMN standard. You can download the spe-
cification along with examples for literal expression use cases at
[Link]
To define a literal expression, follow these steps:

1. Select a decision and click .

The decision logic editor opens.

2. Select the Expression tab on the left side and add the literal expression.

3. Confirm with Apply.

Read more about literal expressions in section Using advanced literal expres-
sions (functions in DMN decision elements).

[Link] Define an informal expression

If decision logic can't be expressed formally, you can describe it with natural lan-
guage. The description doesn't have to be formal or executable.
To define an informal expression, follow these steps:

1. Select a decision and click .

The decision logic editor opens.

2. Select the Informal expression tab on the left side and add the description
of the decision.

3. Select the data type of the decision logic via the Value domain list in the
upper right corner.

4. Confirm with Apply.

[Link] Next steps

Link the logic of another decision

Reuse decision logic via business knowledge models
Create dictionary entries for input or output data in decisions

Version 15.14 177

6   Modeling notations

6.3.4 Define a hit policy and the completeness requirement

With the hit policy, you define how your decision table manages inputs that are
handled by several rules and inputs for which no rules are defined. There are two
types:
o Single hit policies produce one result per input. Here, only one rule is
applied at a time, even if several rules exist.
o Multi hit policies produce an array of outputs. Here, all applicable rules are
considered regardless of their position in the table. The resulting output can
be a list or aggregated to a single value.

With the completeness requirement, you define whether your decision table is
only valid if its rules consider all possible inputs. This means, a table is only valid
if the modeler added rules for all input data. When checking the decision table
with Verify, the completeness is checked as well.
Unique (single) is the default hit policy. Read more in section Hit policy types.
To select another hit policy for a decision table, follow these steps:

1. In a DMN diagram, click in the decision element.

The decision table opens.

2. Click the letter in the upper left corner.

The configuration dialog opens.

Example:

Version 15.14 178

6   Modeling notations

3. Select the hit policy. Find details on each hit policy type below.

4. In case of a multi hit policy, select the aggregation:

o Collect (multiple)
o Sum
o Minimum
o Maximum
o Count

5. Select the completeness requirement:

o Complete: A complete decision table is only valid if it considers all pos-
sible inputs.
o Incomplete: An incomplete decision table is valid even if it doesn't con-
sider all possible inputs.

6. Confirm with Save.

Version 15.14 179

6   Modeling notations

The hit policy and completeness is set.

[Link] Hit policy types

Unique (single)

One input combination is covered by exactly one rule. It's assumed that all inputs
are independent of each other, so any combination is possible. Overlapping rules
are not allowed.
Unique (single) is the default hit policy. In the decision table, it's indicated with the
letter U.

Example:
Depending on the current season, a retailer decides which product group to
offer at a reduced price. Only one product group can be offered, since only one
season exists at the same time.

Input Output

Season Product group

Spring garden equipment

Summer beverages

Autumn clothes

Winter food

Any (single)

Multiple rules cover the same combination of input values. This overlap is only
allowed if the rules also lead to the same result.
In the decision table, this hit policy is indicated with the letter A.

Example:
If a credit applicant is younger than 18 years old and is already in debt, the
application is rejected. Otherwise the credit applicant gets a credit.

Version 15.14 180

6   Modeling notations

Input Output

Age Debt Result

< 18 yes rejected

- no approved
>= 18 - approved

Priority (single)

Multiple rules can apply for one input value. The results are ordered according to
their priority. The result with the highest priority is returned.
In the decision table, this hit policy is indicated with the letter P.

Example:
In a decision table, the logic determines at what age customers get certain dis-
count vouchers. Customers aged 18 or over get vouchers for sports equip-
ment, and all customers older than 3 vouchers for toys. Both rules apply to a
30-year-old customer. As the sports equipment has a higher priority, the cus-
tomer gets a voucher for this. Consequently, the output list is [sports equipment,
toys, clothing].

Input Output

Age Voucher for

> 18 Sports equipment

>3 Toys
- Clothing

First (single)

Overlapping rules are allowed, but only the first applicable rule is used. As the
rules are evaluated from top to bottom, you must sort the rules in the table.
In the decision table, this hit policy is indicated with the letter F.

Example:

Version 15.14 181

6   Modeling notations

In a decision table, the logic determines at what age customers get certain dis-
count vouchers. Customers aged 18 or over get vouchers for clothing, and all
customers older than 3 vouchers for sports equipment. Both rules apply to a
30-year-old customer. As the rule for 18-year-old customers is at the top of the
decision table, this rule serves as the basis for the decision. The customer
receives a voucher for clothing.

Input Output

Age Voucher for

> 18 Clothing
>3 Sports equipment
- Toys

Collect (multiple)

By default, the collect hit policy collects the outputs of matching rules, but can be
configured to determine the sum, minimum, maximum, or count of matching out-
puts instead.
In the decision table, this hit policy is indicated with the letter C.

Example:
An online shop adds a discount coupon to specific orders. The discount
depends on the total sum of an order. In the decision table below, the outcome
differs depending on the aggregation set for the hit policy. Given a 250$ pur-
chase order, the following applies:
o Without aggregation set, the hit policy returns two coupons (5% and 25%
discount) in no particular order.
o With aggregation set to sum, the hit policy returns one coupon with 30%
discount.
o With aggregation set to maximum, the hit policy returns one coupon with
25% discount.

Version 15.14 182

6   Modeling notations

o With aggregation set to minimum, the hit policy returns one coupon with
0% discount and disappoints the customer in this scenario.
o With aggregation set to count, the hit policy returns 2, which doesn't
provide any relevant information in this scenario.

Input Output

Total order sum Discount coupon

<= 50$ 0%
> 50$ 5%
> 200$ 25%

Output order (multiple)

Results are ordered by the priority of the output values.

In the decision table, this hit policy is indicated with the letter O.

Example:
An online shop adds small gifts to orders. The gifts a customer receives
depend on the total order sum. If the order sum is 50$ or lower, the customer
receives a discount coupon. If the order sum exceeds 50$, the customer
receives a small pack of high-quality coffee in addition to the coupon.
With an output order hit policy, for the total order sum of 250$ the table below
will return the result [Coffee, Discount coupon], sorted according to the order of the
specified output list.

Input Output

Total order sum Gift = [Coffee, Discount coupon]

- Discount coupon

> 50$ Coffee

Version 15.14 183

6   Modeling notations

Rule order (multiple)

Results are ordered by the order of matching rules.

In the decision table, this hit policy is indicated with the letter R.

Example:
An online shop adds small gifts to orders. The gifts a customer receives
depend on the total order sum. If the order sum is 50$ or lower, the customer
receives a discount coupon. If the order sum exceeds 50$, the customer
receives a small pack of high-quality coffee in addition to the coupon.
When applying a rule order hit policy, an input of 250$ will return the result [Dis-
count coupon, Coffee], sorted according to the order of the applying rules.

Input Output

Total order sum Gift = [Coffee, Discount coupon]

- Discount coupon

> 50$ Coffee

[Link] Next steps

Define a decision logic

DMN simulation

6.3.5 Using advanced literal expressions (functions in DMN

decision elements)
In case you have modeled your first DMN diagram, you are already familiar with
DMN expressions for decision logic, e.g. in the form of a simple smaller than
statement. These expressions are explained in the chapter Model a decision.
You might remember that you selected the corresponding operator from a drop-
down list in the Decision Table Editor.

Version 15.14 184

6   Modeling notations

In many cases, these basic operators are not sufficient.

A simple example is determining a discount based on the total value of a list of
purchased objects.
To determine the sum, we need to use SAP Signavio's advanced literal expres-
sions. The expressions are based on FEEL, the friendly enough expression lan-
guage specified as part of the DMN standard, which you can download as PDF at
[Link] .
The single commands can be used in combination, like in the following example:
Product((1 - DiscountRate) * Sum(ListOfItemPrices))
In the example, we calculate the total purchase sum of a list of items, considering
a discount. The variables used here correspond to the data types defined in Input
Data element's attributes and can be set when simulating the DMN diagram.
The documentation of all available expressions can be found at Documentation
of all literal expressions .
Of course, you can also use standard operators ( +, -, *, /, and, or) within literal
expressions.
Consequently, the example above can be expressed more concisely:
(1 - DiscountRate) * Sum(ListOfItemPrices)

Version 15.14 185

6   Modeling notations

[Link] Using literal expressions in Decision Tables

In our example, we want to determine - as already mentioned above - a discount

based on the total value of all purchased items.
First, create the Purchased items Data Input element. The input should be a list
of numbers of the type currency.
Now create a Decision, connect it to the data input and label it Determine dis-
count. Click the table icon in the upper left corner of the Decision element to open
the Decision Table Editor.

Create a Decision, reference the Data Input element and open the decision table editor.

To activate the literal expression input, click the header and delete the input ref-
erence in the table:

Delete the input reference to be able to insert a literal expression.

Type in =. An overview over available variables and functions is displayed:

Version 15.14 186

6   Modeling notations

After inserting an initial '=' sign, available variables and functions are displayed.
Suggestions appear as you type. Type in Sum and select the Sum function.
Then, insert the variable PurchasedItems as a parameter of Sum:

Insert the literal expression 'Sum(PurchasedItems)'.

Now, the decision logic's Input Data is the sum of all purchased items. You can
define the decision logic as usual.
Mind the first hit policy in our example:

Version 15.14 187

6   Modeling notations

Decision logic for determining a discount based on the total sum of purchased
items

[Link] Using literal expressions instead of Decision Tables

You can also use literal expressions instead of Decision Tables.

For example, you can split a decision into two daisy-chained elements, one with a
decision table and another one with literal expression logic.

'Calculate total sum' and 'Determine discount' as two separate Decision ele-
ments.
o The first element calculates the total sum of purchased items.
o The second element determines the discount based on the total sum.

We can model the first decision without using a decision table.

Version 15.14 188

6   Modeling notations

Open the decision table editor and switch to the Literal expressions tab. There,
insert the literal expression to calculate the sum of items:

Open the 'Literal expression tab' and insert the literal expression.
Now, the decision element returns the sum of items as a Data Output and can be
referenced by the following Decision element.
If we create complex literal expressions, we can define variables - so called
boxed contexts and reference them in our decision function:

Manage complex expressions with boxed contexts.

This improves the readability of our literal expressions.

If a literal expression is defined, it supersedes the decision logic in

the decision table.

[Link] Documentation of all literal expressions

This section lists all available literal expressions, grouped by operation type.

Arithmetic operations

Abs

Abs(number):NUMERIC

Version 15.14 189

6   Modeling notations

Returns the absolute value of a number.

Example: Abs(-5) returns 5.

Count

Count([num1 ,num2, num3]):NUMERIC

Returns the number of elements of the given list.
Example: Count(["item1", "item2", "item3"]) returns 3.

Round

Round(number,digits):NUMERIC
Returns a number rounded to the corresponding number of digits.
Example: Round(3.44,1) returns 3.4.

Ceiling

Ceiling(number):NUMERIC
Returns a number rounded up to the next integer.
Example: Ceiling(1.3) returns 2.

Floor

Floor(number):NUMERIC
Returns a number rounded down to the next integer.
Example: Floor(1.6) returns 1.

Integer

Integer(number): NUMERIC
Returns the integer part of a number.
Example: Integer(1.34) returns 1.

Modulo

Modulo(divident, divisor):NUMERIC
Returns the remainder of the divident divided by the divisor.
Example: Modulo(4, 3) returns 1.

Percent

Percent(number):NUMERIC
Returns the number divided by 100.
Example: Percent(10) returns 0.1.

Version 15.14 190

6   Modeling notations

Power

Power(base, exponent):NUMERIC
Returns the base raised to the power of the exponent.
Example: Power(2, 3) returns 8.

Product

Product([factor1, factor2, factor3]):NUMERIC

Returns the product of a list of factors.
Example: Product([2, 3, 4]) returns 24.

RoundDown

RoundDown(number, digits):NUMERIC
Returns a number rounded down to the corresponding number of digits.
Example: RoundDown(1.3674, 2) returns 1.36.

RoundUp

RoundUp(number, digits):NUMERIC
Returns a number rounded up to the corresponding number of digits.
Example: Abs(1.344, 2) returns 1.35.

Sum

Sum([number1, number2, number3]):NUMERIC

Returns the sum of a list of values.
Example: Sum([1, 2, 3, 4, 5]) returns 15.

Date & time operations

Day

Day(datetime):NUMERIC
Returns the day part of a datetime.
Example: Day(2015-12-24T12:15:00.000+01:00) returns 24.

DayAdd

DayAdd(datetime, days to add):DATE

Returns the date plus the provided number of days.
Example: DayAdd(2015-12-24T12:15:00.000+01:00, 1) returns 2015-12-
25T12:15:00.000+01:00.

Version 15.14 191

6   Modeling notations

DayDiff

DayDiff(datetime1, datetime2):NUMERIC
Returns the amount of full days between two dates.
Example: DayDiff(2015-12-24T12:15:00.000+01:00, 2015-12-25T12:15:00.000+01:00)
returns 1.

Date

Date(year, month, day):DATE

Returns a date using the standard parameters of a date: year, month, day
Example: Date(2015, 12, 25) returns 2015-12-25.

DateTime

DateTime(day, month, year, hour, minute, second, hourOffsett):DATE

Returns the dateTime using the standard parameters of a data time. The last para-
meter 'hourOffset' is optional.
Example: DateTime(25, 12, 2015, 12, 15, 0, 1) returns 2015-12-24T12:15:00.000+01:00.

Hour

Hour(datetime):NUMERIC
Returns the hour part of a datetime.
Example: Hour(2015-12-24T12:15:00.000+01:00) returns 12.

HourDiff

Hour(time):NUMERIC
Returns the amount of full hours between two dates.
Example: HourDiff(2015-12-24T12:15:00.000+01:00, 2015-12-24T14:15:00.000+01:00)
returns 2.

Minute

Minute(time):NUMERIC
Returns the minute part of a datetime.
Example: Minute(2015-12-24T12:15:00.000+01:00) returns 15.

MinutesDiff

MinutesDiff(datetimes1, date2times):NUMERIC
Returns the amount of full minutes between two dates.

Version 15.14 192

6   Modeling notations

Example: MinutesDiff(2015-12-24T12:15:00.000+01:00, 2015-12-24T13:15:00.000+01:00)

returns 60.

Month

Month(datetime):NUMERIC
Returns the month part of a datetime.
Example: Month(2015-12-24T12:15:00.000+01:00) returns 12.

MonthAdd

MonthAdd(datetime, months_to_add):DATE
Returns the datetime plus the number of months.
Example: MonthAdd(2015-10-10T12:15:00.000+01:00, 1) returns 2015-11-
10T12:15:00.000+01:00.

MonthDiff

MonthDiff(datetime1, datetime2):NUMERIC
Returns the amount of full months between two dates.
Example: MonthDiff(2015-10-10T12:15:00.000+01:00, 2015-11-10T12:15:00.000+01:00)
returns 1.

Now

Now():DATE
Returns current datetime.
Example: Now() could have returned 2015-11-10T12:15:00.000+01:00.

Today

Today():DATE
Returns the current date.
Example : Today() could have returned 2015-11-10.

Weekday

Weekday(datetime):NUMERIC
Returns a number (1 to 7) representing the day of the week.
Example: weekday(2016-02-09T12:15:00.000+01:00) returns 3.

Year

Year(datetime):NUMERIC
Returns the year part of a datetime.

Version 15.14 193

6   Modeling notations

Example: Year(2016-02-09T12:15:00.000+01:00) returns 2016.

YearAdd

YearAdd(datetime, years_to_add):DATE
Returns the datetime plus the number of years.
Example: YearAdd(2016-02-09T12:15:00.000+01:00, 1) returns 2017-02-
09T12:15:00.000+01:00.

YearDiff

YearDiff(datetime1, datetime2):NUMERIC
Returns the amount of full years between two dates.
Example: YearDiff(2016-02-09T12:15:00.000+01:00, 2017-02-09T12:15:00.000+01:00)
returns 1.

List operations

Append

Append(list, element): LIST

Adds the element to a copy of the provided list. Returns the manipulated copy.
Example : Append([2.5, 5.8, 4.3], 6.7) returns [2.5, 5.8, 4.3, 6.7].

AppendAll

AppendAll(list1, list2): LIST

Adds all elements from the second provided list to a copy of the first one. Returns
the manipulated copy.
Example: AppendAll([2.5, 5.8, 4.3], [2.1, 3.5, 7.4]) returns [2.5, 5.8, 4.3, 2.1, 3.5, 7.4].

Zip

Zip(attributes, values1, ..., valuesN): LIST

Assembles a list of objects out of a list of attributes and multiple lists of values. :
Zip(["id", "value"], [23a3e98, c45da1b], [40, 120]) returns [{id: 23a3e98, value: 40},{ id:
c45da1b, value: 120}].

Before version 10.11.0 of the Decision Manager, the values were

passed to the function as a list of lists, for example:
Zip(["id", "value"], [[23a3e98, c45da1b], [40, 120]])

Version 15.14 194

6   Modeling notations

Literal expressions that used the old Zip function have been auto-
matically transformed to the new syntax.

NotContainsAny

NotContainsAny(list1, list2): BOOLEAN

Determines whether list1 contains any element of list2.
Example : NotContainsAny(["item1", "item2"], ["item2", "item3"]) returns false.

ContainsOnly

ContainsOnly(list1, list2): BOOLEAN

Determines whether list1 contains only elements of list2.
Example: ContainsOnly(["item1", "item2"], ["item2", "item3"]) returns false.

AreElementsOf

AreElementsOf(list1, list2): BOOLEAN

Determines whether list2 contains all elements of list1.
Example: AreElementsOf(["item2, item3"], ["item1", "item2", "item3"]) returns true.

Remove

This expression is available only in the Literal Expressions Editor (not in the
Decision Table Editor).
Remove(list, element): LIST
Removes the specified element from the specified list.
Example: Remove(["item1", "item2"], "item1") returns ["item2"].

RemoveAll

This expression is available only in the Literal Expressions Editor (not in the
Decision Table Editor).
RemoveAll(list1, list2): LIST
Removes all elements of list2 from list1.
Example: Remove(["item1", "item2", "item3"], ["item1", "item2"]) returns ["item3"].

Statistical operations

Avg

Avg([number1, number2, number3]):NUMERIC

Returns the average of the values of the given list.

Version 15.14 195

6   Modeling notations

Example: Avg([3,5]) returns 4.

Max

Max([number1, number2, number3]):NUMERIC

Returns the maximum value of the given list.
Example: Max([5, 4, 10]) returns 10.

Median

Median([number1, number2, number3]):NUMERIC

Returns the median value of the given list.
Example: Median([2, 5, 10, 12, 34, 35]) returns 11.

Min

Min([number1, number2, number3]):NUMERIC

Returns the minimum value of the given list.
Example : Min([5, 4, 10]) returns 4.

Mode

Mode([number1, number2, number3]):NUMERIC

Returns the most frequently occurring value of the given list. Returns the first
(most left) most frequent value, if several values occur most frequently (e.g. two
values appear each two times).
Example: Mode([1, 2, 4, 4, 5, 6]) returns 4.

Text handling

Concat

Concat([text1, text2, text3]):TEXT

Returns the concatenation of the given list of text values.
Example: Concat(["Hello ", "World", "!"]) returns "Hello World!".

IsAlpha

IsAlpha(text):BOOLEAN
Determines whether the text contains only alphabetic characters (A-Z, a-z).
Umlauts and similar characters (e.g.Ä, Å ß) must not be included.
Example: IsAlpha("abcdefg5") returns false.

IsAlphanumeric

IsAlphanumeric(text):BOOLEAN

Version 15.14 196

6   Modeling notations

Determines whether the text contains only alphanumeric characters (A-Z, a-z, 0-
9). Umlauts and similar characters (e.g. Ä, Å ß) must not be included.
Example: isAlphanumeric("abcdefg5") returns true.

IsNumeric

IsNumeric(text):BOOLEAN
Determines whether the text is a valid number containing only plus or minus sign,
digits, commas, and decimal points.
Example: IsNumeric("2.3.5") returns false

IsSpaces

IsSpaces(text):BOOLEAN
Determines whether the text contains only spaces.
Example: IsSpaces(" ") returns true.

Len

Len(text):NUMERIC
Returns the number of characters in a text string.
Example : Len("five") returns 4.

Lower

Lower(text):TEXT
Returns the text string with all letters converted to lowercase.
Example: Lower("UPPER") returns upper.

Trim

Trim(text):TEXT
Returns the text string with all spaces removed except single spaces between
words.
Example: Trim("Hello World! ") returns "Hello World!".

Upper

Upper(text):TEXT
Returns the text string with all letters converted to uppercase.
Example: Upper("lower") returns "LOWER".

Number

Number(text):NUMERIC

Version 15.14 197

6   Modeling notations

Returns the numerical value represented in the text string. Only a period (.) is
allowed as a separator.
Example: Number("5") returns 5.

Number

Number(text, default_value):NUMERIC
Returns the numerical value represented in the text string. Only a period (.) is
allowed as a separator. Returns default_value if unable to convert text into number.
Example: Number("5,5", 10) returns 10 (Number("5.5", 10) returns 5.5).

Mid

Mid(text, start, num_chars):TEXT

Returns the character sequence of the length num_chars from the corresponding
starting position of a text string.
Example: Mid("Hello World!", 6, 5) returns "World".

Left

Left(text, num_chars):TEXT
Returns the character sequence of the length num_chars from the start of a text
string.
Example: Left("Hello World!", 5) returns "Hello".

Right

Right(text, num_chars):TEXT
Returns the character sequence of the length num_chars from the end of a text
string.
Example: Right("Hello World!", 7) returns "World!".

Text

Text(num, format_text):TEXT
Returns a numeric value as a text string in a specific format. The format is spe-
cified by the placeholders # and 0 and a decimal point..
Example: Text(1, "#.000") returns "1.000".

TextOccurrences

TextOccurrences(find_text, within_text):NUMERIC
Returns the number of occurrences of find_text within within_text.

Version 15.14 198

6   Modeling notations

Example: TextOccurrences("can", "Can you can a can as a canner can can a can?") returns
6.

Contains

Contains(text, substring): BOOLEAN

Determines whether text contains the substring.
Example: Contains("Hello World!", "o World") returns true.

StartsWith

StartsWith(text, prefix): BOOLEAN

Determines whether text starts with the prefix.
Example: StartsWith("Hello World!", "Hello") returns true.

EndsWith

EndsWith(text, suffix): BOOLEAN

Determines whether text ends with the suffix.
Example: endsWith("Hello World!", "!") returns true.

Logical operators

Not

Not(boolean): BOOLEAN
Negates the input boolean.
Example: Not(true) returns false.

6.3.6 Link DMN elements and diagrams

[Link] Link a DMN diagram to a BPMN diagram

You can link DMN and BPMN diagrams so that processes can be viewed sep-
arately from decisions, with the advantage that the process is streamlined and
the decision is traceable.
Follow these steps:

1. Open your BPMN diagram and select the task to which you want to link the
decision diagram.

2. In the attribute panel, set the Task type attribute to Business rule.

Version 15.14 199

6   Modeling notations

3. In the task element, click .

The configuration dialog to create a link opens.

You can also open this dialog via the Decision reference attribute in the
attribute panel.

4. You can either create a new DMN diagram or link an existing one.

5. Confirm with Link diagram.

The DMN diagram is linked. To open a preview of it, click in the busi-
ness rule task again.

Once the BPMN process is published to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration

Hub, users can open the decision diagram in via the BPMN process. With Run
decision, they can then add data to the rules defined in the decision diagram and
determine the result of the decision. For more on simulation, read DMN sim-
ulation.

[Link] Link the logic of another decision

Instead of adding decision rules to a decision of a DMN diagram, you can integ-
rate the decision logic from another DMN diagram.
To link a decision of another DMN diagram, follow these steps:

1. Open the decision table and click Link on the left side of the dialog.
The configuration dialog to create a link opens.

2. Navigate to the DMN diagram and select the decision you want to link.

3. Confirm with Link diagram.

The decision of the DMN diagram is linked.

In an older version of the decision logic editor, you were able to link a
diagram without selecting a decision. Such a link is incomplete and
can't be read out by the simulation and test lab features. If you find
such a link, always edit it so that it links the decision.

Version 15.14 200

6   Modeling notations

[Link] Reuse decision logic via business knowledge models

If you want to run a decision multiple times with different data input, you can link it
to a business knowledge model. If you then link the business knowledge model to
other decisions, they can reuse the logic of the linked decision. This is called a
boxed invocation.
Boxed invocations provide decision logic and input type information as a generic
function, whereas decisions directly linked to other decisions provide not only the
input data types, but the specific input data objects.
In the following example, an insurance premium is calculated based on the applic-
ant's and their spouse's risk level. For each person, the same decision logic
determines a different risk level. A link via a business knowledge model allows
calling the linked decision model with different data inputs. In contrast, a direct
link to a decision diagram will fail to distinguish between the two data sources.

To link a decision to a business knowledge model, click in the business know-

ledge model and select the decision you want to link from the configuration dia-
log.
To reuse the logic of the decision linked to the business knowledge model, follow
these steps:

1. Open the decision table and select the Invocation tab on the left side.

2. Map the linked and the invoked decision's input data.

Version 15.14 201

6   Modeling notations

3. Confirm with Apply.

The boxed invocation is set up.

You can find more information on boxed invocation in the DMN specification at
[Link]

[Link] Next steps

Define a decision logic

Set BPMN attributes
Comparing DMN diagrams and revisions

6.3.7 Create dictionary entries for input or output data in decisions

A workspace administrator needs to set up a dictionary category of

which the entries can be used for DMN modeling.

To create a dictionary entry for input or output data in decisions, create an entry
in the dictionary as usual. Read more in section Create new dictionary entries.
You need to create the entry in a dictionary category that is activated for DMN
modeling.
You can tell if a category is activated for DMN modeling when its entries have the
following settings:

Version 15.14 202

6   Modeling notations

Setting Description
Technical If the dictionary entry is used as a data object for input or output
name
data, you can add a domain-specific export name.
This name is used when exporting a DMN diagram as XML or
Drools rules. Read more in the sections Export a DMN diagram as
XML and Exporting DMN diagrams as drools rules.

If the technical name and the class name are set, only the
class name is exported.

Class If the dictionary entry is used as a data definition, you can add a java
name
source reference.
This name is used when exporting a DMN diagram as Drools rules.
Read more in section Exporting DMN diagrams as drools rules.

If the technical name and the class name are set, only the
class name is exported.

Type defin- You can specify the data type, the following options are available:
ition
o Not specified – Modeling users specify the data type in the
decision table.
o Simple Type – Select a type:
o Enumeration
o Text
o Number
o Boolean
o Hierarchy
o Date
o Complex Type – Link one or more dictionary entries and add
simple data types.

Example:

Version 15.14 203

6   Modeling notations

[Link] Next steps

Define a decision logic

6.3.8 The DMN Test lab

With the DMN Test lab, you define and run test cases in order to check whether a
DMN diagram fulfills certain requirements. For example, you can ensure that dia-
grams still comply with the initial decision logic after being extended, and you can
control the correctness of specific input combinations and outputs in complex dia-
grams.

Version 15.14 204

6   Modeling notations

The DMN Test lab

[Link] Create test cases

To open the Test lab, select the diagram you want to test in the explorer and click
Edit > Test DMN diagram.
To create a new test case, follow these steps:

1. Click '#' on the left of the test cases table.

2. Click one of the test case's columns to define all its values. A drop-down dia-
log opens and you can enter the necessary information. Then, click Apply.

Version 15.14 205

6   Modeling notations

Specify the input data of your test case.

3. Click the column that shows the calculated value in red in the Result
column on the right and specify the expected output value(s).

Specify the expected output value(s)

After you have created all necessary cases, you can save them by clicking the
Save button.

To delete a test case, it must be saved first. To do so, click onto the
number of the saved test case(s) you would like to remove, then click
Save.

Version 15.14 206

6   Modeling notations

Delete a test case.

Each test case is automatically executed as soon as a parameter is changed.

In the following simple case, we want to determine a discount. The only input
parameter here is the purchase value. In the first test case, no value is given for
the expected result as indicated by the red X on the left in the result column. In
the second case, the actual discount corresponds with the expected result as
indicated by the green check mark icon. In the third case, the expected result is
different from the actual result, as indicated, again, by the red X.

Undefined, passing and failing test cases

[Link] Inspecting test cases in the simulation tool

Often, you want to find out why a test case is producing a certain output. With the
DMN simulation you can inspect a decision's behavior, for example to see
exactly which rules fire for your input data set. To open the simulation tool, select
a test case and click Inspect in Simulation:

Version 15.14 207

6   Modeling notations

Open a test case in the simulation tool.

Then, the simulation tool applies the input data of your test case automatically.

[Link] Import and export test cases

To keep test cases when exchanging diagrams between SAP Signavio work-
spaces or using the test cases in other tools, you can export and import the test
cases as JSON files.

You need to save test cases to be able to export them.

To export test cases for a diagram, open the Test lab and click Export Test
Cases. The file is saved to your browser's download folder. By default, the file is
named after the diagram.
To import test cases, follow these steps:

1. Open the Test lab and click Import.

2. Select the JSON file you want to import and click Open.
The test cases are imported and added to the test cases you have already
created.

[Link] Import test cases from third-party tools

You can import test cases created in other software tools. To do this, you must
convert the test cases into the format supported by the Test lab. We recommend
creating a template JSON file for test cases and adding the existing test cases to
it.
To create a template, add your test cases, and import the test cases, follow these
steps:

Version 15.14 208

6   Modeling notations

1. Open the Test lab and create a test case as described in section Create
test cases.

2. To get a format template for a test case, enter one example for inputs and
expected outputs.

3. To get the IDs of the values, enter examples for enumerations and attrib-
utes of complex data types.

4. To export the template file, click Export Test Cases.

The file is saved to your browser's download folder.

5. Open the template file in any editor and add your test cases to the testCases
section.

Before you start customizing the template file, we recommend

creating a copy as backup.

Read more on the file structure in section Structure of a test cases file.

6. Save your changes in the file and return to the Test lab.

7. To import the file with your test cases, click Import.

8. Select the file and click Open.

Your test cases are imported and added to the test cases you have already
created.

Structure of a test cases file

A test cases file is structured as follows:

{
"inputParameterDefinitions": [
{
"id": "DIAGRAM_ID/SHAPE_ID",
"shapeId": "SHAPE_ID",
"diagramId": "DIAGRAM_ID",
"modelName": "MODEL_NAME",
"requirementName": "INPUT_DATA_NAME"
},
...
],
"outputParameterDefinitions": [
{
"id": "DIAGRAM_ID/SHAPE_ID",
"shapeId": "SHAPE_ID",
"diagramId": "DIAGRAM_ID",
"modelName": "MODEL_NAME",

Version 15.14 209

6   Modeling notations

"requirementName": "TOP_LEVEL_DECISION_NAME"
},
...
],
"testCases": [
{
"inputValues": [
{
"type": "number|string|date|time|datetime|boolean|complex|enumeration|hierarchy|list",
"value": "INPUT_VALUE"
},
...
],
"expectedValues": [
{
"type": "number|string|date|time|datetime|boolean|complex|enumeration|hierarchy|list",
"value": "OUTPUT_VALUE"
}
]
},
{
<ANOTHER TEST CASE>
},
{
<ANOTHER TEST CASE>
},
...
]
}

For convenience, the Test lab export adds name elements, for
example name, modelName, and requirementName, to add context to the
exported file. The name elements aren't imported. However, you must
not change any name element, otherwise the import will fail.
Besides these name elements, all elements in the test cases file are
required, otherwise the import will fail.

Definition of input and output parameters

Version 15.14 210

6   Modeling notations

Element Description Type

Array of
o inputPara- defin-
ition
meterDefinitions
objects
o out- Top level for input
or out-
putPara- put
meterDefinitions para-
meters

Specifies the ID of the parameter definition

id The ID is composed of the diagram ID and String
the shape ID as follows: diagramID/shapeID

Specifies the ID of the shape

To find the shape ID, open the DMN dia-
shapeId gram in the editor and expand the attrib- String
utes panel. Under More Attributes, the
shape ID is listed as Element ID.

Specifies the ID of the DMN diagram

The diagram ID is part of the URL when
opening the DMN diagram in the editor, for
example id=343056b7ce194785b04-
diagramId 4efab05cfa92a9 from the URL [Link] String
work-
space>.sig-
navi-
[Link]/p/ed-
itor?id=343056b7ce194785b04efab05cfa92a9.

Version 15.14 211

6   Modeling notations

Element Description Type

Specifies the title of the diagram as spe-

modelName cified in the editor String
This element is ignored during import.

For inputParameterDefinitions: Specifies

the shape name of an input data element.
For outputParameterDefinitions: Specifies
requirementName String
the shape name of the top-level decision
element.
This element is ignored during import.

List of test cases

Version 15.14 212

6   Modeling notations

Element Description Type

Test
testCases Top level cases
object

Specifies the input data

inputValues is bound to the
Array of
input data via the section input
inputParameterDefinitions. value
objects,
The order defines the bind- read more
inputValues ing: the first element in in section
Objects
inputValues is passed as
for input
value to the input data cor- and out-
responding to the first ele- put val-
ues
ment in
inputParameterDefinitions.

Specifies the expected

output data
expectedValues is bound to
Array of
the decision output via the output
section out- value
objects,
putParameterDefinitions. The read more
expectedValues order defines the binding: in section
Objects
the first element in expec-
for input
tedValues is passed as and out-
value to the output data put val-
ues
corresponding to the first
element in out-
putParameterDefinitions.

Objects for input and output values

Version 15.14 213

6   Modeling notations

Element Description Type Notes

o
Array of
inputValues input or out-
Top level
o expectedValues put value
objects

Valid values:
o number
o string
o date
o time
Specifies the
data type of the
 type String o datetime
input or output
value o boolean
o complex
o enumeration
o hierarchy
o list

The data types

"number", "string",
and "boolean" cor-
respond to stand-
ard JSON data
types.
Values of type
Specifies the
 value actual input or String "date" must be rep-
output value resented as ISO
formatted strings,
for example "2015-
12-31".
Values of type
"time" must be rep-
resented as ISO

Version 15.14 214

6   Modeling notations

Element Description Type Notes

formatted string, for

example
"T23:59:59Z" or
"T23:59:59-02:00".
Values of type "dat-
etime" must be rep-
resented as ISO
formatted string, for
example "2015-12-
31T23:59:00-
02:00".
For values of type
"list", read more in
section List value.
Nesting lists is not
supported.
For values of type
"complex", read
more in section
Complex value.
For values of type
"enumeration",
read more in sec-
tion Enumeration
value.
For values of type
"hierarchy", read
more in section
Hierarchy value.

List value

JSON example:

Version 15.14 215

6   Modeling notations

{
"type" : "list",
"value" : [ {
"type" : "number|string|date|time|datetime|boolean|complex|enumeration|hierarchy",
"value" : "INPUT_VALUE"
}, {
"type" : "number",
"value" : "INPUT_VALUE"
}, {
...
}]
}

Element Description Type

Specifies the data type of a value.

type String
Value must be "list".

Array of
value
objects,
read
more in
value Specifies the list value objects section
Objects
for input
and out-
put val-
ues

Nesting lists is not supported.

Complex value

JSON example:
{
"type" : "complex",
"slots" : [ {
"id" : "0",
"value" : {
"type" : "number|string|date|time|datetime|boolean|complex|enumeration|hierarchy|list",
"value" : "INPUT_VALUE",
}
}, {
"id" : "1",
"value" : {
"type" : "number|string|date|time|datetime|boolean|complex|enumeration|hierarchy|list",
"value" : "INPUT_VALUE",
}
}, {
...
}]
}

Version 15.14 216

6   Modeling notations

Element Description Type

Specifies the type of a value

type String
Value must be "complex".

Array of
slots Specifies the attributes of the complex type definition attribute
objects

Reference to the value of the data type definition

Since attributes can be renamed and reordered, the
name or the order as shown in the editor can be mis-
id leading. IDs are assigned when a new attribute is String
created. Renaming and reordering doesn't change
the attribute's ID. To determine the correct ID,
export an example test case for each value.

Value
object,
read
more in
section
value Specifies the actual value for the attribute
Objects
for input
and out-
put val-
ues

Enumeration value

JSON example:
{
"type" : "enumeration",
"value" : "0"
}

Version 15.14 217

6   Modeling notations

Element Description Type

Specifies the data type of a value

type String
Value must be "enumeration".

Specifies the ID of the value of the data type defin-

ition
Since enumeration values can be renamed and
reordered, the name or the order as shown in the
value editor can be misleading. IDs are assigned when a String
new enumeration value is created. Renaming and
reordering doesn't change the enumeration value's
ID. To determine the correct ID, export an example
test case for each value.

Hierarchy value

JSON example:
{
"type" : "hierarchy",
"value" : [ "1", "4" ],
}

Element Description Type

Specifies the data type of a value

type String
Value must be "hierarchy".

Specifies a list of IDs according to the data type defin-

ition, constructing the path from the root of the hierarchy
to the referenced element
Since hierarchy values can be renamed and reordered, Array of
value the name or the order as shown in the editor can be mis- positional
IDs
leading. IDs are assigned when a new hierarchy value
is created. Renaming and reordering doesn't change
the hierarchy value's ID. To determine the correct ID,
export an example test case for each value.

Version 15.14 218

6   Modeling notations

6.3.9 DMN simulation

The decision management extension of SAP Signavio Process Manager allows
you to model, manage and better understand complex business decisions. In the
DMN simulation tool, you can simulate business decisions by applying data to the
rules that are defined in a decision diagram. The simulation tool helps you to
understand dependencies between sub-decisions and to identify scenarios for
which no rules have been established. Thus, this tool is a powerful addition to
your Business Decision Management initiative and makes business decisions
and decision logic understandable for everyone.

The DMN Simulation is also available as an additional feature in SAP

Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.

To open the DMN simulation tool, select the diagram in the Explorer and click
Edit - Simulate DMN diagram:

Open the DMN simulation tool from the Explorer.

Alternatively, you can open the diagram in the Editor and use the dropdown menu
in the upper right corner to switch from the Graphical Editor to the Simulation
tool:

Version 15.14 219

6   Modeling notations

Switch from the Editor to the DMN simulation tool.

Now, you can start using the simulation tool.

Simulate business decisions.

Select a decision in the diagram, either by clicking on it or by using the dropdown
menu in the top right corner. Then, scroll to the Inputs section and fill in the data
of your simulation scenario. The Outputs section shows the decision output as
computed by the simulation tool. The Wildcard mode toggle affects the eval-
uation semantics. Wildcard mode turned on means that empty input values are

Version 15.14 220

6   Modeling notations

replaced with wildcards, which will, for example, match all conditions in decision
tables. When turned off, empty input values will remain undefined during eval-
uation.

If the Wildcard mode is activated and one or multiple input parameters

are not defined, the simulation tool will determine the set of possible
output values. This is helpful, for example, if in specific application
scenarios some input values remain unknown.

The progress bars in the decision elements indicates the extent to which data
inputs are defined so far. When scrolling down, you can see a decision table over-
view that highlights the rules that apply in the current scenario:

The rules that apply to the provided input data are highlighted in green.

6.3.10 Comparing DMN diagrams and revisions

The SAP Signavio diagram comparison tool allows you to easily compare two dia-
grams, as well as different revisions of one diagram. In the revision comparison,
details about all changes in a diagram over time are documented.
To open the comparison tool, select a diagram (or, in case you want to compare
two different diagrams and not revisions: two diagrams) and click Edit, then Com-
pare revisions/diagrams in the top drop-down menu of the explorer.

Version 15.14 221

6   Modeling notations

Click 'Edit' - 'Compare revisions/diagrams'.

The diagram comparison view appears. The drop-down menu allows you to
switch between diagram revisions:

The diagram comparison.

In case you would like to load a different diagram for comparison, click Choose
revisions/diagrams in the upper right corner of the tool, will be able to select both
diagrams to be compared in the dialog that opens:

Version 15.14 222

6   Modeling notations

Click 'Choose revisions/diagrams'.

Clicking the pen icon of a changed element gives you detailed information about
the adjusted element properties.
To narrow down the changes, you can deactivate one or multiple check boxes in
the panel below the canvas and exclude changes made to attributes or to specific
element types:

Deactivate a check box to exclude changes made to attributes or to specific ele-

ment types.
To learn more about the basic usage of the diagram and revision comparison
tool, please read the chapter Compare revisions. The following section explains
how to extract DMN-specific information from the comparison tool.

[Link] Comparing Data Inputs

To view the changes made to a Data Input element, select the element to see the
exact changes. In our example, a Data Input element of the type Enumeration was
replaced by a Decision element:

Clicking the pen icon displays the adjusted element properties in detail.

[Link] Comparing Decision Tables

To view the changes made to a Decision Table, select the element to access an
overview of the changes.
Then, click the compare link to compare the tables:

Version 15.14 223

6   Modeling notations

Click the 'compare' link...

In the tables, all changes are highlighted:

...and open the decision table comparison.

6.4 Value chains

With value chains, you can create high-level perspectives on your process land-
scape.
Each modeling element in a value chain represents a process or process group of
a specific business unit. You can link the elements in chronological order and
show the hierarchical relationships between processes and process groups.

Version 15.14 224

6   Modeling notations

For value chains, no official specification or set of syntax rules exist. To keep
value chains simple and easy to read, you can link the elements of a value chain
to other process models.
In this section, the diagram elements and editing functions that are only available
for this notation are described.
For general creation and editing options that are available for all notations, read
more in section Modeling.

6.4.1 Available diagram elements

[Link] Process

The process element represents a business process within your organization.

[Link] Collapsed process

The collapsed process element represents a business process that is linked to

another process diagram.
You can create links to the following diagram types:

Version 15.14 225

6   Modeling notations

o value chain diagrams

o BPMN diagrams
o event-driven process chains
o customer journey maps

To link the collapsed process element with a new or existing process, click the +
symbol in the element.

[Link] Group

Use this element to group processes that belong together.

[Link] Process link

Use this element to create a hierarchy of process elements and process group
elements.

[Link] Text note

Use the text note to add information to the diagram or a diagram element.

[Link] Association

Use the association to connect a text note to any diagram element.

6.4.2 Additional editing options

[Link] Change element orientation

To change the orientation of a process element or collapsed process element,

select it and click at the bottom. You have the following options:

o Left to right
o Right to left
o Top down
o Bottom up
o Rectangle

Version 15.14 226

6   Modeling notations

[Link] Rotate text

To rotate text in a diagram element, select the element and in the attribute panel,
choose a rotation value for the Text direction attribute.

[Link] Add Live Insights

You can add Live Insights shapes to display the result of a SAP Signavio Process
Intelligence investigation in a value chain. Read more in section Add Live
Insights.

6.5 ArchiMate

Access to this feature depends on your license.

In SAP Signavio Process Manager, you can model enterprise architecture dia-
grams in the ArchiMate notation, an open enterprise architecture modeling lan-
guage for describing, analyzing, and visualizing enterprise architectures within
and across business domains.

6.5.1 What is ArchiMate?

Access to this feature depends on your license.

ArchiMate is an open enterprise architecture modeling language for describing

and visualizing enterprise architectures within and across business domains.
Developing enterprise architecture descriptions enables you to base require-
ments and stakeholder concerns regarding your IT and business systems on
formal and uniform models.
ArchiMate is a lightweight but comprehensive language that enables you to
define the architecture of your business and IT systems using a service oriented
view model. It allows you to see your process architectures over time. This is help-
ful in many areas, such as transformation and migration planning.
The complete ArchiMate specification can be found here:
[Link]

Version 15.14 227

6   Modeling notations

An example of an ArchiMate enterprise architecture diagram

6.5.2 Creating and editing ArchiMate diagrams

Access to this feature depends on your license.

To create an ArchiMate diagram, open the Explorer and click New > ArchiMate
3.0. Your browser will open a new tab with the ArchiMate diagram canvas.
You can switch between different ArchiMate element sub sets using the drop-
down menu in the shape repository. You can drag and drop elements onto the
canvas. You can also use the interactive context menu to add more elements.

To save the diagram, click in the toolbar.

Version 15.14 228

6   Modeling notations

Find instructions on how to edit diagrams in the sections Add and connect ele-
ments and Move and change elements.

[Link] Linking ArchiMate to BPMN diagrams

You can easily link BPMN diagrams to ArchiMate's Business Process objects.
Once you have created the business process object in ArchiMate, select the ele-
ment and click the attribute Business process reference in the attribute panel.

Alternatively, you can click in the upper right corner of the Business Process
object.
Now, a dialog opens from which you can either create a new diagram or link an
existing one:

Link a BPMN diagram to an ArchiMate 'Business Process' object

[Link] Using the dictionary with the ArchiMate Editor

Within the ArchiMate Editor it's easy to make use of the dictionary, see The dic-
tionary for details.

Version 15.14 229

6   Modeling notations

The dictionary is modeling language-independent, meaning you can access

entries you created from BPMN diagrams in ArchiMate and vice versa.

6.6 Case Management Model and Notation (CMMN)

Access to this feature depends on your license.

The feature is only available on request. Please contact our SAP Sig-
navio service experts on the SAP ONE Support Launchpad.

CMMN is a notation that was created to allow more flexibility in the business pro-
cess landscape. SAP Signavio Process Manager supports CMMN version 1.1.

6.6.1 About CMMN

In a business process that has variation, it may be more efficient for a case
worker to determine the sequence in which to perform a set of tasks. For
example, a hotel guest may always go through the same process when checking
in and checking out, while the regularly tasks to clean the room may vary from
day to day.

A CMMN model for maintaining a hotel room

Version 15.14 230

6   Modeling notations

In general, many BPM scenarios include actions that may diverge from the com-
mon sequence flow, within a framework of set tasks. CMMN supports the flex-
ibility of these workflows. The notation is designed for scenarios when a case
worker can decide in what order tasks or sequence flows shall be performed. A
CMMN sequence flow may be triggered by an event (event listener), a state (mile-
stone) or with an action (task).

6.6.2 CMMN in SAP Signavio Process Manager

In SAP Signavio Process Manager, you can model the standard framework of the
corresponding process in a BPMN diagram and then link a BPMN sub-process to
a CMMN diagram that defines flexible sequences. You can also change a task in
a BPMN diagram to a sub-process that links to a CMMN model, to define a num-
ber of flexible actions more accurately.
You can seamlessly integrata CMMN into BPMN and DMN-diagrams, to com-
plement your existing process landscape. CMMN allows you to more accurately
model highly variable processes, such as working with patient files or managing
customer support processes.

6.6.3 Creating and editing CMMN diagrams

You can create CMMN diagrams in the explorer like any other diagram and edit
them in the Editor. This chapter explains the CMMN Elements and their alignment
options on the modeling canvas. See Modeling to learn about modeling diagrams
with the Editor.

[Link] Creating a CMMN diagram

To create a new CMMN diagram in the explorer, click New > Case Management
Diagram (CMMN 1.1). The Editor opens with a blank modeling canvas, ready for
you to edit the diagram.
Starting with a blank canvas in the Editor, you can add elements from the Shape
Repository.

[Link] Case plan items

You can use the following elements from the shape repository to model your
CMMN diagram.

Version 15.14 231

6   Modeling notations

Case plan model

The case plan model contains the case model. The case plan model encloses
the whole diagram. You can place the element first and resize it with the growing
diagram by dragging its lower right corner, or you can model the case and place
the case file element when you have finished adding and connecting the other dia-
gram elements.
To label the file, enter a name into the ‘naming slip’ at the top left of the element.
You can also attach an exit criterion to the case plan model to indicate that the
incoming sequence flow ends and completes the case.

A CMMN diagram, enclosed in a ‘case plan model’

Task

Tasks are the central elements in CMMN and BPMN notations. A task models a
single action that needs to be performed. In addition to the ordinary task, there
are five different types of task elements in CMMN:

1. Non-blocking human task

2. Blocking human task
3. Process task
4. Decision task
5. Case task

Version 15.14 232

6   Modeling notations

The model can depict each task as an ordinary task element or as a dis-
cretionary task, which is not obligatory and may be performed at the case
worker’s discretion.
o A non-blocking human task does not stop the sequence flow. In the case
model, the task does not take any time to perform. The task is complete at the
same moment it starts, and the sequence flow continues unstopped. All other
tasks are ‘blocking’ by default.

A ‘non-blocking human task’

o A blocking human task stops the sequence flow until it is completed.

A ‘blocking human task’

o A process task links to a BPMN diagram. To link a diagram, click the symbol in
the upper left corner of the element. To learn more, see Integrating CMMN dia-
grams .

Version 15.14 233

6   Modeling notations

A ‘process task’

o A decision task links to a DMN diagram. To link a diagram, click the symbol in
the upper left corner of the element. To learn more, see Integrating CMMN dia-
grams.

A ‘decision task’

o A case task links to another CMMN diagram. To link a diagram, click the sym-
bol in the upper left corner of the element. To learn more, see Integrating
CMMN diagrams.

A ‘case task’

Discretionary task

Every task type mentioned above also exists as discretionary task in the CMMN
1.1 definition. This means that the case worker may decide whether to perform
the task for that case.

Version 15.14 234

6   Modeling notations

In SAP Signavio Process Manager, you can create a discretionary task by cre-
ating an ordinary task of the necessary type, for example a non-blocking human
task and defining it as discretionary. Select the corresponding task and open the
Attributes panel on the right. Click the Discretionary attribute and activate the
checkbox.

When checking the box, the ordinary task transforms into a discretionary task.

Stage

Stages divide cases into subdivisions. You can group sequence flows, tasks
and/or (sub-)stages into a stage.
o You can also define a stage as a discretionary stage. Select the cor-
responding stage and open the Attributes panel on the right. Click the dis-
cretionary attribute and activate the checkbox.
o An expanded stage can contain sequence flows of tasks and/or (sub-)stages.
You can change a stage’s size by dragging its bottom-right corner.
o A collapsed stage is linked to another CMMN diagram. In contrast to tasks,
collapsed stages’ linked diagrams may also just contain single sequence flows
that do not define a whole case.

Version 15.14 235

6   Modeling notations

An expanded stage.

A collapsed stage is linked to the ‘Procure parts’ BPMN diagram.

Milestone

Milestones are sub-goals within the process model. They indicate that a certain
point or stage within a case has been reached or completed.

A milestone element

Sentries

You can attach the diamond shaped entry criterion and exit criterion symbol
(called ‘sentries’) to any task, milestone, stage or case file. There, they define
dependencies or the direction of the sequence flow. Sentries do not need to be
attached to other elements - they may also stand alone within a sequence flow.
o The entry criterion indicates that the incoming sequence flow(s) directly
attached to the sentry is/are necessary to be finished before the sequence flow
can continue.
o The exit criterion indicates when a plan item is complete and in what direction
(s) the sequence can continue. A sequence can continue when the following

Version 15.14 236

6   Modeling notations

action is available or a data object has been created. an exit criterion attached
to a case plan model indicates that the arriving sequence flow closes the case.

In this example, the claim analysis starts when a claim with more than €100,000
has arrived and the claim information document is available. The check finishes
when a claims evaluation report has been created:

The entry and exit criteria mark the beginning and the end of this stage

You can attach several sentries of one type to an element. Each sentry defines its
own entry or exit criteria for its element. Two or more sentries of one type
attached to one element define a logical ‘or’ relationship, while several sequence
flows attached to one sentry form a logical ‘and’ relationship.
If all workflows of one entry criterion have arrived at the element, the cor-
responding task can be performed. If several criteria have to be met, more than
one sequence flow can be attached to one sentry element. Similarly, you can
attach several exit criteria to an element. All sequence flows that exit one sentry
will be executed, unless a discretionary task follows.

Event listeners

A listener waits for something to happen, usually to then trigger a new sequence
flow.
o A event listener waits for an event to occur.
o A timer event listener waits for a certain amount of time to pass, or until a
defined time.

Version 15.14 237

6   Modeling notations

o A user event listener waits for user input, such as a completed form in a web
user interface.

The event listener, timer event listener and user event listener elements (left to right)

Case file item

A case file item represents a data file or document that contains information that
is relevant to the case, such a patient file. Use a connector to attach a case file
item to another element, to show that the other element’s execution uses its data.
It can also function as a trigger or a result and thus can stand at the beginning or
at the end of a sequence.

A case file item related to a task

[Link] Other elements

Connectors

A connectors between CMMN elements defines a relation. An entry criterion or

exit criterion defines the sequence flow direction or association.
o A simple connector links different (non-discretionary) elements togther.
o A discretionary association links a discretionary task to another CMMN ele-
ment.
o An annotation association links a text annotation to another CMMN element.

Version 15.14 238

6   Modeling notations

A connector, a discretionary association and an annotation association (top to bottom)

Plan fragment

A plan fragment contains a group of elements that exist outside the cases’
runtime. Plan fragments are discretionary, as indicated by the dotted lines. Also,
elements contained inside the plan fragment may contain sentries or be part of a
sequence flow, but a sentry or sequence flow may not be attached to a plan
fragment. A plan fragment essentially contains everything that has no other place
but needs to be in the case model.

A plan fragment containing three tasks

Planning table

A planning table signifies that discretionary tasks are present. A collapsed plan-
ning table indicates that discretionary tasks are not displayed, whereas an expan-
ded planning table indicates they are shown.
A (collapsed) planning table (default) signifies that collapsed (or hidden) dis-
cretionary tasks are present in the diagram. The hidden tasks are not modeled in
SAP Signavio Process Manager. Instead, the modeler attaches the planning
table to a stage, human task (only) or case plan model to signify that (hidden)
discretionary tasks are available.

Version 15.14 239

6   Modeling notations

To hint that modeled, visible discretionary tasks are available in the cor-
responding stage or plan fragment, add an expanded planning table to the ele-
ment by unchecking the box defining the collapsed attribute in the attribute
panel.

A (collapsed) planning table attached to a stage

Text Annotation

A text annotation contains additional textual information about the diagram, an

element or a group of elements.

[Link] CMMN Attributes

The following attributes can be set in the attribute panel by checking or uncheck-
ing the value of the corresponding element. When the value is enabled, an icon
will appear on the corresponding element or the elements appearance will
change, as depicted below.
o The discretionary attribute can be set for all kinds of tasks and stages. If the
attribute is activated, the task/stage may be performed if the case worker
decides it is necessary. Plan fragments are by default discretionary, this can-
not be changed as it is a pre-defined condition in CMMN.
o The autocomplete attribute can be set for stages and case plan models.
o The manual activation attribute can be set for all kinds of stages and tasks. If
the attribute is activated, the corresponding element has to be triggered manu-
ally.

Version 15.14 240

6   Modeling notations

o The repetition attribute can be set for milestones, stages and tasks. If the
attribute is activated, the case worker will evaluate if the task needs to be
repeated every time it is finished. If the result is ‘yes’, the task will be repeated.
o The required attribute can be set for milestones, stages and tasks. If the
attribute is activated, the corresponding action needs to be completed for the
sequence flow to continue or the containing element to be completed.

Unactivated and activated attributes in SAP Signavio Process Manager (left to right): dis-
cretionary, manual activation, repetition, required, autocomplete

6.6.4 Integrating CMMN diagrams

You can seamlessly integrate CMMN diagrams with DMN and BPMN diagrams in
your process landscape. You can, for example, embed a CMMN model in a
BPMN process by use of the BPMN sub-process as depicted below. This allows
you to model the static part of a process in BPMN and only depict the flexible part
in a CMMN model.

[Link] Linking to a diagram in a CMMN model

To add a diagram link to a CMMN model, first add the corresponding CMMN ele-
ment:
o Process Task - to link to a BPMN diagram
o Decision Task - to link to a DMN diagram
o Case Task - to link to a CMMN diagram

Click the symbol in the top left corner of the diagram element and select a dia-
gram of the corresponding type in the dialog that appears or choose to create a
new one. Click Link diagram to confirm.
If you chose to create a new diagram, the editor opens in a new tab, ready for you
to edit the new diagram. After modeling the new diagram, save both the new one
and the CMMN model the new diagram is now linked to.

Version 15.14 241

6   Modeling notations

[Link] Linking to a CMMN model in a BPMN model

To add to CMMN model link to a BPMN diagram, add a collapsed subprocess

and click the + -symbol at the bottom of the element. In the dialog that opens,
choose a CMMN model or create a new one by choosing Case Management Dia-
gram (CMMN 1.0) at the top under Create new diagram. Click Link diagram to
confirm.
If you chose to create a new diagram, the editor opens in a new tab, ready for you
to edit the new diagram. After modeling the new diagram, save both the new one
and the CMMN model the new diagram is now linked to.

Linking a new CMMN diagram to a BPMN Subprocess

You can also link CMMN diagrams in value chains the same way to create com-
plete process levels that also show in classic SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub. For more information on diagram hierarchy levels in your process
landscape, see Create subprocesses.

6.7 Further notations

SAP Signavio Process Manager supports a comprehensive set of modeling nota-
tions. This article lists the ones that are typically not relevant for the most com-
mon use cases.

Version 15.14 242

6   Modeling notations

6.7.1 Organizational charts

Organizational charts outline the internal structure of a company. Illustrating a
company this way shows the internal hierarchy and how each role relates to oth-
ers in the same organization.

6.7.2 Choreography diagrams

Choreography diagrams depict the details of complex collaboration between pro-
cess participants. This allows for an analysis of how information is exchanged
and how participants coordinate their actions. Choreography diagrams are part of
the BPMN standard, but are not widely used. We recommend staying with BPMN
process diagrams.
For more information on Choreography diagrams, see the OMG BPMN spe-
cification document.

6.7.3 Conversation diagrams

Conversation diagrams focus on communications between process participants.
They allow for the viewing of relationships at a glance. Conversation diagrams
are part of the BPMN standard, but are not widely used. We recommend sticking
to BPMN process diagrams when modeling process participant interactions.
For more information on Collaboration diagrams, see the OMG BPMN spe-
cification document.

6.7.4 Event-driven process chains

Event-driven process chains (EPC) are used to model business processes. EPCs
capture and visualize processes, but are - unlike BPMN - not executable. EPCs
generally focus on the lower levels of the process hierarchy (operational
sequences of processes). While EPCs were popular in some European countries
in the late 90s and early 2000s, they have now been eclipsed by BPMN, which is
more appealing to both business users and technical experts. We don't recom-
mend using EPCs.
For more information on EPCs, see this page.

Version 15.14 243

6   Modeling notations

6.7.5 UML use case diagrams

Use case diagrams are used to view what actions can be performed col-
laboratively between systems and users. They are a part of the UML (Unified
Modeling Language) standard.
For more information on UML use case diagrams, see this page.

6.7.6 UML class diagrams

Class diagrams show the properties, methods, and relationships of a system's
classes. They are commonly used to describe object-oriented programing code.
They are a part of the UML (Unified Modeling Language) standard. The SAP Sig-
navio Support Team can activate UML class diagrams for your workspace on
request.
For more information on UML class diagrams, see this page.

Version 15.14 244

7   Modeling with QuickModel

7 Modeling with QuickModel

This section describes all options for this function. Which options are
available depends on your license.

QuickModel makes capturing BPMN processes very fast. With QuickModel, you
enter information about a process into a table. A process diagram is dynamically
generated from this table.
QuickModel is only available for BPMN processes.
Use QuickModel in the following cases:
o to create BPMN diagrams even if you are unfamiliar with the modeling con-
ventions
o to speed up diagram creation for complex processes by modeling the main
path first
o to see at a glance if information is missing in an existing BPMN diagram and
to add it with low effort

With QuickModel you can do the following:

o model one sequence of tasks including the start and end events
o specify the organizational unit for the pool and assign participants to tasks
in lanes
o specify main attributes for tasks, for example IT systems and data artifacts,
as well as custom attributes

Additional BPMN elements, such as decisions and parallel sequences, can be

added later in the graphical editor.

7.1 QuickModel editor overview

In the QuickModel editor, you create BPMN 2.0 diagrams by entering process
information into a form and a table.

Version 15.14 245

7   Modeling with QuickModel

1 Toolbar The toolbar provides the following functions:

o Save: Save the diagram
o Undo: Remove last actions
o Redo: Redo undone actions

2 Process The main attributes of the diagram are displayed.

details
To display also the custom attributes, click Show more
process attributes.

3 Activities Tasks and some of their main attributes are displayed

as columns.

4 Diagram pre- A dynamic preview of the diagram is generated and

view
updates with each change.
To pin the preview area to the bottom of the browser

window, click .
You can zoom in and out the diagram with the slider on
the left.

Version 15.14 246

7   Modeling with QuickModel

7.1.1 Show or hide task attributes

To customize the activities list, click and select the columns you want to dis-
play. To set the selection as your default, use Save as default.

7.1.2 Main attributes for tasks

What? Name of the task

Who? Participant or role assigned to the task
For each role, a lane is created in the diagram.

How? Description of the task

IT Systems IT system used when executing the task

Input documents Required data artifact

Output documents Created or modified data artifact
Execution costs Costs required to execute the task
Costs Center Department to which the task costs are allocated
Execution Time Time required to execute the task

7.2 Create a diagram with QuickModel

To create a diagram with QuickModel, follow these steps:

1. To create a diagram with QuickModel, you have the following options:

o In the explorer of SAP Signavio Process Manager, click New > Quick-
Model.
o In SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub, click Create > Quick-
Model.
The QuickModel editor opens in a new tab.

2. Specify a name for the diagram and its main attributes:

o Organization: Name used for the pool
o Start: Start event of the process

Version 15.14 247

7   Modeling with QuickModel

o End: End event of the process

o Documentation: Description of the diagram

3. With Show more process attributes, you can also specify the diagram's
custom attributes.

4. Under Activities, add the tasks of your process and specify their attributes,
read more in section Add tasks and specify attributes.
The diagram preview updates dynamically.

5. Confirm with Save.

The diagram is saved.

You can close the diagram or open it in the editor. To open it, open the user
menu in the top right corner and click Graphical Editor.

Example

7.2.1 Add tasks and specify attributes

The order of the tasks in the table corresponds to the order of the tasks
in the diagram.

Follow these steps:

1. Double-click a cell in the What? column and type the task name.
Read more on the meaning of the columns in section Main attributes for
tasks.

Version 15.14 248

7   Modeling with QuickModel

2. Continue with one of the following options:

o To add another task, press Enter.
o To specify an attribute of your first task, press the tab key.

You can customize the columns in the activities list, read more in section Show or
hide task attributes.

7.2.2 Link dictionary entries

While you type the name of tasks and attributes, dictionary entries can be sug-
gested. To link a dictionary entry to the task or attribute, select the entry and
press Enter.

Linked dictionary entries are indicated with .

When a task is linked to a dictionary entry, you can rename the task. This has no
effect to the dictionary entry. Renaming doesn't work for attributes.
How to create dictionary entries is described in section Working with the dic-
tionary.

7.2.3 Reorder the tasks

You can't change the order of tasks in the activities list. You can only add a task
between two existing ones. To do so, select the lower task and click Add activity
above.

7.2.4 Remove a task

To remove a task, select it in the activities list and click Remove activity.

7.2.5 Next steps

o Add and connect elements
o Model a BPMN diagram
o Inviting stakeholders to comment on a diagram
o Publishing diagrams in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub

Version 15.14 249

7   Modeling with QuickModel

7.3 Edit a diagram with QuickModel

You can edit BPMN diagrams in the QuickModel editor even if they weren't cre-
ated with QuickModel.
The tabular activities view provides an overview of the tasks and attributes. This
way, you can quickly check diagrams for completeness and add missing tasks
and attributes.

7.3.1 Editing options

You can add, rename, and remove the following elements in the QuickModel
editor:
o diagram attributes
o tasks and collapsed subprocesses
o roles
o task attributes

To add a task, click the plus sign in the first column, double-click the first cell in
the new row, and specify the name.

Example

To edit any element, double-click the cell and apply your change. Confirm with
Enter or the tab key.
You can't change the order of tasks in the activities list. You can only add a task
between two existing ones. To do so, select the lower task and click Add activity
above.
To remove a name for a task or an attribute, select the cell and press the Del key.

Version 15.14 250

7   Modeling with QuickModel

To remove a task with its attributes, click Remove activity.

7.3.2 Collapsed suprocesses

Existing collapsed subprocesses are displayed and can be edited like tasks.

7.3.3 Editing limits for non-linear diagrams

In the QuickModel editor, editing of diagrams with decisions and multiple task
flows is limited as follows:
o Roles can't be edited. The Who? column is then marked with an asterisk.
o You can only rename tasks, you can't add or remove tasks.

7.3.4 Open a diagram in the QuickModel editor

To open a diagram in the QuickModel editor, you have the following options:
o Select the diagram in the explorer of SAP Signavio Process Manager and
click Edit > Edit QuickModel.
o Go to the diagram in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub and click

> Edit with QuickModel. Read more in section Actions.

7.3.5 Toggle between graphical and QuickModel editor

To switch from the graphical editor to the QuickModel editor and back, use the
options QuickModel and Graphical editor in the user menu.
Read more on the graphical editor in section Editor overview.

7.3.6 Link dictionary entries

While you type the name of tasks and attributes, dictionary entries can be sug-
gested. To link a dictionary entry to the task or attribute, select the entry and
press Enter.

Linked dictionary entries are indicated with .

Version 15.14 251

7   Modeling with QuickModel

When a task is linked to a dictionary entry, you can rename the task. This has no
effect to the dictionary entry. Renaming doesn't work for attributes.
How to create dictionary entries is described in section Working with the dic-
tionary.

7.3.7 Next steps

o Add and connect elements
o Model a BPMN diagram
o Inviting stakeholders to comment on a diagram
o Publishing diagrams in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub

Version 15.14 252

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

8 Simulating BPMN diagrams

With the BPMN simulation tool you can visualize process runs and analyze pro-
cesses based on step-by-step, configurable one-case, and multiple-case scen-
arios. This provides information about cost, cycle times, resources, and
bottlenecks in your processes.

Modeling users who only have read access to a diagram can use the
BPMN simulation tool, but can't manage the diagrams simulation scen-
arios.

Simulating BPMN diagrams can help to increase process awareness and can
answer specific questions like:
o How much does a process run cost on average?
o How are costs distributed over roles and tasks?
o How much would 10% more of case X instead of case Y affect the cost?
o Is the bottleneck in this process?
o How much of everyone’s time is consumed in this process?
o How would 20% more requests affect the cycle time?
o Would an another risk analyst speed up the cycle time?

The simulation tool only works with BPMN 2.0 diagrams.

8.1 Access the BPMN simulation tool

You can access the BPMN simulator in two ways:
o Open explorer, select a model and click Edit > Simulate BPMN Diagram.
o When you have opened a diagram in the editor, QuickModel or the diagram
comparison tool , expand the user menu and click Simulation.

Version 15.14 253

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

8.2 BPMN simulation tool functions

The simulation tool has the following functions:
o Step-by-step simulation: Step through the process element by element and
focus completely on the process flow.
o One-case simulation: Simulate one specific case to analyze costs and time
consumption for the case.

Access to this feature depends on your license.

o Multiple-case simulation: Simulate multiple process runs, taking into

account configured probabilities and analyzing quantitative data and bot-
tlenecks.

To create and manage simulation scenarios, read the Managing simulation scen-
arios section.
You can export the results of the multiple case simulation as an XLS spread-
sheet, read the Exporting simulation results section.
If you're unsure what specific metrics in the simulation results mean, read the
Simulation result metrics section.
In case you encounter issues with the BPMN simulation tool, read the
Troubleshooting issues with the BPMN simulation feature section.

8.3 Step-by-step simulation

With the step-by-step simulation function you can go through a process element
by element and focus completely on the process flow.
You can start the step-by-step simulation without any configuration.

Step-by-step simulation example

Version 15.14 254

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

8.3.1 Run the step-by-step simulation

Follow these steps:

1. Open the BPMN simulation tool. Read the Access the BPMN simulation
tool section.

2. Select the Step by Step function.

3. Click Play.

4. Click through the process flow step-by-step.

When passing an exclusive (XOR) gateway, determine the next sequence
flow, by clicking the required path.

5. Click Restart to restart the step-by-step simulation.

8.4 One-case simulation

Access to this feature depends on your license.

With the one-case simulation function you can simulate one specific case and
analyze costs and the time consumption for that case.
Before running the one-case simulation, configure a scenario on which the sim-
ulation is based on. Read the Managing simulation scenarios section.

Version 15.14 255

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

During the simulation, the simulation tiles display the overall costs, total cycle
time and resource consumption at the current position in the process (left
column) and of the complete previous run (right column). The bottleneck tile is
only relevant for multiple-case simulations.
o Cycle time: Refers to the amount of time between start and completion of a
process while
o Resource consumption is the overall time process participants committed
to process execution.

One-case simulation example

8.4.1 Rub the one-case simulation

Follow these steps:

1. Open the BPMN simulation tool. Read the Access the BPMN simulation
tool section.

2. Select the One case function.

3. Select a scenario and click Play.

The BPMN Simulator automatically goes through the process flow step-by-
step.

4. When passing an exclusive (XOR) gateway, select the next sequence flow.
If you don't select the next path, the simulation continues and selects a path
automatically (based on the probabilities given) when the timer symbol on
the top right of the element completes.

Version 15.14 256

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

Example

5. For detailed quantitative information on the current run, click More.

Example

8.5 Multiple-case simulation

Access to this feature depends on your license.

With the multiple-cases simulation function you can simulate multiple process
runs which take into account the configured quantitative figures and analyzing
quantitative data and bottlenecks.
Before running the multiple-case simulation, configure a scenario on which the
simulation is based on. Read the Managing simulation scenarios section.

Version 15.14 257

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

During the simulation, the simulation tiles display the overall costs, total cycle
time, resource consumption, and bottlenecks at the current position in the pro-
cess (left column) and of the complete previous run (right column).
o Cycle time: Refers to the amount of time between start and completion of a
process.
o Resource consumption is the overall time process participants committed
to process execution.

Multiple case simulation example:

8.5.1 Run the multiple-case simulation

Follow these steps:

1. Open the BPMN simulation tool. Read the Access the BPMN simulation
tool section.

2. Select the Multiple Cases function.

3. To configure the duration of the simulation, click Duration.

4. Enter the required number of days and click Save.

5. Select a scenario and click Play.

The BPMN Simulator analyzes the selected scenario and displays the res-
ults in the process diagram and on the simulation tiles.

6. For detailed quantitative information on the current run, click More.

Version 15.14 258

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

Example:

7. To simulate the another run through of all process instances in the pre-
viously calculated scenario, click Play.

8.5.2 Simulation outcomes

The following table shows simulation outcomes on a diagram after running the
multiple-case simulation:

Version 15.14 259

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

Simulation out-
Description
comes

Waiting
instances
Waiting instances display as blue dots placed above the ingoing
sequence flow.

Running
instances
Running instances display as blue dots within the border of a task.

Completed
instances
Completed instances display as a stack next to corresponding task.

8.5.3 Simulation result metrics

After running the multiple case simulation, result metrics are available for the cur-
rent run of the simulation.
The following metrics are available:
o Costs
o Total cycle time
o Resource consumption
o Bottlenecks

To access the metrics, click the required metrics simulation tile.

Version 15.14 260

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

[Link] Costs

The multiple case simulation calculates the average, minimum, maximum, and
total costs. The simulation determines all cost types based on the simulation res-
ult. To access the Costs metrics, click the Costs tile.

Example:

The following table discusses the descriptions for each table in the Costs tile:
Table Description
Costs The table displays the average, minimum, maximum and total costs for selected
process instance.
Costs The table displays the costs for every task of your process. It includes average,
per task minimum, maximum and total costs for each task.

Version 15.14 261

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

[Link] Total cycle time

The multiple case simulation calculates the average, minimum, maximum and
total cycle times. As for the costs, the simulation determines the cycle times
based on the simulation result. To access the Total cycle time metrics, click the
Total cycle time tile.

The total cycle time can exceed the simulation time span. This can hap-
pen for two reasons:
o Your resources can't handle cases fast enough and process
instances get delayed.
o The cases that occur in the last hours / minutes of your sim-
ulation time frame exceed the time frame before they are com-
pleted.

Example:

The following table discusses the descriptions for each table in the Total cycle
time tile:

Version 15.14 262

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

Table Description
Cycle Time The cycle time of a process instance is overall time needed for each process
instance to complete from start to finish. The table shows the selected pro-
cess instance's cycle times as well as the total sum of all run cycles.
Execution The execution times of activities executed within a process instance
times incl.
resources can be influenced by the availability of resources as well as working
and waiting schedules. The table shows the pure execution time taken for each
times activity including the time waiting for missing resources and the time
taken due to working schedules. Waiting times due to missing
resources are listed as bottlenecks and are available under Bot-
tlenecks tile.

Execution The table shows how long the execution time took for each activity
times incl.
waiting including the working schedules and excluding all available
times resources. The values are the pure execution times of tasks in addi-
tion to the time a task had to wait because the assigned resource
were unavailable.
For example, If a task with a duration of 60 minutes was assigned to
a user, then while executing the task the user takes a 30 minute
break, the execution time incl. waiting times would increase to 90
minutes instead of 60 minutes.

Pure exe- Within a process instance, several activities are executed. These values are
cution the actual execution times of tasks where someone is actively working on the
times tasks. The execution can occur sub-sequentially, delayed or in parallel. The
table displays how long the pure execution time took for each task.

[Link] Resource consumption

The resource consumption lists the consumed time and the workload for each pro-
cess resource.
The consumed time is the total time a resource spends on executing activities.
The workload is the percentage of the available time a resource is occupied with
executing activities.
To access the Resource consumption metrics, click the Resource consumption
tile.

Example:

Version 15.14 263

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

The following table discusses the description for the table in the Resource con-
sumption tile:
Table Description
Resource con- The execution of activities is performed by resources. The table shows
sumption the workload of all resources in your scenario. For each resource the con-
sumed time and workload information is displayed.

[Link] Bottlenecks

A bottleneck occurs when a resource's limited availability increases the waiting

times of cases. Waiting times describe how long cases are idle because no
resource is available to execute the current activity.
To access the Bottlenecks metrics, click the Bottlenecks tile.

Example:

The following table discusses the description for the table in the Bottlenecks tile:

Version 15.14 264

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

Table Description
Bottlenecks The execution of a process instance might be delayed due to a shortage of
resources. When an activity is ready for execution but all resources are
already allocated, the execution has to wait. The table shows all resources
and activities with the their total waiting time that were delayed. The total
waiting time is the overall time activities have to wait for a specific
resource, because the resource was occupied by another task.

8.6 Managing simulation scenarios

Access to this feature depends on your license.

Before running a one-case or multiple-case simulation, configure the data that

the simulation is based on by creating a scenario.
When you open a diagram in the simulator for the first time, it automatically con-
tains one scenario based on the diagram's Cost & Resource Analysis attribute.
Read the Configure the cost & resource analysis attribute section to configure
the Cost & Resource Analysis attribute.
With scenarios you can manage different data sets for simulating one process.
You can edit the scenario data by clicking on the corresponding tabs.
The scenario data is categorized by four different tabs:
o Costs: contains granular costs of activities.
o Duration: contains granular execution durations of activities.
o Frequency contains frequency and probabilities of start events, of junctions
after gateways, and of boundary events.
o Resources: define availabilities and costs of process participants.

8.6.1 Costs
In the costs tab you can configure the execution costs for each task in the scen-
ario.

Example:

Version 15.14 265

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

8.6.2 Duration
In the duration tab you can configure the execution time for each task in the scen-
ario.
You can configure the execution time in two ways:
o Entering a duration in the execution time column for a task.
o Defining task execution time as distribution functions. Distribution functions
simulates non-deterministic task execution times.

Example:

[Link] Configure duration with distribution functions

Follow these steps:

Version 15.14 266

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

1. Select the Duration tab and click .

The execution time dialog opens.

2. Enter a Proportion value.

Add a single or multiple proportions. All proportion values must equal to
100%

3. Select a Method. You can select the following methods:

o Constant: defines an execution time that has a specific probability.
With the help of several probability-constant mappings, you can create
a discrete probability distribution.
o Uniform distribution: defines an execution time which is equally dis-
tributed within a range of two values.
o Normal distribution: defines an execution time which concentrates
around a certain value.

We recommend a Normal distribution in case the task exe-

cution times are likely concentrated around a certain value.

4. Enter an Execution time value in hh:mm:ssand click Accept.

5. Click Save Scenario.

8.6.3 Frequency
In the frequency section you can configure the start frequency of the start event
and the execution probability of gateways and events in your scenario.

Example:

Version 15.14 267

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

[Link] Configure the start event frequency

Follow these steps:

1. Select the Frequency tab.

2. On the start event, click .

3. Configure the Day, From, To and Frequency fields.

4. Add multiple frequencies for the start event if required by clicking Add new
row.

5. Click then Save Scenario.

[Link] Configure the execution probability of gateways and events

Follow these steps:

1. Select Frequency tab.

2. Expand the gateway or event and enter the required probability values.
All probability values must equal to 100%.

3. Click Save Scenario.

8.6.4 Resources
In the resources tab you can define a roles work schedule and cost per hour.

Example:

Version 15.14 268

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

[Link] Configure work schedules for a role

Follow these steps:

1. Select the Resources tab.

2. In the Work schedules column, click .

The edit schedules page open.

3. Specify the Numbers of resources value.

4. In the Work schedules column, click .

5. Configure the Day, From, and To values.

The Hours value updates according to your configuration.

6. Click then Save Scenario.

[Link] Configure the costs per hour for a role

Follow these steps:

1. Select the Resources tab.

2. In the Costs / hour column, enter a value.

3. Click Save Scenario.

You can create an additional scenario by clicking . Choose between creating a

scenario based on the Cost & Resource Analysis attributes (Create from tem-
plate: None) or using the data of another scenario as a starting point.

Version 15.14 269

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

When starting a new simulation, select the required scenario from the drop-down
menu.

8.6.5 Configure the cost & resource analysis attribute

To configure the Cost & Resource Analysis attribute, follow these steps:

1. Open a diagram in the editor.

2. Select an element on the canvas.

3. Expand the Attributes|Views section.

4. Edit the values in the Cost & Resource Analysis section.

5. Repeat the above steps for all elements in your diagram.

6. Click Save.

8.7 Exporting simulation results

You can export the results of a Multiple-case simulation as XLS (Microsoft
Excel) files. To export the results, click the Excel Export button below the sim-
ulation tiles. An Excel (XLS) file is generated. The file is saved to your browser's
download folder.

The following tabs are available in the Excel file:

o Overview
o Costs
o Total cost charts
o Total time charts
o Resource consumption
o Bottlenecks
o Bottleneck charts

Version 15.14 270

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

If more than one simulation scenario was executed, the Excel file includes
two extra tabs, one for each scenario run in the simulation.

If you are using Microsoft Excel 2010, make sure to deactivate the Pro-
tected View, by clicking Enable Editing to make sure the spreadsheet
is displayed correctly.

If there are problems with displaying the charts in the report, check if
you have opened the report with a program that allows the editing
Excel diagrams. If this is not the case, we recommend to open the
report with one of the more recent versions of Microsoft Excel.

8.7.1 Overview
The Overview tab contains general information about the simulation runs.

Version 15.14 271

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

8.7.2 Costs
The Costs tab displays the minimum, maximum and average costs of the sim-
ulation runs and task executions.

Values that are especially high are highlighted according to the layout displayed
below the calculation table in the sheet.

The same layout applies to the other calculation tables as well.

8.7.3 Total costs charts

The Total cost charts tab visualizes the cost relation of executed tasks in the
latest runs. If multiple runs were executed the latest and previous runs of total
costs data display in the tab.

Version 15.14 272

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

8.7.4 Total cycle time

The Total cycle time of a process instance measures the time between process
start and process completion. The tab shows process instance cycle times and
activity execution times:

Version 15.14 273

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

8.7.5 Total time charts

The Total time charts tab visualizes the data of the Total cycle time tab. If mul-
tiple runs were executed the latest and previous runs of the total cycle time data
display in the tab.

8.7.6 Resource consumption

The Resource consumption tab contains information about all Resources
(lanes) which where occupied with a task and displays their workloads in relation
to reach other:

Version 15.14 274

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

8.7.7 Resource consumption charts

The Resource consumption charts tab visualizes the data of the Resource con-
sumption tab. If multiple runs were executed the latest and previous runs of the
resource consumption data display in the tab.

Version 15.14 275

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

8.7.8 Bottlenecks
The Bottlenecks tab contains information about process bottlenecks:

8.7.9 Bottlenecks charts

The Bottlenecks charts tab visualizes the data in the Bottlenecks tab:

8.7.10 Scenario tabs

The last two tabs contain information about each scenario's properties:

Version 15.14 276

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

8.8 Troubleshooting issues with the BPMN simulation

feature
In order for a simulation to execute, the below conditions are required:
o The syntax of the diagram must follow BPMN 2.0 syntax rules. The process
flow mustn't be interrupted.

o To check if a diagram follows BPMN 2.0 syntax rules, use the Check syntax
option in the Editor.

Version 15.14 277

8   Simulating BPMN diagrams

o Elements that affect the process flow, but cannot be clearly specified regard-
ing their impact on the process flow, mustn’t be used. Example elements are
the inclusive gateways, non-interrupting boundary events, conditional
sequence flows, message flow and subprocess.

Version 15.14 278

9   Search

9 Search
The standard search is a full text search. With the advanced search option, you
can filter results. You can save your searches as smart folders for quick access.

9.1 Full text search

o To search, enter the search terms into the search box and press Enter.

The following content is considered in the standard search:

o diagram titles
o attributes of diagrams and elements
o element labels
o comments
o revision information
o content of uploaded files
o dictionary entry links

The following operators are available:

Version 15.14 279

9   Search

Search Description
operators

Wildcard The wildcard character (*) is a placeholder for one or more char-
(*) acters.
For example, the search term lab*r returns results for both British
English (labour) and American English (labor).

AND Connect search terms with AND to only get results that contain all
terms. Search terms are connected with AND by default.

Phrases Put a phrase in quotation marks ("...") to get an exact match.

For example, "Process Manager" lists all results that contain the
complete phrase Process Manager, and not items that only include
the term Manager.
Use quotation marks when you search for hyphenated terms, for
example "e-learning".
This search does not include partial matches, the phrase needs to
consist of complete words.

o It is possible to combine search operators in one query.

o If you expect that certain keywords are part of many possible res-
ults, leave them out of the search. Only search for the dis-
tinguishing keywords.

9.2 Advanced Search

With the advanced search, you can limit the search to a specific attribute. Attrib-
utes on diagram and element level can be selected.
To execute an advanced search, follow these steps:

Version 15.14 280

9   Search

1. Click the Advanced Search icon next to the search box.

2. Select the attribute from the drop-down list. When Search within any field
is selected, this is equivalent to the standard search.

3. Enter the search terms and click Search. The search results are displayed.

4. You can add additional search criteria to filter by diagram properties and val-
ues. The following filter criteria can be used:
o Element name
o Last modified
o Last author
o Revision comment
o Publishing date
o Publishing state
o Commenting state
o SAP Signavio ID
o Type (diagram, file, folder, or comment)

5. To filter the search results, click Add & Search.

6. To remove a filter, click .

9.3 Smart Folders

With smart folders, you can save your advanced searches.
To save a search query as a smart folder, follow these steps:

1. Execute an advanced search as described above.

2. Click . The Create Smart Folder dialog opens.

3. Label the smart folder. You can also add a description.

Version 15.14 281

9   Search

4. Confirm with Save.

The smart folder is created in the Smart Folders directory in the nav-
igation panel of the explorer.

The content of a smart folder changes dynamically according to the

content of your workspace.

9.3.1 Manage smart folders

When you select a smart folder and click Edit, the following actions are avail-
able:
o Move
o Delete
o Change name/description

9.4 Search results

The results are categorized by location:
o Found in title or directly in diagram
o Found in diagram elements
o Found in comments

You can collapse or extend the categories.

If a search returns many hits, they are displayed over several pages. To navigate
the result pages, use the arrow buttons next to the page number.

By default, search results are displayed in icon view. For list view, click in the

top right corner. To return to icon view, click .

For dictionary entries, the category shown is Linked diagrams of dictionary item.
To search for dictionary entries, use the search function in the dictionary. See sec-
tion Full-text search for details.

Version 15.14 282

9   Search

To access the folder in which an item is located, select the item and click Go to
parent.

9.5 Return to the default explorer view

To leave the search results view, select any folder in the directory.

Version 15.14 283

10   Collaboration

10 Collaboration
In SAP Signavio Process Manager, there are several ways to enable col-
laborators to contribute to your business process and business decision land-
scape.
Fellow modelers in your workspace can by default edit and comment on all dia-
grams in the workspace's Shared documents folder. You can also invite model-
ers to edit to call attention to a diagram. They can also preview diagrams in SAP
Signavio Process Collaboration Hub which also provides a reader-friendly dia-
gram presentation, with its full screen view and detailed documentation.
Stakeholders who do not have access to your workspace can be invited to com-
ment on diagrams. The modeler needs to send an invitation from the Explorer's
Share menu to grant access. For external persons, the link acts as a key to SAP
Signavio Process Collaboration Hub where unregistered stakeholders can see
and comment on diagrams. The stakeholders click a link they receive by email
that allows them to see and comment on diagrams.
Exporting diagrams and sharing, saving or printing them is another collaborative
option for modelers. This way, diagrams can be transferred between SAP Sig-
navio workspaces (SGX) and SAP Signavio and other modeling softwares
(BPMN 2.0 conform XML), saved locally, and sent by email (PDF, SVG or PNG)
or printed out.
Embedding diagrams in websites or Microsoft SharePoint-based systems is
another way of collaborating for more advanced users.

10.1 Inviting modelers to edit a diagram

After you created or updated a diagram you might want to notify your fellow
modelers and invite them to further refine the diagram. Or if you noticed that a dia-
gram has not been updated for a long time, you might want to invite your col-
leagues to check its actuality and have it updated if necessary.

To be able to edit a diagram directly in the Editor, users must be

registered in your workspace. Persons who are not registered can use
the commenting feature in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub to

Version 15.14 284

10   Collaboration

contribute indirectly (see Inviting stakeholders to comment on a dia-

gram).

With the feature Invite modeler to edit you can send registered workspace
users an invitation to edit diagrams. Unless configured otherwise, all modelers in
your workspace can edit diagrams that are stored in the Shared documents
folder. If you try to open a diagram while it is being edited by a colleague in the
Editor, a warning will be displayed. You can still edit the diagram, but if you save,
you will override the changes made by your colleague(s).

Invite colleagues to edit a diagram.

To send an invitation email, proceed as follows:

1. First select a diagram.

2. Click Share , then Invite modeler to edit in the menu bar. The dialog
Invite modeler to edit opens.

Version 15.14 285

10   Collaboration

3. Click the arrow to get to the next page.

4. All registered users with editing rights are displayed on the left. Select the
people you want to invite.
5. Customize the invitation message (optional).
6. Click Send and an invitation email will be sent to all selected users.

You cannot grant additional access rights to people using this dialog. It
only sends notifications. If you want to add more people to your work-
space, please ask your system administrator. To discuss your diagram
(s) with colleagues, you can also invite them to comment .

10.2 Inviting stakeholders to comment on a diagram

One of the most powerful features in collaborative process design is inviting pro-
cess stakeholders to review and comment on diagrams. This functionality allows
you to get a large number of contributors involved. They do not need to be mod-
eling experts to work with you in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.

Version 15.14 286

10   Collaboration

This way, you can invite people who have a deep understanding of the business
process and can contribute to proper process documentation and process innov-
ation without having to be familiar with SAP Signavio software.
A special feature of the commenting function is that the commentators do not
need to be registered users in your workspace. You can invite anybody via email
to comment on your diagrams.

This section describes how you can invite colleagues who are not
users of SAP Signavio Process Manager to comment on diagrams. To
take advantage of SAP Signavio Process Manager in the long term,
however we recommend that you use reading and commenting access
rights in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.

10.2.1 Inviting collaborators in the editor to comment

This feature is available with the Hub and Suite license.

When you invite collaborators in the editor, the invited collaborator can view the
unpublished diagram in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub preview and
add comments.
If the collaborator has an account with a modeling license, the collaborator can
also edit the diagram in the editor and QuickModel.
Invited collaborators with no account have to create an account first.
To invite stakeholders in the editor, follow these steps:

1. Open the diagram you want to share.

2. In the editor header, click Share.

The dialog Share for feedback opens.

3. Enter the email addresses of the stakeholders you want to invite. Optionally,
add a note to your invitation.

4. Click Send.
An email invitation with a diagram link is sent.

Version 15.14 287

10   Collaboration

[Link] Remove collaborators

You can remove collaborators from the diagram. After removing access, col-
laborators can no longer view the diagram and add comments.

1. Open the diagram you want to share.

2. In the editor header, click Share.

The dialog Share for feedback opens.

3. Click the email address of the collaborator you want to remove and click
.

4. Click Done.

10.2.2 Inviting new stakeholders via email

To send an invitation email, follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, select the diagram or the diagrams you want to share.

2. Click Share > Invite anyone for feedback.

The dialog for sending the invitation opens.

3. To change your diagram selection or to add additional diagrams, click

Choose diagrams.

4. Confirm your selection with Next.

5. Under Email addresses, paste the email addresses.

Multiple entries are separated by commas, semicolons, or line breaks.

6. To receive a copy of the invitation email, activate Send a copy to me.

7. If you have selected only one diagram, you can create a simplified view of
the diagram. To do so, activate Selection of a simplified view.
If you have selected multiple diagrams, this option is not available.
Read more in section Simplified views on diagrams.

8. Under Message, you can customize the invitation message.

9. Click Send.

Version 15.14 288

10   Collaboration

Invitation emails with a web link are sent. The link opens the diagrams in
SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub. Stakeholders can view and com-
ment on the diagrams.

10.2.3 Hint on links in invitation emails

If single sign-on is enabled but not enforced in your workspace, invitations emails
contain 2 web links:
o Access using single sign-on (requires a company email account)

The following applies:

o Users who are logged in to their company system are directly directed
to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.
o Logged out users need to enter their company credentials to log in.
o New users need to register with their company email and get a SAP
Signavio account.
o Access as a guest (you will be asked to register with your name and
email address)
The following applies:
o Users with a guest account log in with their guest account credentials.
o New users need to register.

Single sign-on is configured by your workspace administrator, read more in sec-

tion Single sign-on using SAML.

10.2.4 Simplified views on diagrams

When inviting a colleague to comment on a diagram, it is possible to create sim-
plified views.
Simplified views can ease reading a diagram, especially if the colleague you
invited is not a modeling expert. You can also hide irrelevant information to make
viewing diagrams easier.

Version 15.14 289

10   Collaboration

[Link] Creating while inviting

As described above, simplified views can be created while inviting colleagues to

comment on a diagram.
Follow these steps:

1. Click Selection of a simplified view or check the box in front of it.

The Selection of a simplified view dialog opens.

2. In the Create simplified view tab, you can simplify the diagram view by hid-
ing element types.
As soon as an element type gets chosen or dismissed, the preview
refreshes.

3. If you have created your desired view, click on OK to return to the Invite any-
one for feedbackdialog.

4. Follow the steps to invite to comment as described above.

[Link] Creating a stakeholder-specific view

You can create simplified diagram views in the editor before you invite stake-
holders to comment.

Version 15.14 290

10   Collaboration

1. Open the diagram in the editor.

2. In the attribute panel, click Create new view under Views.

The dialog View configuration opens.

3. If no views have been created for this diagram, you can configure a sim-
plified view by selecting which element types you'd like to be hidden.
As soon as an element type gets chosen or dismissed, the preview
refreshes.

4. Specify a name for the simplified view and if you want, a description.

5. If there are already existing simplified views for this diagram, choose one
from the drop-down menu.

6. Click OK.

10.2.5 Withdrawing commenting rights

Use the Manage access rights dialog to view the collaborators that were invited
to comment on a diagram.

1. Click Share then Manage feedback invitations in the menu bar.

The Manage feedback invitations dialog opens.

Version 15.14 291

10   Collaboration

All email addresses that have received an email invitation are listed.

2. If you want to remove commenting rights for a particular person, click

Remove next to the corresponding email address.
A confirmation dialog opens.

3. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.

4. If you are an administrator, you can also manage invitations to comment in

the Security center. To do so, click Setup > Manage access rights in the
menu bar.
The settings dialog opens.

5. Click the Access Rights tab.

You find the invitations under Additional access rights.

6. Select a diagram on the left and click Remove next to the email address
whose access rights you want to revoke.

Read more on security settings in section Manage users and access rights.

Version 15.14 292

10   Collaboration

10.3 Comments
Comments are displayed in the comment panel. To open the comment panel,

click the comments icon . You can also open the comment panel directly

from your notifications when you receive a notification about new comments.

10.3.1 View comments

All comments on a diagram are visible in the comment panel by default.
Comments on model elements are labeled with the element name.
You can still access comments on elements that were deleted during the editing
process. These comments become process level comments and they are labeled
to indicate that they refer to a deleted element.

10.3.2 Filter comments by status

To filter by comment status, click Status and select a status from the list.
To clear status filters, select All from the list.

10.3.3 Filter comments by element

To display comments for one element only, you have the following options:
o Click Element and select an element from the list.
o Click an element label.

To clear an element filter, you have the following options:

o
Click clear next to the element filter.
o Click Back to all comments.

When you are viewing only comments for an element, new comments
are added as comments on this element. Clear the element filter to
add a comment on the diagram.

Version 15.14 293

10   Collaboration

10.3.4 Add comments to a diagram

1. Open a diagram.

2. Click . The comment panel opens.

3. Enter your comment and click Comment. The comment is posted and col-
laborators are notified.

10.3.5 Add comments to an element

1. Open a diagram.
2. Click an element. The comment panel for the element opens.
3. Click Add comment.
4. Enter your comment and click Comment. The comment is posted and is
labeled with the element name. Collaborators are notified.

10.3.6 Reply to comments

1. Open a diagram.

2. Click . The comment panel opens.

3. In the comment, click Reply.
4. Enter your comment and click Comment. The comment is posted in a com-
ment thread under the original comment.

Additional replies can be added to the comment thread.

10.3.7 Mention others in comments

When you want to address a comment directly to someone, you can mention this
person in a comment. Mention someone by typing an @ followed by their name
while you enter a comment. When you mention someone in a comment, they are
notified.

Version 15.14 294

10   Collaboration

10.3.8 Edit comments

1. Click in the comment and select Edit.

2. Change your comment.
3. Click Save. Edited comments are marked as edited.

10.3.9 Reject comments

Reject comments that don't trigger any changes to the diagram, for example
because other changes make it obsolete.
When you reject a comment, it is hidden in the default comment view in SAP Sig-
navio Process Collaboration Hub. SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub
users can still view rejected comments when they select Rejected when filtering
comments by status.

To reject a comment, click in the comment and select Reject. The comment is
labeled Rejected and hidden in the default comment view.

To display a rejected comment again, click and select Show.

10.3.10 Resolve comments

When you resolve a comment, it signifies to your collaborators that the comment
has been taken care of.
To resolve a comment, click Resolve. Resolved comments are labeled
Resolved. Users who posted a comment get notified when their comment is
resolved.
To re-open a comment, click Re-open. The Resolved label is removed. Users
who posted a comment get notified when their comment is reopened.

Your changes are saved immediately. The number of updated com-

ments is shown.
To make changes to the comment status visible to collaborators, you
need to save the diagram.
The status changes only for the first comment in a commenting thread.

Version 15.14 295

10   Collaboration

10.3.11 Delete comments

Deleting comments can't be undone.

1. Click in the comment and select Delete.

2. Confirm the deletion in the dialog.

10.3.12 Comment notifications

You get notified for the following actions:
o Someone adds a comment to one of your diagrams
o Someone resolves one of your comments
o Someone reopens one of your comments
o Someone mentions you in a comment
o Someone replies to one of your comments

Modelers get notified for all revisions, SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub users only get notified about actions on the published
revision.

10.4 Granting read-only access to diagrams

SAP Signavio allows you to share diagrams with collaborators in read-only mode.
For read only access without the commenting option, create a link to send to your
colleagues via the embedding function.
The system allows you to generate a link to a PNG-picture representation of your
diagram.

Version 15.14 296

10   Collaboration

Open the embedding menu.

1. Click Share, then Embed diagram in the menu bar.

2. If the embedding function for this diagram has been activated, you can copy
the link in the Simple image tab using the key combination CTRL+C.
3. Now you can paste this link in an email and send it to the desired recipient.

When opening the diagram via this link, the most recent version of it will be dis-
played.

To revoke link access and at the same time stop all sharing and
embedding of a diagram, click Stop sharing the diagram for read-
only access in the Embed diagram window.

10.5 Publishing diagrams in SAP Signavio Process

Collaboration Hub
Every modeler who has the corresponding rights to publish a diagram can publish
it in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub. You can also define and use
approval workflows to publish diagrams. Read about this in the section Working
with approval workflows .

Version 15.14 297

10   Collaboration

Apart from diagrams, pictures and files stored in your SAP Signavio file storage
can be made available in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub too. Pub-
lishing those files is similar to publishing diagrams. Depending on your con-
figuration settings, you might need to explicitly publish dictionary entries. Read
more about publishing dictionary entries in the section Publishing dictionary
entries.

Administrators can grant users the right to publish, edit or delete dia-
grams in the Shared documents folder. Please contact an admin-
istrator and ask them for the corresponding rights if you cannot access
these options. You can learn how to grant access rights in the section
Set access rights for folders and diagrams.

To publish a diagram, proceed as follows:

1. In the menu bar, click Share then Publish to SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub. The corresponding dialog box opens.
2. Select the diagrams you want to publish.
3. To publish an older revision of the diagram or to revert changes to a pub-
lished diagram, use the activity feed of the diagram. Select a diagram and
click Expand in the lower left corner of the Explorer. Alternatively, you can
hit the space bar on your keyboard.

Version 15.14 298

10   Collaboration

4. In case the feed tab is not opened by default, click the Feed button.

5. The activity feed will now be displayed. Select the revision you want to pub-
lish.

6. Now, click Publish revision . A confirmation dialog box opens.

7. Proceed by clicking Yes . Now, your diagram is published to SAP Signavio

Process Collaboration Hub.

Version 15.14 299

10   Collaboration

Just one revision of a diagram can be published. To publish mul-

tiple revisions, save a copy of the diagram and then publish the
corresponding revision.

10.5.1 Revoke a published diagram

To revoke a published diagram, proceed as follows:

1. Select one diagram or several diagrams at once, which you want to unpub-
lish.
2. Click in the menu bar Share and then Unpublish from SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Collaboration Hub . The selected diagrams are now unpublished.

To revoke a single published diagram, you can also use its activity feed.

1. Select a diagram and click Expand in the lower left corner of the Explorer.
Alternatively, you can hit the space bar on your keyboard.

Version 15.14 300

10   Collaboration

2. In case the feed tab is not opened by default, click the Feed button.

3. Subsequently, select the publish event in the activity feed.

4. Click Unpublish :

Now, the diagram will no longer be available in SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub.

Version 15.14 301

10   Collaboration

10.5.2 Opening a diagram's published revision

It is often useful to know what the published version of a particular diagram looks
like in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub. To find this out, select the dia-
gram in the Explorer and click Share - Open published version.

10.6 Inviting users to access a diagram in SAP

Signavio Process Collaboration Hub
In many situations, you may want to point one or several readers to a specific dia-
gram.
For this purpose, you can send emails containing the link to a diagram in SAP Sig-
navio Process Collaboration Hub and additional information via the explorer
invite.
To invite users to access published diagrams, proceed as follows:

1. Select a published diagram.

2. Click Share, then Invite to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub in
the menu bar.
3. Insert the email addresses of the recipients.
4. Edit the message text (optional).
5. You can also send a copy of the invitation email to yourself.
6. Click Send. The invitation message is sent to the selected email addresses.

You can also use this feature to encourage somebody to have a look at
SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub in general. Open the Invite
to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub dialog without selecting
a diagram. The link in the email will lead to the entry point of SAP Sig-
navio Process Collaboration Hub.

10.7 Organizing diagrams

SAP Signavio offers a variety of functionalities for organizing diagrams.
Find out more about

Version 15.14 302

10   Collaboration

o Working with folders and diagrams

o Search
o Viewing diagram details
o Migrating diagrams to BPMN 2.0
o Work with modeling conventions
o Display attribute overlays

The diagram preview provides information about a diagram and its revisions in
the Explorer.

10.8 The notification and activity feed

Once you have created diagrams and then updated or changed them at least
once, you have the option to see what was changed by whom at what time in the
activity panel.
When you select folders or diagrams, the explorer displays the activity panel at
the bottom of the screen:

Version 15.14 303

10   Collaboration

The activity panel provides diagram details.

10.8.1 Notification configuration

Notifications need to be enabled by your workspace administrator.

In the activity panel, you can set how frequently you receive email updates about
specific diagram(s) or folder(s). If you subscribe to a folder, you will receive
updates regarding all the diagrams and sub-folders contained within. You can
daily, weekly or monthly notifications. Alternately, you can unsubscribe from noti-
fications entirely.

Manage email notifications about updates of the selected diagram or folder.

Your notifications are sent in a single email.

10.8.2 Additional functions

The activity panel provides a preview of the diagram/folder as well as detailed
information and management options regarding its version history.
To access this preview, proceed as follows:

Version 15.14 304

10   Collaboration

1. Select a diagram/folder.

2. Click Expand in the lower left corner of the Explorer. Alternately, you can
use the space bar on your keyboard:

3. The panel expands, providing a visual overview of the diagram:

4. To view the activity feed and manage the change and version history of the
diagram, click the Feed button. The activity feed will now be displayed.

Version 15.14 305

10   Collaboration

5. Hovering over the timeline provides you with specific time spans.

6. To gain a visual overview over an activity, click the Activity description.

The visualization will highlight the elements that have been changed.

Version 15.14 306

10   Collaboration

7. The overview also provides links to publish or comment the revision and to
switch to the diagram comparison (see section Compare revisions).

8. If the selected revision is not the latest revision of the diagram, it is also pos-
sible to restore the revision (see section Restore older revisions of a dia-
gram):

9. To get a more detailed view on an activity set, it can be opened to show all
its single activities by clicking the dots on the grey stripe at the right side.
Each activity will be displayed separately:

Version 15.14 307

10   Collaboration

10. To hide the panel again, hit the space bar or click Collapse.

10.9 Translating diagrams

Access to this feature depends on your license.

You can model your diagrams in multiple languages. This allows viewers and
modelers who do not understand your standard diagram language to collaborate
with you.
Multilingualism is a feature which is available in the Editor, SAP Signavio Process
Collaboration Hub and in the Dictionary. You need to configure languages in the
Explorer (see section Configure language settings for all users) to use this fea-
ture.
The following explains how to translate a diagram and the modeling elements.
Note that you need to have already defined your desired language in the
Explorer.

10.9.1 Changing the language

When creating a new diagram, it will be displayed in the default language of the
workspace. To change the default language, read the section Default language
settings.
The current language of a diagram can be switched in the Editor via the little flag
symbol on the right side of the upper toolbar:

Version 15.14 308

10   Collaboration

The language is switched from English to German.

If the flag symbol is not visible for you, it is possible that there are no
languages defined for your workspace. As a workspace administrator,
you can define a set of available languages in the Explorer's con-
figuration dialog, which is described in the section Default language
settings.

Select one of the available languages. The diagram will adapt to the language
immediately and may look like the following:

The highlighted elements have not been translated into English, yet.
Diagram elements that were already translated are displayed will be displayed
normally. In our example, the task 'Problem lösen' was already translated. If the
label was formatted, this formatting will be kept.
Diagram elements that are not yet translated are highlighted in red--in this
example, the incoming message event 'Lieferung der Ware' is only available in
German (thus, the "de" in brackets).

Version 15.14 309

10   Collaboration

The following chapter describes how diagram elements can be translated.

10.9.2 Translating diagrams

Translating diagrams means defining a translation for each diagram element in
each required language, which can include all element labels and documentation.
This chapter describes how diagrams can be translated into other languages.
This is especially useful when multiple people are involved on the translation,
each translated into one language. Later in this chapter, you will learn how to
translate a diagram in different languages at the same time.
The following example shows a translation from English to German:

1. First, select which language you want to translate. Proceed as explained

above. Elements that were not yet translated are highlighted in red.
2. Double-click an element to define its label.

3. Click somewhere on the canvas to accept the new label. The translation will
now be stored in the attribute panel on the right.

Version 15.14 310

10   Collaboration

4. In the attribute panel, you can also add documentation in the current lan-
guage.

Translate the remaining diagram elements in the same way. After saving the dia-
gram, it will be accessible in all languages of the workspace.

10.9.3 Translating diagrams into multiple languages at the same

time
Sometimes, a modeler might want to define a diagram in multiple languages
while modeling the diagram. In this case, it is recommended to have the required
languages set available while modeling.

1. Add languages to the diagram via the language tool of the Editor toolbar.

Version 15.14 311

10   Collaboration

2. Select all the languages you want to work with in your diagram. They will
appear in the attribute panel on the right hand side.

3. Now you translate diagram elements into the desired languages sim-
ultaneously in the attribute panel by simply entering the translations into the
corresponding columns and lines.
4. To view the result in the other languages, switch the display language on
the flag icon in the toolbar.

10.9.4 Migrating diagrams to a different language

You can migrate the contents of a digram from one language to another. This is
especially helpful when switching between dialects of a specific language (for
example, British English to American/Canadian English). or if the diagram was
created in the wrong language and you want to correct this.

When opening a diagram, the system will ask you for the diagram lan-
guage if no default is defined.

To migrate a diagram into another language, proceed as follows:

Version 15.14 312

10   Collaboration

1. Click the flag symbol , then Migrate diagram to a different language in the
top toolbar on the right. The corresponding dialog box opens.

2. Now choose the source and the target language for the migration. You can
choose between all languages that are defined for the workspace.

3. Optionally, you can delete information in the source language. Activate the
checkbox Delete original texts to do so.
4. Click OK. A confirmation prompt is displayed.

5. Click Yes to confirm.

In this example a diagram was created without language definitions. The content
was defined in German. As the workspaces' default language is English, the dia-

Version 15.14 313

10   Collaboration

gram was configured to be in English when the language tools were activated.
The content is now supposed to be migrated from German to English and the Ger-
man contents are supposed to be removed.

10.9.5 Translating diagram, folder and file names

Please keep in mind that translations that you make within the frame-
work of this feature are only visible in SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub.

1. Select the the name of a diagram, folder or file name you want to translate
in the Explorer.
2. Open the Edit menu and click Change name/description (for files and
folders) or Rename (for diagrams).

Version 15.14 314

10   Collaboration

3. Now you can add translations of the name in all available languages.

4. Click Change name/description respectively Rename to save your set-

tings.

10.9.6 Next steps

o Translate content with PO files

10.10 Executing processes in SAP Signavio Process

Governance

SAP Signavio Process Governance is a platform for process gov-

ernance. To use the SAP Signavio Process Governance integration,
you need to purchase SAP Signavio Process Governance licenses.
For more information, contact sales@[Link].

Version 15.14 315

10   Collaboration

To switch from the explorer to SAP Signavio Process Governance, click SAP Sig-
navio Process Governance - Open workflows in SAP Signavio Process
Governance:
If the process has not been deployed to SAP Signavio Process Governance and
you are the workspace owner, you can deploy the process (see section Process
deployment).
Read more on process execution in the user guide of SAP Signavio Process
Governance.

10.11 Working with approval workflows

We are working on expanding and improving the functions related

to process governance. This section will be completely revised
soon.
For more information about SAP Signavio Process Governance, con-
tact sales@[Link].

Please note that the installation of SAP Signavio Process Governance is man-
datory in addition to SAP Signavio Process Manager. The approval workflow func-
tionality can only be activated if SAP Signavio Process Governance was
successfully installed. Please follow the instructions in the SAP Signavio Process
Governance administrators manual.
Approval workflows enable you to control validation of diagrams before pub-
lishing. Approval workflows ensure that decision makers and BPM experts review
and approve the quality and factual correctness of a diagram before it is pub-
lished in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub or deployed to a workflow exe-
cution system, like SAP Signavio Process Governance.
Approval workflows make sure that diagrams have been approved by a list of
users before they are published in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.
Approval workflows can be configured to automatically publish an approved dia-
gram to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub, or to send rejected diagrams
back for editing. In the explorer, a rejected diagram is marked with a red X, an
approved diagram with a green check mark and a published diagram with a
globe icon.

Version 15.14 316

10   Collaboration

If you want to configure approval workflows, read more at Managing approval

workflows and contact your workspace administrator to receive the cor-
responding license.

SAP Signavio Process Governance is much more than just a tool to

approve diagrams. You can automate all kinds of other processes as
well. If you are interested in a SAP Signavio Process Governance sub-
scription, contact sales@[Link].

10.11.1 Start an approval workflow

In this section, you will learn how to start an approval workflow for diagrams.

You can start approval workflows for diagrams of all types.

1. To start an approval workflow, select the diagram you want to have

approved in the explorer.
2. In the menu bar select Share and then Start approval workflow. The cor-
responding dialog box will open.
3. Click the link to open the workflow instance in SAP Signavio Process
Governance.
4. In case there is more than one approval workflow for your workspace, select
the approval workflow you want to start from the drop-down menu and then
click Start.

5. You receive a message that the approval workflow has been started suc-
cessfully. This hint dialog also contains a link to the appropriate workflow

Version 15.14 317

10   Collaboration

instance.

If the diagram is approved, you can see that the approval status of the diagram
has been updated in the explorer.

10.11.2 Processing an approval task

This section describes how you work as a recipient of an approval workflow task.
As soon as a modeler requests an approval from you, you will receive an email
with a link to the case in SAP Signavio Process Governance.

1. Click the link to open the approval task. The approval task opens in SAP Sig-
navio Process Governance.
2. Check whether the corresponding diagram fulfills your requirements.
3. Click the Show comments link to open the diagram in the commenting view.
4. Click the Compare revisions link to get a better overview over recent
changes via the Compare revisions tool.
5. Open the explorer to access further functions:
o To open the diagram again, double-click it or select it and click Show
comments, then Compare revisions/diagrams.
o To check whether a diagram complies with modeling conventions, select
Modeling conventions (XLSX).

Version 15.14 318

10   Collaboration

The report is especially helpful when you conduct a formal approval

with focus on BPMN quality.
o To point a colleague to a diagram, select the diagram you want to share
and select Invite to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.
o Start approval workflow triggers a new approval workflow case for the
selected diagram.
o To get an overview of all pending approval workflows, you can either
click Show started approval WFs or Open approval task list in the
upper panel.
Show started approval WFs provides a basic overview in the
explorer, whereas Open approval task list opens a more detailed, fil-
terable view in SAP Signavio Process Governance.

6. Once you have finished the review, go back to the approval case in SAP Sig-
navio Process Governance to approve or reject the change.

In the explorer, a rejected diagram is marked with a red X, an approved dia-

gram with a green check mark, and a published diagram with a globe icon:

10.11.3 Processing open approval tasks

1. In the menu bar, select Share and then Open approval task list.

You will be redirected to your SAP Signavio Process Governance work-

space. Here you can see your tasks:

2. Click a task to open it.

Version 15.14 319

10   Collaboration

3. Click the corresponding buttons to complete the task.

4. In the menu bar, select Share, then Show started approval WFs. A dialog
with an overview of running (and completed) approval workflows opens.
o If you have selected a diagram before opening the dialog, all approval
workflows for this diagram will be displayed.
o If you have selected a folder, all approval workflows for diagrams in the
selected folder will be displayed.
o If you haven't selected anything, all approval workflows of the folder that
is open will be displayed.
5. Optionally, you can activate the check box Show completed approval work-
flows to include completed workflows in the list.

Version 15.14 320

10   Collaboration

The entries are sorted by creation date. Approval requests that are in pro-
gress are shown first, followed by completed approval requests.

Version 15.14 321

11   Creating reports

11 Creating reports
SAP Signavio Process Manager allows you to create various customizable
reports in the form of spreadsheets or as PDF files. This enables business users
to analyze your process hierarchy offline, and in formats decision makers and
analysts are already familiar with. The standard reports that are accessible via
the Explorer's Reporting dropdown menu cover most business use cases. If you
require a special kind of report that is not provided by the tool, you can ask one of
your workspace administrators to create a custom template.

The reporting menu

Many of the reports access default dictionary categories during the

generation process. In case you suspect that your dictionary con-
figuration causes problems during the generation of a report, take a
look at the section Add custom categories for dictionary entries.

11.1 Process documentation and templates

It is possible to export process documentation documents as PDF and Microsoft
Word files. Process documentation documents are comprehensive documents
that contain both diagram graphics as well as relevant diagram attributes, such
as description and responsibilities.

Version 15.14 322

11   Creating reports

As a workspace administrator, you can create individual templates for process

documentation reports. A guide on how to create new templates can be found in
the corresponding chapter of this manual. Once created, a custom template can
then be selected during the creation of a process documentation report.
Read more about:
o Generating process documentation reports
o Creating and managing process documentation templates

11.2 Analysis
SAP Signavio Process Manager provides a possibility to set key performance
indicators (KPI) in event-driven process chains (EPC) and BPMN 2.0 process dia-
grams, which allows detailed process analyses.
Read more about:
o Creating quantitative process analysis reports
o Process cost analysis report
o Resource consumption analysis report

Furthermore, qualitative reports can be created for BPMN 2.0 diagrams and EPC:
o Responsibility handovers matrix report
o IT system usage matrix reports
o Job profile report
o Risk & controls report
o Modeling conventions report
o Document usage matrix report

11.3 Process model metric and process characteristics

A process model metric contains information about the usage of diagram element
types and can be created for any diagram type:
o Process model metrics report

To create a summary of element details that are used in your BPMN 2.0 or EPC
diagrams, read the following chapter:

Version 15.14 323

11   Creating reports

o Process characteristics with element details report

11.4 User and group assignment

Workspace administrators can create reports that list for each user the groups the
user is a member of:
o User/Group assignment report

11.5 Governance report

Workspace administrators can access usage data of your workspace with the gov-
ernance report. For example, you can see at a glance how many process models
have been created.
o Viewing governance reports

11.6 Generating process documentation reports

This section describes all options for this function. Which options are
available depends on your license.

In SAP Signavio Process Manager you can generate process documentation

reports. These reports contain all your diagrams, including all element descrip-
tions, and dictionary entries.
You can generate process documentation report in a PDF or Microsoft Word
format.

11.6.1 Generate a process documentation (PDF) report

Follow these steps:

1. Open the explorer and click Reporting > Process documentation (PDF).
The Process documentation (PDF) dialog opens.

Version 15.14 324

11   Creating reports

2. Select the required diagrams.

3. To add a filter, click Add filter.

The Edit filters dialog opens.

4. Select a folder from the drop-down list where you want to search in.

5. Define the rules for the filter query.

6. Click OK.
Diagrams discovered by the filter query are selected for the process doc-
umentation (PDF) report.

The Edit filters dialog opens and displays the number of results returned
from your filter query.

7. Click OK.

8. In the Configuration section, select a template for the report from the Tem-
plate drop-down list.
If there are existing custom process documentation templates, you can use
them when creating a process documentation report. Otherwise, the SAP
Signavio template is set by default.

9. Select the required language for the report from the Language drop-down
list.

10. Enter information for the Title, Organization, Author, Date, and Version
fields.

11. In the Export linked subprocesses section, select which linked sub-
processes must be included in the report from the drop-down list.
The following options are available:
o No linked subprocesses
o Linked subprocesses of all levels
o Linked subprocesses of the first level

12. Click Generate documentation.

The Process documentation report in PDF format generates. Access the report
from your browser's downloads folder.

Version 15.14 325

11   Creating reports

11.6.2 Generate a process documentation (Word) report

Follow these steps:

1. Open the explorer and click Reporting > Process documentation (Word).
The Process documentation (Word) dialog opens.

2. Select the required diagrams.

3. To add a filter, click Add filter.

The Edit filters dialog opens.

4. Select a folder from the drop-down list where you want to search in.

5. Define the rules for the filter query.

6. Click OK.
Diagrams discovered by the filter query are selected for the process doc-
umentation (Word) report.
The Edit filters dialog opens and displays the number of results returned
from your filter query.

7. Click OK.

8. In the Configuration section, select a template for the report from the Tem-
platedrop-down list.
If there are existing custom process documentation templates, you can use
them when creating a process documentation report. Otherwise, the SAP
Signavio template is set by default.

9. Select the required language for the report from the Language drop-down
list.

10. Enter information for the Title, Organization, Author, Date, and Version
fields.

11. In the Export linked subprocesses section, select which linked sub-
processes must be included in the report from the drop-down list.

Version 15.14 326

11   Creating reports

The following options are available:

o No linked subprocesses
o Linked subprocesses of all levels
o Linked subprocesses of the first level

12. Click Generate documentation.

The Important information dialog opens.

13. The dialog indicates that the table of contents won't be up-to-date when
opening the generated report. Click OK and follow the steps described
below after the report generation is complete.

The Process documentation report in Word format generates. Access the report
from your browser's downloads folder.

[Link] Updating the table of contents in Microsoft Word

Follow these steps:

1. Open the Process documentation (Word) report.

2. Select the table of contents and push F9 or right click on each table of con-
tents entry and click Update Field.

The table of contents updates with the correct page numbers.

11.7 Responsibility assignment matrix / RACI report

The Responsibility assignment matrix / RACI report creates an XLSX file which
displays the responsibilities for activities in the selected BPMN diagrams. Read
Responsibility assignment according to RACI for more information.

Version 15.14 327

11   Creating reports

This section explains how to generate the Responsibility assignment matrix /

RACI report.

1. Open the explorer and click Reporting > Responsibility assignment matrix
/ RACI.
The Responsibility assignment matrix / RACI dialog opens.

2. Select one or multiple diagrams to include in the report.

3. You can select the following options:

o Use merged cells in output spreadsheet
o Export file as .XLS (Excel 97)

4. Click Start analysis.

The Responsibility assignment matrix / RACI report generates. The file is

saved to your browser's download folder.

11.8 Responsibility handovers matrix report

When different roles or organizations participate on processes, the process flow
gets handed over from one participant to another at defined places. These roles
are represented as pools and lanes in BPMN 2.0 process diagrams. Event-driven
process chains (EPC) use attached roles, positions and organizations. A respons-
ibility handover can be either a sequence or an information flow.

Version 15.14 328

11   Creating reports

The Responsibility handovers matrix report creates an Excel file that contains
information for each diagram that is included in the report. The responsibility han-
dovers matrix calculation considers pools, lanes, and in case of Event-driven pro-
cess chains (EPC), the attached roles, as well as links to organizational
dictionary entries.

This section explains how to generate a Responsibility handovers matrix report

for a BPMN 2.0 process diagram. These steps also work for Event-driven process
chains (EPC).

1. Open the explorer and click Reporting > Responsibility handovers matrix.
The Responsibility handovers matrix dialog opens.

2. Select one or more diagrams to include in the report.

3. Select the required language of the report.

4. You can select the following options:

Version 15.14 329

11   Creating reports

o Use merged cells in output spreadsheet

o Export file as .XLS (Excel 97) options.

5. Click Start analysis.

The Responsibility handovers matrix report generates. The file is saved to
your browser's download folder.

6. The Responsibility handovers matrix report displays the Responsibility Han-

dovers, Internal Handovers, and External Handovers for the selected dia-
grams. Select the required tabs to view the information.

If custom attributes linking to organizational dictionary entries were

defined, they are included in the calculation.

11.9 IT system usage matrix reports

BPMN 2.0 process diagrams and Event-driven process chains (EPC) can attach
IT systems information to a task. With BPMN, those IT systems can be tagged as
an 'Input' or an 'Output'.
The IT system usage matrix reports creates an assignment matrix that shows
which IT systems data is read from during an activity, and which IT system data is
written to. You can choose whether the assignments refer to diagrams or roles.
The report also includes IT systems that are linked as dictionary entries from a
custom defined attribute.
This section explains how to generate IT system usage matrix reports for a BPMN
2.0 process diagram. These steps also work for Event-driven process chain
(EPC) diagrams.

Version 15.14 330

11   Creating reports

11.9.1 Generate the IT system usage matrix (by diagrams) report

Follow these steps:

1. Open the explorer and click Reporting > IT system usage matrix (by dia-
grams).
The IT system usage matrix (by diagrams) dialog opens.

2. Select one or multiple diagrams to include in the report.

3. You can select the following options:

o use merged cells in output spreadsheet
o Export file as .XLS (Excel 97)

4. Click Start analysis.

The IT system usage matrix (by diagrams) report generates. The file is saved to
your browser's download folder.

Version 15.14 331

11   Creating reports

11.9.2 Generate the IT system usage matrix (by roles) report

Follow these steps:

1. Open the explorer and click Reporting > IT system usage matrix (by
roles).
The IT system usage matrix (by roles) dialog opens.

2. Select one or multiple diagrams to include in the report.

3. You can select the following options:

o Use merged cells in output spreadsheet
o Export file as .XLS (Excel 97)

4. Click Start analysis.

The IT system usage matrix (by roles) report generates. The file is saved to your
browser's download folder.

Version 15.14 332

11   Creating reports

If custom attributes linking to organizational dictionary entries were

defined, those will also be included in the calculation.

11.10 Job profile report

In SAP Signavio Process Manager you can automatically create job profiles
based on your documented process landscape. The Job Profile report allows you
to view all activities that an organizational role is involved in.
In contrast to the diagram-centered RACI report, the Job Profile report creates a
role-specific matrix over all workspace diagrams.

This section explains how to generate a Job Profile report in SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Manager.

1. Open the explorer and click Dictionary.

The dictionary opens in a new tab.

2. Select the required organizational roles and click Import / Export > Export
Job Profile Report.
The Job Profile report generates. The file is saved to your browser's down-
load folder.

11.11 Risk & controls report

Access to this feature depends on your license.

Version 15.14 333

11   Creating reports

With SAP Signavio Process Manager's integrated risk management feature, you
have the ability to define risks and controls directly at any step of a process within
the process model. These risks and controls can be defined and then associated
with the corresponding activities.
You can use the Risk & controls report to view an overview of potential risks and
related controls. This report summarizes all information about the risks and con-
trols in the selected process models.

The section explains how to generate the Risk & controls report.

1. Open the explorer and click Reporting > Risk & controls report.
The Risk & controls report dialog opens.

2. Select one or multiple diagrams to include in the report.

3. You select the following options:

o Use merged cells in output spreadsheet
o Export file as .XLS (Excel97)

4. Expand the Show additional attributes in the report option. The following
attribute options are available:
o Documentation
o Process target
o Process maturity level
o Process owner
o IOS9000ff relevant
o Responsible

It isn't possible to include table attributes. You can't select risk

management attributes on diagram level as the report includes
them by default.

5. Click Start analysis.

Version 15.14 334

11   Creating reports

The Risk & controls report generates. The file is saved to your browser's
download folder.

11.12 Modeling conventions report

With the Modeling conventions report you can create a report that checks if the
selected diagrams are compliant according to a specified modeling convention.

This section explains how to generate the Modeling conventions report.

1. Open the explorer and click Reporting > Modeling conventions.

The Modeling conventions dialog opens.

2. Select one or multiple diagrams to include in the report.

3. Click Add filter to add filters to the report.

The Edit filters dialog opens.

4. Specify the folder you want the report to search in for diagrams using the
Please choose folder drop-down.

5. Specify the filter conditions. You can configure the Diagram information
and Custom diagram attributes filter conditions.

6. Click OK.

7. Select a modeling convention from the Modeling conventions section . The

following default conventions are available:
o SAP Signavio Process Governance BPMN 2.0 conventions
o BPMN Method & Style conventions

Version 15.14 335

11   Creating reports

o SAP Signavio Best Practices for BPMN 2.0

Custom modeling conventions are also available in the Modeling

conventions section. Read Managing modeling conventions for
more information.

8. Click Start analysis.

The Modeling conventions report generates. The file is saved to your
browser's download folder.

11.13 Document usage matrix report

Data objects can be attached to an activity in BPMN 2.0 and are indicated as an
input or output. In Event-driven process chain (EPC) diagrams, documents can
be attached to functions. The Documents usage matrix report creates an Excel
file for one or multiple diagrams describing the assignment of documents to
tasks. Linked dictionary entries representing a document are also included in the
report.
The Documents usage matrix report displays the documents that are attached to
an element as a BPMN attribute as either 'Input' or 'Output' documents. For
Event-driven process chain (EPC) diagrams, an information flow can be directed
using the 'Information Flow' attribute.

If there are custom attributes defined which link to dictionary entries

that represent documents, they are included in the calculation.

Version 15.14 336

11   Creating reports

This section explains how to generate a Documents usage matrix report for a
BPMN 2.0 process diagram. These steps also work for Event-driven process
chain (EPC) diagrams.

1. Open the explorer and click Reporting > Documents usage matrix.
The Documents usage matrix dialog opens.

2. Select one or multiple diagrams to include in the report.

3. You can select the following options:

o Use merged cells in output spreadsheet
o Export file as .XLS (Excel 97)

4. Click Start analysis.

The Documents usage matrix report generates. The file is saved to your
browser's download folder.

Version 15.14 337

11   Creating reports

11.14 Process characteristics with element details

report
The Process characteristics with element details report is an Excel file that con-
tains an overview of elements and attribute values found in the selected dia-
grams. Attributes without values are not listed in the report.
The following diagram types can be used in the Process characteristics with ele-
ment details report:
o BPMN 2.0
o DMN 1.1
o ArchiMate
o EPC
o Value chain
o Organization chart

This section explains how to generate a Process characteristics with element

details report.

1. Open the explorer and click Reporting > Process characteristics with ele-
ment details.

2. Select one or multiple diagrams to include in the report.

3. You can select the following options:

o Use merged cells in output spreadsheet
o Export file as .XLS (Excel 97)

4. Click Export options to configure which elements and attributes you want to
include in the report. The following options are available:

Version 15.14 338

11   Creating reports

o Include IDs
o Included elements
o Included attributes

5. Click Start analysis.

The Process characteristics with element details report generates. The file is
saved to your browser's download folder.

11.15 Process model metrics report

With the Process model metrics report you can generate a statistics report for
your diagrams. The following statistics are included in the report:
o Type
o Number of Elements
o Number of Edges
o Number of Forks
o Operators
o Number of Subprocesses
o Number of linked Files
o Number of Dictionary Links
o Number of Process Steps without Responsibility Definition
o Number of Responsibility Handovers
o Path
o ID
o Revision
o Last saved by
o Date of last publication
o Open in Explorer link. The column contains a link that opens the selected dia-
gram in the Explorer.
o Open in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub Preview. The column con-
tains a link that opens the selected diagram in the SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub Preview.

Version 15.14 339

11   Creating reports

This section explains how to generate a process model metric for a BPMN 2.0 pro-
cess diagram. These steps also work for Event-driven process chain (EPC) dia-
grams.

1. Open the explorer and click Reporting > Process model metrics.
The Process model metrics dialog opens up.

2. Select one or multiple diagrams to include in the report.

3. You can select the following options:

o Use merged cells in output spreadsheet
o Export file as .XLS (Excel 97)

4. Click Start analysis.

The Process model metrics report generates. The file is saved to your browser's
download folder.

11.16 Creating quantitative process analysis reports

SAP Signavio Process Manager enables you to run quantitative analyses of your
processes. After setting KPI on diagram elements, you can generate the process
cost analysis and resource consumption analysis reports for BPMN 2.0 process
diagrams and event-driven process chains (EPC). Read Setting key per-
formance indicators (KPIs) for more information.

Version 15.14 340

11   Creating reports

The process cost analysis report assigns process costs to processes and tasks
and lists them in cost centers. Based on the key process indicators set, the report
creates a table that shows costs for certain tasks and named cost centers. Read
Process cost analysis report for more information.
The resource consumption analysis report allows for the computing of time con-
sumption per task or process. Read Resource consumption analysis report for
more information.
Both reports consider the execution probability and frequency before computing
the actual resource consumption or costs.

11.17 Process cost analysis report

Access to this feature depends on your license.

Process cost analysis reports displays the computed costs that occur in a pro-
cess. The report displays the costs, tasks, and cost centers in a table.

Version 15.14 341

11   Creating reports

This section explains how to generate the Process cost analysis report.

1. Open the explorer and click Reporting > Process cost analysis.
The Process cost analysis dialog opens.

2. Select one or multiple diagrams to include in the report.

3. You can select the following options:

o Use merged cells in output spreadsheet
o Export file as XLS (Excel 97)

4. Click Next.
The Quantitative analysis dialog opens.

5. Select the report mode. The following report modes are available:
o Process cost analysis: Calculates the process costs (€ per cost cen-
ter) based on the execution frequency and costs per activity. You can
also select the Use resource consumption attributes for the cal-
culation (if provided) option.
o Resource consumption analysis: Calculates the resource con-
sumption (hours per resource) based on the execution frequency and
execution time per activity. Read the Resource consumption analysis
report for more information.
For the purpose of these steps the Process cost analysis mode is selected.

6. Select the Include subprocesses in calculation option if required.

7. Click Next.

Version 15.14 342

11   Creating reports

8. Specify the resource costs. This dialog only appears if you selected the Use
resource consumption attributes for the calculation (if provided) option.

9. Click Start Calculation.

If there are structural or logical mistakes in the diagrams, the system
informs you. If errors occur, the program asks you to go back to check the
diagram in the editor. Click Open diagramto open the diagrams in the editor
to correct any logical mistakes, structural mistakes, and errors.

10. If there are no errors, the Resource consumption analysis report generates.
Click Please click here to open the Excel file to download the report. The
file is saved to your browser's download folder.
This Excel file contains the analysis. The values are based on functions, so
changing one value may change the values in other fields accordingly.
If multiple diagrams were included in the report, each diagram will have its
own tab in the Excel file.

11.18 Resource consumption analysis report

Access to this feature depends on your license.

A Resource consumption analysis report calculates the time consumed for a pro-
cess or a task. It can help you find complex and time consuming tasks and plot
out the resource consumption of process participants.

This section explains how to generate the Resource consumption analysis report.

Version 15.14 343

11   Creating reports

1. Open the explorer and click Reporting > Resource consumption analysis.
The Resource consumption analysis dialog opens.

2. Select one or multiple diagrams to include in the report.

3. You can select the following options:

o Use merged cells in output spreadsheet
o Export file as XLS (Excel 97)

4. Click Next.
The Quantitative analysis dialog opens.

5. Select the report mode. The following report modes are available:
o Process cost analysis: Calculates the process costs (€ per cost cen-
ter) based on the execution frequency and costs per activity. You can
also select the Use resource consumption attributes for the cal-
culation (if provided) option. Read the Process cost analysis report
for more information.
o Resource consumption analysis: Calculates the resource con-
sumption (hours per resource) based on the execution frequency and
execution time per activity.

For the purpose of these steps the Resource consumption analysis mode
is selected.

6. Select the Include subprocesses in calculation option if required.

7. Click Next.

8. Add further information for the resource calculation. The following options
are available:
o Personal allowance time (% of total work time)
o Technical allowance (% of total work time)
o Nominal value of work days / year
o Nominal value of work hours / day

9. Select the Save for future calculation options if you want to use the per-
sonal and nominal values in a future calculation.

Version 15.14 344

11   Creating reports

10. Click Start Calculation.

If there are structural or logical mistakes in the diagrams, the system
informs you. If errors occur, the program asks you to go back to check the
diagram in the editor. Click Open diagramto open the diagrams in the editor
to correct any logical mistakes, structural mistakes, and errors.

11. If there are no errors, the Resource consumption analysis report generates.
Click Please click here to open the Excel file to download the report. The
file is saved to your browser's download folder.
This Excel file contains the analysis. The values are based on functions, so
changing one value may change the values in other fields accordingly.
If multiple diagrams were included in the report, one new tab will be created
for each diagram in the Excel file. An additional Sum tab is created as a
front page that shows the data for the processes.

11.19 User/Group assignment report

To generate a User/Group assignment report, you need to have work-

space administration privileges.

The User/Group assignment report generates a list of users and their group mem-
berships in your workspace. The users and groups displayed in the report are
pulled from the users and groups defined in the User Management section of
SAP Signavio Process Manager Read Manage users and groups for more
information.
For each user, the report lists all user groups the user is a member of as a direct
member. If a user is a member of group and that group is a member of a group lis-
ted in the report they are listed as an indirect member.

Version 15.14 345

11   Creating reports

This section explains how to generate the User/Group assignment report.

1. Open the explorer and click Reporting > User/Group assignment.

The User/Group assignment report generates. The file is saved to your
browser's download folder.

11.20 Viewing governance reports

Access to this feature depends on your license.

You need an administrator account to use this function.

The governance report provides an overview of the user activity in your work-
space. You can view aggregate metrics (for example, the number of unpublished
diagrams). You can use these metrics to draw conclusions regarding the success
of your process modeling initiative.

1. Open the explorer and click Reporting > Governance report.

The Governance report dialog opens.

2. Each tile displays a different usage metric.

3. Select the required tile to access detailed information.

Version 15.14 346

11   Creating reports

A new browser tab opens and displays the results list of an advanced
search filter corresponding to the selected usage metric.

11.20.1 The governance report's usage metrics

The aggregates in the governance reports also consider diagrams you

don't have permission to access. Your current access rights are taken
into account for the linked search.

In the overview, the following usage metrics are available:

Version 15.14 347

11   Creating reports

Data Description
Diagrams The total number of diagrams in your workspace displays in
brackets.
The number of diagrams grouped by publishing state and type
(for example, value chain, and organization chart) is shown in
each corresponding tile.

Comments The total number of existing comments displays in brackets.

The number of comments grouped by commenting state is
shown in each corresponding tile.

Dictionary The total number of existing dictionary items displays in brack-

items
ets.
The number of dictionary items grouped by publishing state and
dictionary category type (for example, events, and require-
ments) displays in each corresponding tile.

Files The total number of existing files displays in brackets.

The number of file grouped by publishing state and the type (for
example, PDF , and JPG) displays in each corresponding tile.

Version 15.14 348

11   Creating reports

Data Description
SAP Signavio The number of Page visits represent a single user opening any
Process Col-
laboration Hub published object (diagram, file, or Dictionary item) in SAP Sig-
navio Process Collaboration Hub. Every time someone opens
one of these items in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub,
it's counted as a view and displays in the report.
Time ranges are based on calendar month and year, starting
from the first day of the previous month at 00:00:00 and counting
up until the last day of the current month at 23:59:59. Times are
based on local server time. On an EU server, it's in CEST, on an
US server it's in EST and on an Australian server it's in AEST.
Unique users refers to the total amount of visitors to SAP Sig-
navio Process Collaboration Hub in the given time span. It only
displays once more than 10 users have accessed SAP Signavio
Process Collaboration Hub, due to data protection. If a single
user visits SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub several
times in the given time span, only their first visit is reflected in the
unique users count.

Version 15.14 349

12   Importing

12 Importing
This section discusses how to share diagrams and dictionary entries using import
features:
o Import an SAP Signavio archive (SGX) file
o Import a BPMN 2.0 XML diagram
o Import the APQC Process Classification Framework
o Import a XPDL 2.1. diagram
o Import a ARIS Markup Language (AML) diagram
o Import a Microsoft Visio diagram
o Upload documents and pictures
o Import dictionary entries
o Import a set of dictionary items as a JAR file

For export features, read the Exporting section.

12.1 Import an SAP Signavio archive (SGX) file

Access to this feature depends on your license.

With this feature you can import diagrams that were exported as SAP Signavio
archive (SGX) to your workspace.
The following applies:
o You can add dictionary entries to the dictionary or merge with existing
entries. You can also import custom attributes and modeling language con-
figurations.
o You can only run one import at a time. All users in a workspace with the
necessary rights can see an import in progress when trying to run an import
by themselves.
o There is a 500 MB import file size limit.

Version 15.14 350

12   Importing

o On the History tab of the import dialog, you can view the details of the last
50 imports, for example the import time, the import status, and which items
imported successfully.

12.1.1 Import a SAP Signavio archive (SGX) file

Follow these steps:

1. Open the explorer and click Import / Export > Import SAP Signavio
archive (SGX).

The Import Signavio archives (SGX) dialog opens.

2. On the Import tab, click Choose File and select the archive you want to
import.

3. You can customize the import with the following options:

Options Notes

If you disable this option, no linked

Import contained Files/Pictures
documents and files are imported.

Import dictionary entries

Overwrite existing dictionary entries

with the same title

Import custom attributes and mod- This option is only available for admin-
eling language configurations istrators.
o This option is only available for
administrators.
Import custom graphics o If you disable this option,
default graphics are used in the
diagrams.

4. Click Import.
The diagrams and folders imports into your workspace.

Version 15.14 351

12   Importing

12.1.2 Next steps

o Export a BPMN diagram as XML

12.2 Import a BPMN 2.0 XML diagram

The BPMN 2.0 standard includes an XML notation and enables the platform with
independent exchange of BPMN 2.0 diagrams. To get more information about the
BPMN 2.0 specifications, go to [Link]
In SAP Signavio Process Manager you can update your BPMN 2.0 model by
importing a new XML file. The import updates each process and subprocess in
your model, and creates a new diagram if a subprocess doesn’t exist.
To import a BPMN 2.0 XML diagram, follow these steps:

1. Open the explorer and click Import / Export > Import BPMN 2.0 XML.
The Import BPMN 2.0 diagrams from .bpmn files dialog opens.

2. Click Choose File.

3. Select a XML file that complies with the BPMN 2.0 XML standard.
The diagram imports.

12.2.1 Import errors and warnings

If the imported file is not standard-compliant, the system displays errors and warn-
ings. Some elements won't import due to errors in the BPMN 2.0 XML file.
o Errors prevent the diagram from importing.
o Warnings display which diagram elements won't be available after the
import. Diagrams with warnings still import.

Each element requires bpmndi information such as process flow and graphical
information.
Elements with no bpmndi information still import but display warnings. For
example, if an element doesn’t contain graphical information during import, the
import completes but elements without the graphical information are excluded
from the import.
Opening a diagram with warnings after import can contain missing elements.

Version 15.14 352

12   Importing

Sometimes the import of BPMN 2.0 XML files is impossible due to errors
unknown to the system. For example, the imported file isn't a valid BPMN 2.0
XML. For further assistance, please contact our SAP Signavio service experts on
the SAP ONE Support Launchpad.

12.2.2 Next steps

o Export a BPMN diagram as XML

12.3 Import the APQC Process Classification

Framework
With this feature, you can import APQC frameworks into your workspace.

12.3.1 The representation of the APQC framework in SAP

Signavio Process Manager
The hierarchy structure of the APQC framework is represented by a folder tree in
SAP Signavio Process Manager.
Once the import is done, every element in the sheet "Combined" is represented in
the workspace in different forms (depending on the hierarchy level of the ele-
ment):
o level 1 (X.0): a folder and inside of it a value chain with the same name
including / linking to all direct child elements
o level 2 (X.X): a folder and inside of it a value chain including / linking to all
direct child elements
o level 3 (X.X.X): depending on whether the hierarchy for this part goes down
to level 4 (only one more level of direct children) or level 5 (two more levels)
o stops at level 4: a BPMN diagram including all direct child elements as activ-
ities
o stops at level 5: a folder and inside of it a value chain including / linking to all
direct child elements

Version 15.14 353

12   Importing

o level 4 (X.X.X.X): depending on whether the hierarchy for this part goes
down to level 4 (no more children) or level 5 (one more level of child ele-
ments)
o stops at level 4: activity elements in a BPMN model (see above)
o stops at level 5: a BPMN diagram including all direct child elements as activ-
ities
o level 5 (X.X.X.X.X; optional): activity elements in a BPMN model (see
above)
o A single, top-level value chain is created linking to all imported level 1 value
chains.

The diagram's Description attribute contains the corresponding APQC glossary

term.
If you already have a workspace, please contact our SAP Signavio service
experts on the SAP ONE Support Launchpad to activate the APQC importer.

12.3.2 Import a APQC spreadsheet

To import the APQC framework into your workspace, follow these steps:

1. Download the framework as a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet from the APQC

web site. Modify the spreadsheet as required.

2. Open the explorer and click Import/Export > Import APQC Excel.
The Import APQC diagram structure from .xls file dialog opens.

3. Click Choose File and select an APQC framework Excel spreadsheet.

4. Click Import.

The framework imports into the folder that is selected in the

explorer.

The import can take several minutes.

Now, you are able to use the APQC framework as the beginning of your business
process management initiative in SAP Signavio Process Manager.

Version 15.14 354

12   Importing

12.4 Import a XPDL 2.1. diagram

This feature is only available on request. For more information, please

contact our SAP Signavio service experts on the SAP ONE Support
Launchpad.

The XML Process Definition Language (XPDL) was specified by the Workflow
Management Coalition (WfMC) to provide a language for specifying workflows.
You can find more information about XPDL at [Link].
You can to import diagrams from XPDL files into your workspace, even if they
were created using a different modeling tool.
To import a XPDL 2.1. diagram, follow these steps:

1. Open the explorer and click Import / Export > Import of XPDL 2.1.
The Import of XPDL 2.1 dialog opens.

2. Click Choose File and select a XPDL file.

3. Click Import.

The XPDL diagrams imports into your workspace.

12.5 Import a ARIS Markup Language (AML) diagram

The ARIS® Markup Language (AML) is the XML export format of the software
tool ARIS®. You can import Event-driven Process Chains (EPC), Organization
Charts and Value Chains from ARIS® into your workspace. To import diagrams
from ARIS, you need to export the diagrams in ARIS to the ARIS® XML format.
To import ARIS XML diagrams, follow these steps:

1. Open the explorer and click Import /Export > Import ARIS® markup lan-
guage.
The Import diagrams from AML file dialog opens.

2. Click Choose File.

3. Select the XML file you want to import and click Import.

The diagram in the XML file imports into your workspace.

Version 15.14 355

12   Importing

12.6 Import a Microsoft Visio diagram

This feature is only available on request. For more information, please

contact our SAP Signavio service experts on the SAP ONE Support
Launchpad.
This feature is only available for our SaaS product.

You can import Visio diagrams into SAP Signavio Process Manager. The
importer supports both BPMN 2.0 and EPC diagrams.
To import Visio diagrams, follow these steps:

1. Open the explorer and click Import / Export > Import Visio.
2. Click Choose Files and select the Visio files for import.
3. Select the notation the files use, BPMN 2.0 or EPK diagrams.

The importer supports VDX, VSD, VSDX files, and ZIP archives
that contain such file types. Elements that are not part of the
BPMN 2.0 standard and not EPC-compliant are excluded.

4. Click Import.

The Visio diagrams imports into your workspace.

12.7 Upload documents and pictures

In SAP Signavio Process Manager you can upload documents and pictures into
your SAP Signavio file storage. These files can be linked to diagrams and, when
published in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub, are available to team
members who have read access.

12.7.1 Limitations
Embedding images that are not accessible to all users can display as broken
image links when viewed without the necessary permissions or log-ins.
We recommend to embed images only as follows:

Version 15.14 356

12   Importing

o as unlisted images (with hidden names and implicit authentication tokens,

HTTPS only)
Example URL: [Link]
possibleToken=123nekot321

o as publicly hosted images (without access or authentication restrictions,

HTTPS only)
Example URL: [Link]

When you host images externally, be aware that these image can pos-
sibly be accessed by third parties.

12.7.2 Considerations
If the SAP Signavio file storage is enabled for your workspace, its size and the
maximum upload file size are displayed in the workspace configuration dialog
accessible via the top drop-down menu of the Explorer in the header Setup. To
configure those limits according to your requirements, please contact our SAP
Signavio service experts on the SAP ONE Support Launchpad.
If the file quota is exhausted or the size limit for a single file is exceeded, a warn-
ing displays.
In those cases, you can try to upload a smaller version of the file or delete unused
pictures or documents from your file storage. To increase your storage space,
please contact your workspace administrator.

12.7.3 Upload a document or picture to the SAP Signavio file

storage
To upload a document or picture file, follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, click Import / Export > Upload document/picture.

The Choose or upload a file/picture dialog opens.

2. Click Choose File to search for the file you want to upload.

Version 15.14 357

12   Importing

o Take note that there must be enough free space left in your
file storage to upload the whole file.
o Make sure not to exceed the maximum file size - by default,
the maximum file size is 5 MB.

3. Click the Save to and select Choose a different folder.

Select a folder in your workspace. After selecting the new target folder, click
OK.

4. Click Save.

The document or picture is uploaded into your workspace.

[Link] Edit a file name

To edit the name and description of a file after upload, follow these steps:

1. Click Edit > Change name/description.

The Change name/description dialog opens.

2. Add a new file name and description. Click Change name/description.

12.7.4 Update a document or picture

You can update a file in the SAP Signavio file storage by uploading a newer ver-
sion of the file. Each link to this file opens the updated version as well.
To update a picture or document, follow these steps:

1. Select a picture or document.

2. Click Import / Export > Update picture or Update document.

The Update picture or Update document dialog opens.

3. Click Choose file, to select the document or picture, then click the Please
choose a folder. drop-down arrow.

4. Select a recent folder or click Choose a different folder.

5. Select a folder in your workspace. After selecting the new target folder, click

Version 15.14 358

12   Importing

OK.

6. Click Save.

The file is updated.

12.7.5 Download documents and pictures

To download a document or picture, follow these steps:

1. Select the document or picture in the explorer.

2. Click Import / Export > Download document or Download picture.

3. The document or picture is downloaded and saved in the browsers down-

load folder.

12.7.6 Supported file types

You can upload the following file types:
o doc
o docx
o ppt
o pptx
o xls
o xlsx
o odt
o ogg
o zip
o rar
o pdf
o audio/mpeg
o audio/ogg
o image/gif
o image/apng
o image/flif
o image/webp
o image/x-mng
o image/jpeg

Version 15.14 359

12   Importing

o image/png
o multipart/form-data
o text/css
o text/csv
o text/html
o text/php
o text/plain
o text/xml

12.8 Import dictionary entries

You can import dictionary entries from Microsoft Excel files (XLS or XLSX) to add
multiple entries at once or to update existing entries. The import can't be used to
delete existing entries from the dictionary.
In a workspace, it's not possible to perform multiple imports simultaneously. If
you start an import while another user is running one, the import tool shows a
message and you have to wait until the other import is finished.

The import is limited to 500 records per Excel spreadsheet. Importing

a file with more than 500 records, causes the import to fail. If you need
to import more than 500 entries, split them up into multiple files.

Below is an example of an Excel file which contains dictionary entries:

For the Excel file structure, the following applies:

Version 15.14 360

12   Importing

Spreadsheet A spreadsheet can contain entries for only one category of the
dictionary, no matter if main or subcategory. This means that for
each dictionary category, you must import the entries indi-
vidually.
If a file has multiple spreadsheets, all of them need at least a
header column.

Column The column header contains the dictionary attributes. You can
header
choose any name for the headers, as for the import you map the
columns to the dictionary attributes in SAP Signavio Process
Manager.
If your dictionary entries are multilingual, we recommend to add
language codes to all column headers as language codes make
the mapping easier for you.
The import tool interprets the first row with text as the header.
You must start your dictionary file with the first column and fill in
at least three columns. If you fill fewer columns with a header or
have empty columns in between, the import fails.

Rows Rows contain the actual dictionary entries and the information you want to
add, for example descriptions or statuses.

You can either create such a file or you export available dictionary entries and
use the export file as a template. Read more about exporting dictionary entries in
the section Export dictionary entries.
To import dictionary entries, follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, click Dictionary.

2. Click Import / Export > Import Excel.

The Import Excel dialog opens.

3. Click Choose File.

4. Select the file you want to import from the file selection dialog and click
Open.

5. Click Import.

Version 15.14 361

12   Importing

The import mapping dialog opens.

6. In the first section, select an import mode:

o Update existing entries only, ignore other rows
o Create new entries for all rows
o Update existing entries and create new ones

7. In the second section, select the spreadsheet you want to import and the dic-
tionary category.

8. In the third section, which is active when updating entries, map the Excel
column and the dictionary entry attribute, which are used to identify existing
entries.

9. In the fourth section, map the file headers with the dictionary attributes.

10. Click Import.

When all entries are imported, you are prompted with a summary including
a download link to the imported Excel file, which additionally contains the
import details. Open this file to verify the changes made by the import. Once
you have closed this prompt, the import of dictionary entries completes.

12.8.1 Next steps

o Export dictionary entries

12.9 Import a set of dictionary items as a JAR file

This feature is available on request. Contact SAP Signavio Customer

Support for more details.

With the JAR import feature you can import Java classes as dictionary items and
use them as data models in the SAP Signavio Decision Manager.
The attributes and relationships of the classes are created as decision input/out-
put data types.

Version 15.14 362

12   Importing

12.9.1 Preparation and requirements

Before importing a JAR file, make sure the target dictionary category supports
data modeling.
The classes in your JAR file need to fulfill the following requirements:
o Classes need the @XmlType annotation.
o Attributes need to be of one of the following data types:
o String
o Boolean (and boolean )
o Number (all subclasses) and int , double , byte , long , float
o Nested classes (from the same JAR)
o Collections of the above mentioned data types (no generic collections,
for example Set<? extends Number>)

Java class examples

The following example displays a Java class that is valid for the import:

package [Link];
import [Link];
import [Link];

@XmlType
public class Relationship {

private Fruit Apple;

private Fruit Orange;
private Set<Fruit> banana;
private boolean broken;

public Fruit getApple() {

return apple;
}

public void setApple(Fruit Apple) {

[Link] = apple;
}

public Fruit getOrange() {

return orange;
}

public void setOrange(Fruit Orange) {

[Link] = orange;
}

Version 15.14 363

12   Importing

public Set<Fruit> getBanana() {

return banana;
}

public void setBanana(Set<Fruit> banana) {

[Link] = banana;
}

public boolean isBroken() {

return broken;
}

public void setBroken(boolean broken) {

[Link] = broken;
}

This example can't be imported because the class lacks the @XmlType annota-
tion:

package [Link];

public class NotValid extends Relationship {

private int justANumber;

public int getJustANumber() {

return justANumber;
}

public void setJustANumber(int justANumber) {

[Link] = justANumber;
}

Version 15.14 364

12   Importing

12.9.2 Import a JAR file

Follow these steps:

1. Open the dictionary and click Import / Export > Import JAR.
The Import JAR dialog opens.

2. Click Choose File and select a JAR file.

3. Click Import.

The JAR's Java classes are available as dictionary items. Refresh your browser
to see the imported items.

Version 15.14 365

13   Exporting

13 Exporting
In this section, it is described how to share diagrams and dictionary entries using
the export functions:
o Export dictionary entries
o Export a diagram as PDF
o Export a diagram as an image
o Export a diagram as a SAP Signavio archive (SGX)
o Export a BPMN diagram as XML
o Export a diagram as XML
o Export a DMN diagram as XML
o Exporting DMN diagrams as drools rules
o Exporting diagrams to Red Hat Decision Manager projects on GitHub

For the import functions, read more in section Importing.

13.1 Export dictionary entries

You can export dictionary entries to an Excel file, for example to print them, for off-
line review, or for further processing in third-party systems.
To export the entire dictionary, follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, open the dictionary.

2. Click Import / Export > Export Excel. The option Export the entire dic-
tionary is selected by default.

3. If multiple languages are set up for the workspace, select the language for
the export.
For each language, you must run an individual export.

4. Click Export Excel.

The dictionary entries are exported. The file is saved to your browser's
download folder.

To export specific dictionary entries, follow these steps:

Version 15.14 366

13   Exporting

1. Before you start the export, select the entries you want to export in the dic-
tionary
You can export the following entry sets:
o All entries of the category you select.
o All entries in a category that begin with a specific letter.
o All entries that are returned by a search.

2. Click Import / Export > Export Excel.

3. Select an export option. It depends on your previous selection which option

is available:
o Export the entire dictionary
o Export entries with the selected initial in the current category
o Export the current category
o Export the current search result

4. If multiple languages are set up for the workspace, select the language for
the export.
For each language, you must run an individual export.

5. Click Export Excel.

The dictionary entries are exported. The file is saved to your browser's
download folder.

If you want to import dictionary entries from an Excel file to your workspace, read
more in section Import dictionary entries.

13.2 Export a diagram as PDF

With this function, you can export a diagram as a PDF file from the explorer.
You can either select a single diagram for export, or a folder. When selecting a
folder, all diagrams contained are combined into one PDF document.
To export diagrams, follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, select the diagram or the folder you want to export.
You can change your selection via the export options described below.

Version 15.14 367

13   Exporting

2. In the toolbar, click Import / Export > Export PDF.

The export configuration dialog opens.

3. Configure the export. Read more in section Export options.

4. If you want to save your export configuration as default for your workspace,
enable Save as defaults at the bottom of the dialog.

o You need an administrator account to have this option avail-

able.
o The export configuration is only saved when you export a
PDF. If you cancel the export, your settings aren't saved.

5. Click Export.
The PDF is exported. The file is saved to your browser's download folder.

To export a diagram as PDF from the editor, use the print function in the toolbar.
Read more in section Editor toolbar and keyboard shortcuts.

13.2.1 Export options

In the General section, the following options are available:
o Language
If multiple languages are set up for the workspace, select the language for
the diagram you want to export.
o Print in black and white
Specify whether to print the diagram in color or black and white.
o Show additional information
Enable this option if you want to add printing attributes to the PDF doc-
ument, for example the author, creation date, or page number. You can also
add diagram attributes.
The preview area shows how many attributes you can add and where they
are positioned.

Version 15.14 368

13   Exporting

To add diagram attributes, click Own attribute and select up to 3 diagram

attributes for each attribute position.
o Paper size
Select a paper size for your PDF. The default is set to the international
standard size A4.
o Stretch small diagrams to whole page
Specify whether small diagrams are enlarged to fit the full page.

In the Logo section, the following options are available:

o Logo
Add a custom logo. You can upload a new file or choose an image that
already exists in your workspace. The maximum size for a logo file is 5 MB.
o Use original size
Specify whether to use the original size of the image file.

In the Orientation section, the following options are available:

o Landscape or Portrait
For the PDF pages, select landscape orientation or portrait orientation.
o Diagram rotation
Specify whether the diagram rotation is managed automatically or not.

With Automatic, the internal diagram rotation is used.

With Always, the diagram rotation you choose below is used.
With Never, the diagram isn't rotated.
o Diagram orientation
If you've selected Always for the diagram rotation above, select whether to
rotate the diagram clockwise or counterclockwise.

In the Distribution section, the following options are available:

o Single page or Multiple pages
Specify whether to have the diagram fitted to one page or, if necessary dis-
tributed over several pages.

Version 15.14 369

13   Exporting

For printing on multiple pages, the diagram size and width will be auto-
matically adjusted to the paper size.

In the Attribute visualization section, the following options are available:

o Rule sets
Select which attributes should be visible.
o Risks and controls
Specify whether to show the configured attributes for risks and controls.
o Show attachment icon

Specify whether to mark attachments by adding a paper clip icon.

In the Selected diagrams section, the following option is available:

o Click Configure to add diagrams to your export or remove them.
o If different views exist for the diagram, click Select a view to select the view
you want to export. By default, the original view is selected.

13.3 Export a diagram as an image

In the explorer, there are two export functions that transform diagrams into
images: The PNG export creates pixel graphics, the SVG export creates vector
graphics.
To export diagrams, follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, select the diagram you want to export.

2. In the toolbar, click Import / Export > Export PNG (pixel graphics) or
Import / Export > Export SVG (vector graphics).
The export configuration dialog opens.

3. Configure the export. Read more in section Export options.

4. Click Export.
The image is exported. The file is saved to your browser's download folder.

Version 15.14 370

13   Exporting

If you want to embed the image of a diagram in web pages, which means the
image updates automatically with each change on the diagram, read more in sec-
tion Embed a diagram as an image.

13.3.1 Export options

In the export configuration dialog, the following options are available:
o Language
If multiple languages are set up for the workspace, select the language for
the diagram you want to export.
o If different views exist for the diagram, select the view you want to export.
By default, the original view is selected.

13.4 Export a diagram as a SAP Signavio archive

(SGX)
With this function, you can export one or more diagrams as a SAP Signavio
archive from the explorer.
SAP Signavio archives, these are SGX files, allow you to exchange diagrams and
folders between workspaces. SGX is a SAP Signavio-specific file format, which
can't be used by third-party systems.
We recommend to use the SGX export only to exchange diagrams between dif-
ferent workspaces. If users are registered in the same workspace, use the shared
documents folder and collaboration functions to work together on diagrams. Read
more in Working with folders and diagrams and Collaboration.
To export diagrams, follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, select the diagram or folder you want to export.

2. In the toolbar, click Import / Export > Export SAP Signavio archive (SGX).
The export configuration dialog opens.

3. Select more diagrams or folders if you want.

Version 15.14 371

13   Exporting

4. Specify whether to export the latest or all revisions of diagrams with Export
only the latest revision of each diagram.

5. Click Export.
Your selection is exported. The file is saved to your browser's download
folder.

13.5 Export a BPMN diagram as XML

With this function, you can export a BPMN 2.0 diagram as an XML file from the
explorer.
The BPMN 2.0 standard includes an XML notation which enables the platform-
independent exchange of BPMN 2.0 diagrams. For more information about this
XML standard or the BPMN 2.0 specifications, go to [Link]
You can export the following diagram types to BPMN 2.0 XML:
o business process diagrams (BPMN 2.0)
o conversation diagrams (BPMN 2.0)
o choreography diagrams (BPMN 2.0)

If you want to export diagrams of other modeling notations, use the XML export
as described in section Export a diagram as XML.
To export diagrams, follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, select the diagram you want to export.

2. In the toolbar, click Import / Export > Export BPMN 2.0 XML.
The export configuration dialog opens.

3. Configure the export. Read more in section Export options.

4. Click Export.
The XML file is exported. The file is saved to your browser's download
folder.

13.5.1 Export options

In the export configuration dialog, the following options are available:

Version 15.14 372

13   Exporting

o Language
If multiple languages are set up for the workspace, select the language for
the diagram you want to export.
o Include linked subprocesses
Specify whether to also export linked subprocesses.
o If different views exist for the diagram, select the view you want to export.
By default, the original view is selected.

13.6 Export a diagram as XML

With this function, you can export a diagram as an XML file from the explorer, for
example for further processing in third-party systems.

Use this export for diagrams of any modeling notation, except for
BPMN 2.0 diagrams. If you want to export BPMN 2.0 diagrams, use
the BPMN 2.0 XML export as described in section Export a BPMN dia-
gram as XML.

The SAP Signavio-specific XML format produced by this export is a special form
of RDF, the Resource Description Framework which is used for conceptual
description or modeling of information that is implemented in web resources. You
can use XML transformation tools to generate other XML formats from the export
file.
To export diagrams, follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, select the diagram you want to export.

2. In the toolbar, click Import / Export > Export XML.

The diagram is exported. The file is saved to your browser's download
folder.

13.7 Export a DMN diagram as XML

With this function, you can export a DMN 1.2 diagram as an XML file from the
explorer.

Version 15.14 373

13   Exporting

The DMN 1.2 standard includes an XML notation. This notation enables the plat-
form-independent exchange of DMN 1.2 diagrams. For more information about
this XML standard or the DMN 1.2 specifications, go to [Link]
g/spec/DMN/1.2.
To export diagrams, follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, select the diagram you want to export.

2. In the toolbar, click Import / Export > Export DMN 1.2 XML.
The export file is created and prepared for download.

3. To download the export file, click the link Click here to download the XML
file.
The file is saved to your browser's download folder.
The file extension of the exported diagram is DMN.

4. Click OK.
The export is complete.

13.7.1 Customize the export

If dictionary entries are used as data input objects, you can add export names.
This way, you can provide domain-specific vocabulary when executing the expor-
ted XML file.
o To add an export name, specify a technical name for the dictionary entry.

The field Technical name is not available by default in the dictionary. An admin-
istrator must enable the use for data modeling for the respective dictionary cat-
egory. Read more in section Set up a dictionary category for DMN modeling.
The technical name is only used when exporting a DMN diagram as XML. In SAP
Signavio Process Manager and SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub, the
standard dictionary name is always used.

13.7.2 Next steps

Exporting DMN diagrams as drools rules

Version 15.14 374

13   Exporting

13.8 Exporting DMN diagrams as drools rules

SAP Signavio Process Manager enables you to model decision logic with the
easy-to-use editor and to subsequently export DMN diagrams as DRL files to
transfer them into the open source business rules management solution Drools
([Link] Thus, you can easily transfer DMN diagrams into auto-
mated business logic.
You can either export multiple diagrams, one diagram, or just one decision table
and its sub-decisions. The Drools export supports four different export types: Pro-
duction, Development, Test, and Cases. In contrast to Production, Devel-
opment adds additional comments and logging behavior.
You can select which diagram revision to export.
Permissions for the Drools export can be limited to users of specific user groups.
To export decision logic to Drools, open the Explorer. Select one or multiple dia-
grams and go to Import/Export, then Export Drools:

Select one or multiple diagrams and go to 'Import/Export', then 'Export Drools'.

Now you can adjust your selection and set the following export properties:

Version 15.14 375

13   Exporting

o Export revision
You can choose whether to export the latest revision of the diagram that has
been saved in the Editor or the latest revision that was published in SAP Sig-
navio Process Collaboration Hub.
o Export mode
o The option Production mode exports the decision logic to drools. It does
not include comprehensive comments, support for detailed logging, and
test cases.
o Development mode provides additional comments and logging beha-
vior.
o Development mode + test cases provides additional test cases in the
form of .csv files (one .csv file for each top level decision). The .csv files
contain all combinations of all relevant sub-decisions.

Version 15.14 376

13   Exporting

In the export dialog, you can configure the export options in detail.

Click Export to trigger the export process.

Alternatively, you can export a decision table and its sub-decisions directly from
the Editor.
In the Editor, open a decision table and click Import/Export in the top-right corner
of the dialog. There you can chose between generating the Drools export or the
test cases (as described above):

Click 'Import/Export' in the decision table dialog.

Version 15.14 377

13   Exporting

Before starting the export, you can choose whether to include related sub-
decisions (if applicable):

Choose if you want to include related sub-decisions.

As soon as the files are generated, you can download them in you browser:

13.8.1 Customize the export

If dictionary entries are used as data input objects and data definitions, you can
add information to export.
For that, an administrator must enable the use for data modeling for the respect-
ive dictionary category. Then, the configuration dialog for dictionary entries has
two fields more to specify the information:
o Technical name
o Class name

If both names are set in one dictionary entry, only the class name is
exported.

Both names are only used when exporting a DMN diagram as Drools rules. In
SAP Signavio Process Manager and SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub,
the standard dictionary name is always used.
Read how to enable the fields in section Set up a dictionary category for DMN
modeling.

Version 15.14 378

13   Exporting

[Link] Add export names to data input objects

For dictionary entries that are used as data input objects, you can add export
names. This way, you can provide domain-specific vocabulary when executing
the exported DRL file.
o To add an export name, specify a technical name for the dictionary entry.

[Link] Add java source references to data definitions

For dictionary entries that are used as data definitions, you can reference existing
java sources. This way, you can integrate exported DMN Drools rules into exist-
ing execution environments.
o To add a reference, specify a class name for the dictionary entry, for
example [Link]. The exported DRL file then
contains an import statement, for example import [Link]-
[Link].

13.9 Exporting diagrams to Red Hat Decision Manager

projects on GitHub

Access to this feature depends on your license.

SAP Signavio allows you to export process and decision models directly to Red
Hat Decision Manager projects at GitHub. Like this, you can seamlessly integrate
diagrams that have been modeled with SAP Signavio into your Red Hat Decision
Manager projects.
Process models are exported and uploaded as BPMN 2.0 XML files and all linked
decision models are exported and uploaded as DRL files.
To start an export, select a BPMN diagram in the explorer and click Import/Ex-
port - Export RedHat files to GitHub:

Version 15.14 379

13   Exporting

You need to select exactly one diagram. The export will include all
linked DMN and BPMN diagrams.

In case you haven't configured the GitHub integration, yet, you need to authorize
SAP Signavio to push to your GitHub repositories.
Otherwise, proceed at section Pushing diagrams to Red Hat Decision Manager
projects.
Now, click Authorize.

Click 'Authorize'.

Version 15.14 380

13   Exporting

You will be forwarded to GitHub, where you need to grant SAP Signavio per-
mission to push to your repositories:

Re-enter your password to confirm. Upon successful authorization, the following

page will be displayed:

You successfully authorized SAP Signavio to push to your repositories.

Now you can go back to the explorer and export the diagram(s) to GitHub.

13.9.1 Pushing diagrams to Red Hat Decision Manager projects

To start an export, select a BPMN diagram in the explorer and click Import/Ex-
port - Export RedHat files to GitHub.
Now, configure the following parameters:
o The repository you want to push to
o The project path (within the repository)

Version 15.14 381

13   Exporting

o The name of the Java package that will be created

Click Upload to push the files to your repository:

The files are pushed by your user to the default branch (for example main). The
commit message is signavio upload .
An information dialog will inform you about the successful export.

13.10 Translate content with PO files

Access to this feature depends on your license.

You can translate user-created content into all languages that are activated in
your workspace.
You can do this directly, as described in section Translating diagrams. You can
also export the content to be translated outside of SAP Signavio Process Man-
ager.
The following content can be exported for translating:
o regular and custom attributes of the following types:
o single line text

o multi line text

o diagram elements
o linked dictionary entries
o diagram names
o folder names

Not included in the export:

Version 15.14 382

13   Exporting

o names of multi-language custom attributes (their values are included)

o text formatting (the text itself is exported)
o nested links

You export the content and send it to translators. To make the translation avail-
able in your workspace, you import the translated files.

13.10.1 Exported files

The files are exported as a ZIP archive.
The ZIP archive contains the following files:

Version 15.14 383

13   Exporting

Type Number Content Created Action

The file [Link] lists No action neces-
CSV 1 Always
all exported items. sary
This file can be
used as a source
file for all lan-
guages.
o Use this file
for lan-
guages for
The file [Link] con-
tains all translatable which no
POT 1 strings and their location in Always PO file is
the content. It does not
created.
contain any translations.
o For the
import,
save every
language
as a sep-
arate PO
file.
Is created for a
language if
o translations
The content of a PO file are already A PO file can be
is language-specific. available used as a trans-
1 per lan- Each PO file contains
PO or lation source for
guage the translatable strings
the language spe-
and the translations o the export cified.
already available for includes
the language. attributes
with default
values

Version 15.14 384

13   Exporting

Ensure that the original file names and the folder structure are maintained during
translation.

13.10.2 Export content for translation

You can export up to 100 diagrams.

Follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, open Import/Export > Export Diagram Translations.

2. Select the diagrams and folders to be translated.

3. To include linked dictionary entries, enable Include directly linked Dic-

tionary items.

4. Click Export
The selected content is downloaded as a ZIP archive. The file is saved to
your browser's download folder.

13.10.3 Import translated content

o Existing translations are overwritten by a new import.

o A maximum of 100 diagrams can be updated in one import. If
more that 100 diagrams would be affected, the import fails. In
that case, split the PO files into several smaller files.

Once the PO files are translated, you can import them to SAP Signavio Process
Manager.
Follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, open Import/Export > Import Diagram Translations.

2. Click Choose file.
3. In the dialog, select one translated PO file per language and click Import.
The PO files are uploaded. The content is available for all languages that
are activated for the workspace.

Version 15.14 385

13   Exporting

For each language, you can upload one translated PO file at a time. If you have
more than one file for a language, repeat the import.

13.10.4 Next steps

o Translating diagrams

Version 15.14 386

14 Publishing diagrams to external systems

14 Publishing diagrams to external systems

With SAP Signavio Process Manager, you can publish single diagrams to any
intranet or Internet website using the embedding feature. This chapter describes
how to embed a diagram into a blog post or web page.

The embedding functionality of the Explorer

You can embed diagrams in other systems that SAP Signavio Process Manager
supports.

14.1 Enabling diagram embedding

If you want to share diagrams publically, enable diagram embedding.
To enable diagram embedding, proceed as follows:

1. First, select the diagram you want to embed in the Explorer.

2. Then select in the menu Share the Embed diagram entry. The Embed dia-
gram dialog opens.

Version 15.14 387

14 Publishing diagrams to external systems

3. If you have not already done, enable embedding by clicking Share diagram
for read-only access . The read-access for this diagram is now activated.

You have now several options to embed the diagram:

o as an interactive element (embedding)
o as a simple image
o as a Google gadget
o in MediaWiki.

Version 15.14 388

14 Publishing diagrams to external systems

To embed diagrams in your Microsoft SharePoint system, you can simply integ-
rate the whole SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub into Microsoft
SharePoint using a so-called webpart .
To embed a diagram in an external system, you have to explicitly allow the
embedding. This can be reverted later on - in this case, all existing integrations of
SAP Signavio diagrams will be deactivated.
Diagrams can be published on web pages by embedding them with HTML.
Several use cases for embedding are listed and explained in the following
chapters.

14.1.1 Disabling diagram embedding

Embeddings of diagrams can be disabled at any time by withdrawing read access
for these diagrams. This can also be set in the Embed diagram dialog. Click the
link Stop sharing the diagram for read-only access :

Revoking read access disables all embeddings.

Via this link all embeddings (simple image, HTML, Google gadgets, and Medi-
aWiki) become inactive, so that your diagram are no longer viewed on pages
which previously have linked such a link.

Version 15.14 389

14 Publishing diagrams to external systems

14.2 Embed a diagram as an image

You can embed diagrams as images in web pages and this way share the dia-
grams with users outside your workspace. Users can see the diagram image, but
can't edit or comment on it.
Follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, select the diagram you want to embed.

2. In the toolbar, click Share > Embed diagram.

The Embed diagram dialog opens.

3. If the embedding options are disabled, click the link Share diagram for
read-only access to enable them.

4. On the Simple image tab, you'll find a diagram preview and the link con-
taining the image in PNG format.

5. To embed the image, paste the link into your web page.

The embedded diagram image is automatically updated when a change is made

to the diagram.
If you want to use a specific diagram version as an image which never changes,
you can export the diagram in PNG or SVG format and use it in any context. Read
more in section Export a diagram as an image.

14.3 Embedding diagrams as HTML code

You can embed a diagram using a HTML code snippet in a website or blog as an
interactive element. The advantage of this method over a picture export is that
the most current version of the diagram is always available on your page.
The following paragraph explains how to embed diagrams as an HTML code snip-
pet into a blog or a web page like Blogger, TypePad, or WordPress.
To embed a diagram in your website or blog, proceed as follows:

1. First, select the diagram you want to embed in the Explorer.

2. Then select in the menu Share the Embed diagram entry. The Embed dia-
gram dialog opens.

Version 15.14 390

14 Publishing diagrams to external systems

3. Open the Embedding tab and then copy the HTML code snippet.

4. Paste the copied snippet in the desired location of the HTML code of your
page or blog posts.
5. If the diagram is not shared for read access yet, click Share document for
read-only access .

If you click Stop sharing the diagram for read-only access in the embed-
ding menu, the diagram will not be available on the web page and on any
other pages it was embedded in.

6. See a list of Supported blog and content management systems to get an

overview of supported systems.

The embedded diagram does not allow navigation to linked diagrams

or linked documents. If you need the viewers to be able to navigate to
linked diagrams and documents, please use SAP Signavio Process
Collaboration Hub.

14.3.1 The diagram preview

To embed your diagram optimally in your website, you have to option to alter the
diagram's size and then to check size and aspect ration in a preview.

Version 15.14 391

14 Publishing diagrams to external systems

1. Specify the desired Width and Height . By default, it is set to auto , so the
size of the interactive element adapts to the system it is embedded in.
2. Click Preview to check the changes.

In the preview of the generated HTML code is displayed in addition to the inter-
active element. A zoom slider and scrollbars are added automatically.

Version 15.14 392

14 Publishing diagrams to external systems

Version 15.14 393

14 Publishing diagrams to external systems

14.4 Embedding diagrams in MediaWiki

The SAP Signavio Embed Extension for MediaWiki was developed independently
from SAP Signavio by Hauke Pribnow. It provides the possibility to embed dia-
grams in MediaWiki easily. The corresponding developers page can be found at
[Link]

SAP Signavio Embed was developed for MediaWiki 1.15.

14.4.1 Installing the SAP Signavio Embed Extension

Please follow these steps:

1. Create the following file and folder:

[installdir]/extensions/SignavioEmbed/[Link] where installdir stands for
the directory MediaWiki is installed in and which contains the file LocalSet-
[Link] .

2. Copy the code from [Link]

[Link]/wiki/Extension:SignavioEmbed/code into the file and save
the changes.

3. Add following lines to the file [Link] that is contained in the install-
ation directory of MediaWiki:

require_once
("$IP/extensions/SignavioEmbed/[Link]");

// set this to true if you want to enable the function to link sub diagrams:
$sigemLinkSubDiagrams = false;

14.4.2 Embedding a diagram

Follow these steps:

1. Activate embedding on the site the diagram is to be embedded in.

2. Add an empty SAP Signavio tag to your wiki page:

Version 15.14 394

14 Publishing diagrams to external systems

<signavio></signavio>

3. Open the Explorer, select Share - Embed diagram and click the link that
locks the pop-up settings to confirm sharing. Go to the tab MediaWiki and
copy the code that is shown:

Copy the code for embedding a diagram in MediaWiki

4. Add the code into the SAP Signavio tag.

5. Save the wiki page. The diagram will be embedded as an interactive ele-
ment.

14.5 Embedding diagrams in Microsoft SharePoint wiki

pages
The following paragraph explains how to embed single diagrams in Microsoft
SharePoint wiki pages.
Microsoft SharePoint wiki ignores JavaScript parts in HTML code like many wikis/-
content management systems. So if you insert the code and save, JavaScript
parts will be automatically removed. The insertion of the HTML code directly into
the wiki is not possible. You can however add a webpart to the wiki page that con-
tains the HTML/JavaScript code.
Proceed as follows:

Version 15.14 395

14 Publishing diagrams to external systems

1. Go to the wiki page and click Edit page on the upper right side under Web-
site actions .
2. Click Add Webpart and add a Content Editor Webpart .
3. Edit this Webpart and insert the HTML / JavaScript code as Source code .

The exact procedure can differ depending on the Microsoft SharePoint

version you use.

14.6 Embedding diagrams as a Google gadget

Google gadgets can be embedded as interactive elements in various applic-
ations. SAP Signavio Process Manager can create URLs for diagrams that can
be embedded into Google gadgets.
To embed a diagram, proceed as follows:

1. First, select the diagram you want to embed in the Explorer.

2. Then select in the menu Share the Embed diagram entry. The Embed dia-
gram dialog opens.
3. Open the tab Google .

Copy the code from the 'Google'-tab.

4. Cope the URL of the Google gadget.

5. If read access has not been activated yet, click Share diagram for read-
only access .

Version 15.14 396

14 Publishing diagrams to external systems

If you click Stop sharing the diagram for read-only access the diagram will
not be available on the web page and on any other pages it was embedded
in. To read more about how to create a and manage Google gadgets on a
web page, please go to the Google gadget support website at [Link]
[Link]/sites/answer/153306?hl=en.

14.7 Supported blog and content management

systems
You can embed SAP Signavio diagrams in all blog and content management sys-
tems that allow the embedding of HTML snippets.
For example:
o SharePoint Wiki
o Google Gadget
o Jira
o Confluence
o MediaWiki

You can also embed a diagram view of SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub
in 3rd-party applications. These applications include:
o Microsoft SharePoint
o Confluence

and any system that allows embedding of HTML iframes.

Version 15.14 397

15   Workspace administration

15 Workspace administration
Workspace administrators have several tasks:
o managing workspace settings and user access
o enabling features
o integrating third party systems

The first user registering for a workspace is by default an administrator.

15.1 Administrator profile

Workspace administrators have extensive rights and can make profound changes
to the workspace. We recommend to grant this role to users with solid IT skills
who are familiar with both the SAP Signavio products and BPMN.
It is important to communicate and document changes in workspace settings
among your administrative team, so that all administrators are up to date and can
give accurate responses to user queries.

15.2 Add administrators

To add or remove administrator permissions, add or remove the user to or from
the user group Administrators. Read more in section Create workspace admin-
istrators.

15.3 Get started

To get started as a workspace administrator, see section Prepare the workspace
- overview.
You find an overview of the most popular integration scenarios at System integ-
ration scenarios.
An overview of the SAP Signavio Process Manager APIs is available in section
API access to SAP Signavio Process Manager.

Version 15.14 398

15   Workspace administration

15.4 Next steps

o Prepare the workspace - overview
o Create workspace administrators
o System integration scenarios

15.5 Prepare the workspace - overview

This section guides you through the configuration settings of the SAP Signavio
Process Manager workspace. Because some settings depend on each other, we
recommend that you follow the steps in order for the initial setup. You can adjust
the settings later if necessary.

1. Configure general software settings

Configure the name of your workspace and the workspace owning organ-
ization, as well as currency settings. You can also activate a set of links to
help and training resources, or add custom links.

2. Configure language settings for all users

To manage content in multiple languages, you need to configure these lan-
guages in your workspace settings.

3. Add and manage notation subsets

To control complexity in your diagrams, you can create and manage sub-
sets of modeling elements.

4. Add and manage custom attributes

Define custom attributes to add additional information to modeling ele-
ments.

5. Add custom categories for dictionary entries

In the dictionary you manage definitions for objects like documents and IT
systems to reuse them throughout your process landscape. Create your
own dictionary categories that help you structure the dictionary entries.

6. Managing modeling conventions

Version 15.14 399

15   Workspace administration

SAP Signavio Process Manager can check automatically if your process

and decision diagrams follow specific modeling conventions. Configure
these conventions to fit your organization's requirements.

7. Manage attribute visualization layers

With attribute visualization layers, modelers can display attributes directly
on the diagram canvas. You can configure custom attribute visualization
rules.

8. SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub Settings

SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub provides an interface for users to
view and comment on diagrams. You can adapt the design, set up per-
sonalized launchpads for different user groups, and manage attribute vis-
ibility.

9. Creating and managing process documentation templates

With process documentation reports you can generate a comprehensive
overview of your process landscape as a PDF document, for example to
provide documentation to external stakeholders like auditors. You can cre-
ate templates for these reports to specify what information you want to
include and how to present it.

SAP Signavio Process Manager provides various customizable reports as

spreadsheets or PDF files. See section Creating reports.

10. Managing approval workflows

If you are using SAP Signavio Process Manager together with SAP Sig-
navio Process Governance, you can configure approval workflows to
ensure that diagrams have been reviewed before they are published in SAP
Signavio Process Collaboration Hub or made available to specific stake-
holders or systems like workflow engines.

11. Manage security settings

You can set up an allowlist for IP addresses, add trusted domains, and con-
figure password policies.

12. Manage access rights

Create and implement an access management concept.

Version 15.14 400

15   Workspace administration

15.6 Find the workspace ID

For some configurations or when contacting our support team, you need the ID of
your workspace.
For SAP Signavio Process Governance, there is no ID. Our support team might
need different information, depending on the problem you report.

15.6.1 Workspace ID in SAP Signavio Process Manager

Open the explorer and click Help > Workspace information. The workspace ID is
displayed together with the software version and the name of the workspace.

15.6.2 Workspace ID in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub

On the launchpad, click . A menu opens that displays the workspace ID as the
last entry.

15.6.3 Workspace ID in SAP Signavio Process Intelligence

Select a process and open the process settings. On the API tab, the workspace
ID is under Tenant ID.

15.7 Manage users and access rights

SAP Signavio Process Manager has extensive user and access right man-
agement options. The following sections describes user management, user group
management and access rights in detail.

15.7.1 Next steps

o Manage users and groups
o Manage access rights
o Activate feature sets

Version 15.14 401

15   Workspace administration

15.7.2 Manage users and groups

User accounts are created by invitation: You invite users to your workspace by
email, provide them with a license and access rights, and manage their accounts.
In addition, SAP Signavio Process Manager users can invite internal and external
process stakeholders to review and comment on diagrams. Internal users already
have a SAP Signavio account. Externals need to create an account to log in.

If invited users can't access SAP Signavio, check the IP filtering set-
tings of the workspace. Read more in section Set up IP address fil-
tering.

With groups, you can effectively manage a large number of users and their
access rights by creating a group for each organizational role and setting up a
group hierarchy. This simplifies assigning access rights and feature sets to users.
To open the user management, click Settings in the sidebar of SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Collaboration Hub and open the User management tab.

[Link] Users invited for feedback

Internal users

When users who already have an account and a license for this workspace are
invited to review and comment on diagrams, they use their existing email address
and password combination to log in.
Internal users are managed with the user management.

External users

When external users are invited to comment on diagrams, they must create an
account using the link in the invitation email. They can then sign in to SAP Sig-
navio Process Collaboration Hub and view the diagram, for which they have
received an invitation. Instead of a paid license, they are assigned a commenting
license so that they can view and add comments.
The user accounts created in this way are like those created with the user man-
agement, but the following restrictions apply:
o Users can't see any other diagram then the one they were invited to.
o Users aren't assigned to any user group, not even the default groups.

Version 15.14 402

15   Workspace administration

o Users can't access any other SAP Signavio component.

To revoke access, remove the account from the user management. When you
just remove the licenses, external users can still sign in to SAP Signavio Process
Collaboration Hub. They no longer see any diagram, instead they are informed
that their trial has expired.
If needed, you can keep the account and manage it like any other account, for
example assign more licenses and provide more access rights.

[Link] Users invited to a workspace

In the user management, you invite new users to your workspace. You also select
the license type and the user groups you want to assign to the new user.
The license for a new user is bound to the email address to which you send an
invitation. The new user has to register with the same email address to use the
license.
New users are automatically added to the user management once they have
accepted the invitation and logged in to the workspace. You can then manage
their access rights.
By inviting users to your workspace, you are giving them access to all diagrams in
the Shared documents folder, by default. If you want them to manage the work-
space, you add them to the Administrators group.

[Link] Create accounts

If you want to set up auto-provisioning for your workspace so that user

accounts are created automatically on login, read more in section
Single sign-on using SAML.

You have the following options to add users to your workspace:

o Create accounts with bulk invites. The accounts are created when users log
in for the first time. Only then can you change users' access rights.
o Create user accounts instantly. With this option, you can change users'
access rights immediately after you've created the accounts.

Every user you invite to your workspace has the following default permissions.
Note that you can change these permissions by adding users to user groups.

Version 15.14 403

15   Workspace administration

o Viewing and editing diagrams in the folder Shared documents

o Viewing and editing dictionary entries

You can change users' permission in Setup > Manage access rights in the
explorer of SAP Signavio Process Manager.

Create accounts with bulk invites

Note that you can change users' access rights only after they have
logged in for the first time.

Follow these steps:

1. In SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub, click Settings in the sidebar

and open the User management tab.
The user management opens.

2. In the sidebar, click Invites.

3. Paste the email addresses to the field. Email addresses must be separated
by a whitespace.

4. Select one or more licenses from the drop-down list. Each user you invite
will receive the selected licenses.

5. Optionally, you can assign each user to a user group from the drop-down
list. When you create users groups, you can assign licenses that will be
applied to each user of the group.

6. Click Send invites.

Email invitations with a link to the registration page are sent.

Create multiple accounts instantly

Follow these steps:

1. In SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub, click Settings in the sidebar

and click the User management tab.
The user management opens.

2. In the sidebar, click Invites.

Version 15.14 404

15   Workspace administration

3. Paste the email addresses to the field. Email addresses must be separated
by a whitespace.

4. Select one or more licenses from the drop-down list. Each user you invite
will receive the selected licenses.

5. Optionally, you can assign each user to a user group from the drop-down
list. When you create users groups, you can select licenses that will be
applied to each user of the group.

6. Decide whether to send emails or not:

o To send no invitation email to the users when you create their
accounts, select Do not send invitation email. Users will only receive
an email asking them to change their password.
o To send no email at all, select Do not send change password email.
If service provider initiated authentication is enabled for the work-
space, users are redirected to the identity provider, log in there, and
enter the workspace. A SAP Signavio-specific password is not
required.
When SP-initiated authentication is not enabled, users must reset
their password by using the I've forgotten my password link on the
login page.

Read more in Single sign-on using SAML.

7. Click Create users.

User accounts are created instantly. To change the users' permission, go to
the Users tab.

Delete pending email invitation

Follow these steps:

1. In SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub, click Settings in the sidebar

and open the User management tab.
The user management opens.

2. In the sidebar, click Invites.

3. Click the user's email address.

Version 15.14 405

15   Workspace administration

4. On the right side, click Cancel. The link in the email invitation becomes
invalid.

Resend email invitation

Follow these steps:

1. In SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub, click Settings in the sidebar

and open the User management tab.
The user management opens.

2. In the sidebar, click Invites.

3. Click the user's email address.

4. On the right side, click Resend. An email invitation is sent again.

[Link] Delete a user account

To remove a user from a workspace, you delete their account.

When you delete an account, all content in the My Documents folder is deleted
as well. The content the user created in the Shared documents folder, their com-
ments and changes, and the dictionary entries they created remain.
To remove a user, follow these steps:

1. In SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub, click Settings in the sidebar

and open the User management tab.
The user management opens.

2. In the sidebar, click Users.

3. Click the user you want to remove from the workspace.

4. On the right panel, click Delete. The user's account is deleted and the user
can no longer log in.

[Link] Change user settings

You can assign licenses to a user, assign users to groups, and reset the user's
password. To do so, follow these steps:

1. In SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub, click Settings in the sidebar

and open the User management tab.

Version 15.14 406

15   Workspace administration

The user management opens.

2. In the sidebar, click Users.

3. Click the user whose settings you want to change.

4. On the right panel, you have the following options to change user's settings:
o Licenses: Assign a license by selecting a license form the drop-down
list.
o Groups: Assign user to a group by selecting a group from the drop-
down list.
o Reset password: Send a password reset email.
o Remove user: Delete user account, see Delete a user account.

[Link] User groups

Managing access rights for individual users becomes hard to manage with a large
number of users and a lot of content. We recommend that you create user groups
to manage access rights and access to features. With user groups, you can man-
age the permissions of multiple users at once.

Add user groups

To add a group, follow these steps:

1. In SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub, click Settings in the sidebar

and open the User management tab.

The user management opens.

2. In the sidebar, click Groups.

3. On the right panel, enter the group name and click Add a new group. The
new group is added.

Delete user groups

Follow these steps:

1. In SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub, click Settings in the sidebar

and open the User management tab.
The user management opens.

Version 15.14 407

15   Workspace administration

2. In the sidebar, click Groups.

3. Click the group you want to delete.

4. In the right panel, click Delete.

5. Confirm with Yes, delete this group. The group is deleted. Users that are
members of this group are not deleted.

[Link] Change user group settings

Follow these steps:

1. In SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub, click Settings in the sidebar

and open the User management tab.
The user management opens.

2. In the sidebar, click Groups.

3. Click the group which settings you want to change.

You have the following options to change the group's settings:

o Name: Edit the name of the group.
o Add new users to this group automatically: Decide whether to define this
group as the default group.
o Select a group as member: Create a group hierarchy by adding another
group.
o Users: Remove users from the group by clicking X.
o Select a user to add as a member: Select a user from the drop-down list to
add to group.

[Link] Default user groups

When customizing user groups, you can set one or more groups as default
groups. For example, you can use a default group to provide new users with a
basic set of access rights.
To define a group as a default group, activate the option Add new users to this
group automatically in the group settings.
Each user invited through the user management is assigned to all default groups
by default.

Version 15.14 408

15   Workspace administration

To assign the user you want to invite to another group, you can assign user-spe-
cific user groups in the user management dialog when you set up the invitation.
Users created with SAML or CSV API are also assigned to the default groups,
unless you specify other user groups by configuration.

[Link] Create workspace administrators

In SAP Signavio Process Manager, administrators have extensive permissions to

manage workspace settings and user access. The only thing they can't access or
manage is the content in a modelers My documents folders.

Administrators can make numerous changes to your workspace. For

this reason, we recommend enabling people with tool-specific know-
ledge and experiences in business process management and process
modeling.

To create an administrator account, you create a user account and assign it to the
Administrators user group. The user then receives administrative rights for your
workspace.
To revoke administrative rights, remove the user from the Administrators group.

[Link] Next steps

Set up IP address filtering

Manage users and access rights

15.7.3 Manage access rights

You need an administrator account to use this function.

This section describes how to define access rights to folders, diagrams, the dic-
tionary, and dictionary categories. For information how to activate specific feature
sets, see section Activate feature sets.
You can assign access rights for users and user groups.
Access rights are additive. Once users have access by being in a user group with
access, the access rights cannot be taken away by adding the users to an addi-
tional group with less access or by setting user-specific access rights.

Version 15.14 409

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Folder structure

If users are not members of any group initially, they are able to read, write, delete
or publish in all folders and models in the Shared documents folder.
If you grant users access to a diagram and they don't have access to the folder
containing the diagram, they can only view the diagram and the diagram path.
They don't have access to any other diagrams in this folder. To restrict access
rights based on organizational roles, we recommend setting up a folder structure
that reflects the different access rights variations.

[Link] User groups

We recommend to create user groups with access rights that match your organ-
izational requirements. See section Manage users and groups.

[Link] Set access rights for folders and diagrams

If you give users access rights to a folder, they also have access to all subfolders
and diagrams in that folder.
To define access rights, follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, go to Setup > Manage users & access rights. The user
management dialog opens.

2. Open the Access rights tab. The tree structure shows all content of the
Shared documents folder.

3. Select the element for which you want to define access rights.

4. From the drop-down lists, select the users or user groups and the access
right types. You find detailed descriptions of the access rights below.

5. Click Add. The added users and their access rights are added to the list.

Limit access to specific folder content

Journey models and uploaded files always inherit the access rights of
the folder in which they are stored. This means you can't limit access
rights to specific journey models or uploaded files in a folder.

When you grant access to a folder, users have access to the complete folder. You
can limit the access to specific folder content.

Version 15.14 410

15   Workspace administration

If you grant users access to a diagram and they don't have access to the folder
containing the diagram, they can only view the diagram and the diagram path.
They don't have access to any other diagrams in this folder.
Follow these steps:

1. Select users or user groups that have access rights.

2. Click limit.

3. Select the content to which users should keep access.

4. Save with Confirm.

Example:

You can't limit access rights for folders that have inherited their access rights
from a parent folder directly. You need to limit access from the parent folder
instead.

Version 15.14 411

15   Workspace administration

Available access rights for diagrams and folders

Access Details
right
Hub (H) View published content in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub
Read View unpublished content in the simulation tool, the revision comparison tool,
(R) the commenting view, and in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub
Write Edit and save content in the editor
(W)
Delete Delete and move content
(D)
To delete and move content between folders, users need write access
for both folders and delete access for the folder from which the content
is removed.

Publish To publish content and move published content

(P)
o To publish diagrams in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub
o To move published elements such as diagrams and folders

The commenting feature in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub

is a read access, since users who have been invited with the function
Invite anyone for feedback can add comments to a diagram, but
aren't able to edit it.

[Link] Set access rights for the dictionary

By default, users can access the complete dictionary. You can limit access to spe-
cific dictionary categories and subcategories.
To define access rights for the complete dictionary, follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, go to Setup > Manage users & access rights. The user
management dialog opens.

2. Open the Access rights tab.

3. Select the dictionary folder.

Version 15.14 412

15   Workspace administration

4. From the drop-down lists, select the users or user groups and the access
rights. You find detailed descriptions of the access rights below.

5. Click Add. The access rights you set are listed.

To limit access rights for the dictionary to specific categories, follow these steps:

1. In the Access rights tab, select the folder Dictionary.

2. Select users or user groups that have access rights set.

3. Click limit.

4. Select the dictionary categories to which users should keep access.

5. Confirm in the dialog.

Example:

When you remove access to a dictionary category, entries from this category are
no longer listed for the users, are not included in their search results, and can't be
used by them when creating diagrams.

Users can always view dictionary entries in the diagrams where they
are used, even without having access to the dictionary category.
When users have limited access to the dictionary, they are no longer
listed when you select the dictionary folder.

Access rights for the dictionary

Access rights can be set for the complete dictionary or dictionary categories.

Version 15.14 413

15   Workspace administration

Access Function
right
View (V) View dictionary entries in the editor and in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration
Hub. In the editor, the dictionary entries can be used during modeling.
Write Edit and save dictionary entries.
(W)
Delete Delete and move content
(D)
To delete and move dictionary entries between categories, users need
write access for both categories and delete access for the category
from which the entry is removed.

Publish Publish dictionary entries in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.

(P)

The access rights for dictionary categories only affect dictionary entries in these
categories.

[Link] Change access rights

To edit access rights, you use the process for adding access rights.
To remove limitations to specific content, you need to grant full access to a folder
or the dictionary first.

[Link] Remove access rights

To remove access rights, follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, go to Setup > Manage users & access rights. The user
management dialog opens.

2. Open the Access rights tab. The tree structure shows all content of the
Shared documents folder and of the dictionary.

3. Select the element for which you want to remove access rights. Users and
their access rights are listed.

4. Click Remove. If the Remove button isn't visible, click the parent folder in
the Inherited from column, and remove the access right there.

5. Confirm with Yes.

Version 15.14 414

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Next steps

Manage users and groups

15.7.4 Activate feature sets

You activate specific feature sets in the user group management dialog. You can
provide each modeler group with the feature sets they require to perform their
tasks. For example, this prevents users from uncontrollably creating diagrams or
dictionary entries in your workspace.

1. Open the Explorer and click Setup - Manage access rights. The user man-
agement dialog opens.
2. Go to the User groups tab.
3. Select the desired user group and activate or deactivate the features accord-
ing to your requirements.

Editing a feature set for a user group.

4. Click Save feature sets to confirm and save the changes.

The following table lists all available feature sets:

Version 15.14 415

15   Workspace administration

Feature set Description

Decision Man- Allows users to create and edit DMN diagrams, but doesn't
ager - DMN
requirements allow creating and editing the decision logic in such diagrams.
modeling
(without decision
logic)
Decision Man- Allows users to create and edit DMN diagrams including the
ager - complete
decision logic.

Decision Man- Allows users to export decision tables and diagrams as described in
ager - export Exporting DMN diagrams as drools rules.
Drools
ETL - Analyst Allows users to manage transformations and the load part of the data
Role model. Users can also see integrations.
ETL - Reader Allows users read-only access to the data model for ETL.
Role
ETL - Superuser Allows users to create and manage data models for analysis, create
Role and manage integrations and create and manage data sources for
ETL.
General - Dia- Allows users to import and export diagrams in formats that can
gram Import/Ex-
port be transferred between workspaces and tools.

When this feature set is disabled, users can still

export models as file formats that can't be used for
importing, for example PDF and PNG files. The
export of these file types can't be deactivated.

General - Dic- Allows users to import dictionary entries from XLSX (Microsoft Excel)
tionary Import/Ex- spreadsheets.
port
General - Allows users to generate basic reports, see section Creating reports.
Reports (Basic & Includes all reports with the exception of cost, resource consumption
Documentation) and resource consumption analysis report.
General - reports Allows users to generate cost and resource consumption analysis
(Cost & reports.
Resources)

Version 15.14 416

15   Workspace administration

Feature set Description

General - Upload Allows users to upload files to SAP Signavio Process Manager.
files
SAP Signavio Allows users to create and edit diagrams.
Process Man-
ager - edit pro- Note: To create and edit DMN diagrams, users need the fea-
cesses ture set Decision Manager - DMN requirements modeling
(without decision logic) or Decision Manager - complete .
SAP Signavio Access to SAP Signavio Process Intelligence.
Process Intel-
ligence

SAP Signavio Allows users to create processes in SAP Signavio Process

Process Intel- Intelligence.
ligence -
Create process

15.7.5 About Licenses

Workspace administrators must assign a license to every user in a workspace.
Licenses are bound to a specific workspace, so the following rules apply:
o Inviting new users doesn't create new workspaces.
o Users having a license for another workspace can't access your workspace
unless you assign a license of your workspace to the user.
o If you remove a user from your workspace, the user's license assignments
and access rights for other workspaces remain unchanged.

Licenses are also bound to the email addresses you specify when inviting new
users. The new users can only use this email address to log in.
When you invite users via the user management, you select the license you want
to assign. If you need more licenses, the user management dialog provides you
with information for a license purchase on the tab New users.

[Link] License types

There are different types of user licenses for modeling users and Hub users.

Version 15.14 417

15   Workspace administration

Modeling users

Modeling users have the full functionality of your SAP Signavio Process Manager
edition available, and additionally access to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration
Hub. You find an overview of the features that are available per edition on the
SAP Signavio website.

Hub users

The main application for Hub users is SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.
Hub users have access to a limited feature set in SAP Signavio Process
Manager:
o They can create folders, as well as create and edit BPMN diagrams in Quick-
Model.
o They can use the diagram comparison tool, see section Compare
revisions.
o They can export diagrams as PNG, SVG, and PDF files, see Exporting.
o They can create reports, see section Creating reports.
o They have read access to the dictionary, see section The dictionary.
o They can use the discussion and sharing features, see Your launchpad.

You can also use feature sets to add additional feature restrictions on Hub users.

This license type is by default available to new customers. If you

registered your workspace before version 11.11.0 (January 2018),
only SAP Signavio can provide this license type. Please contact our
SAP Signavio service experts on the SAP ONE Support Launchpad.

[Link] Commenting License

SAP Signavio Process Manager users can invite external users, who do not have
a license to the workspace, for feedback. Then, the external users automatically
get a commenting license. They can only view the diagram for which they have
received the invitation in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub and can view
and add comments. As these external users also have to create a user account,
you can manage them in the user management. Read more in section Manage
users and groups.

Version 15.14 418

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Next steps

Manage users and groups

15.7.6 Possible issues: JavaScript & cookies

SAP Signavio Process Manager requires JavaScript to run. Cookies are required
to authenticate your browser during the login. If one of those functionalities is dis-
abled, problems will occur.
o When trying to login, you are redirected to the login page again, even if the
username and password entered are valid. In this case, cookies are deac-
tivated in your browser.
o Instead of SAP Signavio Process Manager, a blank page is displayed. In this
case, JavaScript is deactivated.

If you are using Linux/OSX/Windows 7 or higher and your browser is up to

date, JavaScript and cookies should be activated by default.

To change these settings, you may need administrator rights on your

account. Please contact your system administrator if you cannot
access and/or change the settings described in this chapter.

If you have the printed version of this manual, please check how to activate
JavaScript and/or cookies in your browser's online user guide.
The links to the corresponding webpages are provided below.

[Link] Activating JavaScript for all browsers

[Link]

[Link] Activating Cookies

To use SAP Signavio Process Manager, you need to have Cookies activated.
Read more about cookies at:
o Internet Explorer:
[Link]
explorer-delete-manage-cookies

Version 15.14 419

15   Workspace administration

o Firefox:
[Link]
site-preferences
o Chrome:
[Link]
o Safari:
[Link]
DE

15.7.7 Manage security settings

To enhance IT security, you can limit the access to your workspace by filtering IP
addresses. In addition, you can define password policies to enforce strong pass-
words.
The security settings apply to every user currently in the workspace and also to
all future users.

[Link] Set up IP address filtering

Users of the on premises edition cannot set up IP address filters.

The IP address filter allows you to define a list of trusted IP addresses that can
access SAP Signavio Process Manager and SAP Signavio Process Collaboration
Hub. Devices with unlisted IP addresses can't access the workspace even with a
valid username/password combination. This can be useful, for example, if you
want to restrict access to your workspace or SAP Signavio Process Collaboration
Hub to one or more specific companies.
For specifying IP addresses, the following rules apply:
o The IP address filter is based on IPv4, therefore IPv6 addresses cannot be
added to the list of trusted IP addresses.
o Only Internet IP addresses are accepted. Local area network (LAN) IP
addresses can't be listed because they depend on the local network con-
figuration.

Version 15.14 420

15   Workspace administration

o You must specify IP addresses in classless inter-domain routing (CIDR)

notation. With the CIDR suffix, you specify whether to filter for an exact IP
address or a range of IP addresses. The smaller the number after the slash,
the greater the range of IP addresses.
Example:
[Link]/8 –> range from [Link] to [Link]
[Link]/16 –> range from [Link] to [Link]
[Link]/24 –> range from [Link] to [Link]
[Link]/32 –> exactly [Link]

The operating administrator's IP address is added automatically, so if you are set-

ting up the list of trusted IP addresses and are using a static IP address, you get
access from your current device automatically.
To filter for IP addresses, follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, click Setup > Edit security configuration.

2. Check Activate IP Filtering.

3. Enter a CIDR IP address and click Add.

The IP address is added to the list of trusted addresses.

4. Save your changes.

The IP address filter is active.

To remove an IP address from the list of trusted addresses, select the IP address
and click Remove.
To completely deactivate the IP address filtering, disable the option Activate IP
Filtering.

[Link] Trusted domains

SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub can only be embedded in

third-party systems via iframes if trusted domains are used. If a
domain not included in the trusted domains is used, web browsers
don't load the page, and instead show a security violation page to the
users.

Version 15.14 421

15   Workspace administration

To embed SAP Signavio products in an iframe using trusted domains, you have
the following options:
o Use one of the public trusted domains
o Add workspace-specific trusted domains

Use public trusted domains

Some common third-party tools use domains that are public trusted domains.
When you embed SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub in the following
domains, no further action is required on your side:
o *.[Link]
o *.[Link]
o *.[Link]

Add workspace-specific trusted domains

When you want to embed SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub in other third-
party tools, you have to add the domains to the security configuration and adapt
the URLs.
Follow these steps:

1. In the Explorer, open Setup> Edit security configuration.

2. In the section Domain policies, add the trusted domains.

3. Add the parameter ?t=<workspace_id> to the URLs used for embedding.

[Link] Define a password policy

To enforce the use of secure passwords, you can implement a password policy .
This allows you to prevent access security issues even if many users have
access to your workspace.
Password policy applies whenever users set a password.
To define a password policy, follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, click Setup > Edit security configuration.

2. In the section Password policies, select the requirements that passwords

have to fulfill (see list Configuration options for password policy).

Version 15.14 422

15   Workspace administration

3. Save your changes.

The password policy is active and users need to choose a password that ful-
fills the password policy.

[Link] Configuration options for the password policy

o Enforce SSO login
Define whether users can log in using their email and password on the login
page or whether to enforce SSO using SAML. Read more in section Single
sign-on using SAML.
o Complexity requirements

A password is accepted when it contains at least three of the following

requirements:
o at least one capital letter (A to Z)
o at least one lower case letter (a to z)
o at least one number (0-9)
o at least one special character (!,§,$,%,&,?,#)
o Consider user name
Users can't use their first or last name in a password, no matter if written in
upper or lower case.
o Consider user name (strict)

Users can't use three or more letters in the same order as in the user's first
or last name in a password, no matter if written in upper or lower case.
o Minimum password age
Users can't change a password, unless the specified number of days since
the last change has passed.
o Maximum password age
Users are prompted to change their password after the specified number of
days has passed.
o Minimum password length

Version 15.14 423

15   Workspace administration

Define the minimum length of a password. Usually, longer passwords are

more secure than shorter ones.
o Maximum password length
Define the maximum length of a password.
o Password history
Users can't reuse passwords immediately. For example, if the number is set
to 5, the last 5 used passwords can't be set as a new password.

15.7.8 Single sign-on using SAML

You need an administrator account to use this function.

With SAP Signavio Process Manager version 14.6, administrators

don't need SAP Signavio support anymore to configure single sign-on.
If you had already set up SSO with SAML for older versions, you must
update both the IdP and the SP configuration for security reasons.
To update your configuration, follow the steps in section Configure
your IdP. In addition, you must enable the option Use the latest SAML
2.0 capabilities in the SSO settings as described in section Enable
SSO using SAML.

Single sign-on (SSO) is an authentication method. When SSO is set up, users
can access different applications by logging in with only one account. SAP Sig-
navio supports SSO authentication using the Security Assertion Markup Lan-
guage (SAML), both for the SaaS and the on-premises solution.
SAML is a standard to exchange authentication and authorization data between a
service provider (SP) and an identity provider (IdP). SAP Signavio supports IdP-
initiated authentication and SP initiated authentication.
SAP Signavio acts as an SP and agrees to trust an IdP to authenticate users.
When a user wants to access SAP Signavio, SAP Signaviosends an authen-
tication request to the IdP. The identity provider validates the user and generates
an authentication assertion that allows the user to log in to the workspace with
their credentials.

Version 15.14 424

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Just-in-time provisioning

When SSO using SAML is enabled, you can specify that users automatically get
an account when they access SAP Signavio for the first time. This is called just-
in-time (JIT) provisioning and allows users not to have to register with SAP Sig-
navio themselves.
For JIT provisioning to work, the following conditions must be met:
o A user must be authenticated successfully with the IdP.
o The response from the IdP contains the mandatory attributes. Read more in
section Configure your IdP.
o At least 1 unassigned license for SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub is
available.

With JIT provisioning enabled, the following happens:

o When a user logs in for the first time, a new account is automatically created.
o When a user logs in who already has a SAP Signavio account and an IdP
name ID, any IdP change on their first name, last name, and email address will
be automatically updated in the SAP Signavio user management.

The authentication assertion sent by the IdP can contain information on licenses
and user group assignments, and the following applies:
o A user receives a license that is specified in the IdP response, given that such
a license is available in the workspace.
o A user is assigned to all groups that are specified in the IdP response, given
that these user groups exist. User groups that don't exist are ignored.
o If a user is assigned to a user group that isn't included in the IdP response, the
user is removed from this group.

When JIT provisioning is disabled, only users with an existing account can
access the workspace. Other users will receive an error message. Read more on
user management in section Manage users and groups.

[Link] Set up SSO using SAML

To set up SSO using SAML, you must configure the IdP and enable SSO for your
workspace. Then, you can invite users.
All steps are described in detail in the following sections.

Version 15.14 425

15   Workspace administration

Configure your IdP

You can configure all third-party IdPs that support SAML 2.0, for example:
o ADFS 2.0/3.0
o Okta
o OneLogin

For the configuration, the SP and the IdP must exchange metadata files.
Follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, click Setup > Manage SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub authentication.

The configuration dialog opens.

2. Select SAML 2.0 based authentication from the drop-down list.

The configuration dialog opens.

3. Download the IdP metadata file. To do so, click the link Download the
SAML service provider metadata in the lower dialog area.

4. Upload this file to your IdP or configure your IdP manually with the inform-
ation from the file.

5. In your IdP configuration, set the SAML response attributes as follows:

Version 15.14 426

15   Workspace administration

Attribute Mandatory Description

It's the primary identifier, must be unique, and

Name ID yes doesn't change. For example, use the internal
employee ID.

email yes Email address of a user

first_name yes First name of a user

last_name yes Last name of a user

signavio_ The name of the license that you want to

licenses_ no assign to a user, for example Enterprise Plus
v1 Edition.

The names of the groups that you want to

assign to a user.

signavio_
no
groups_v1 The following 5 characters can't be
used in group names:

"<>'&

IdP configuration is complete. You can continue with enabling SSO for your
workspace. Read more in the next section Enable SSO using SAML.

Example section from a valid IdP response

<Subject>
<NameID>ID12345</NameID>
<SubjectConfirmation Method="urn:oasis:names:tc:SAML:2.0:cm:bearer">
<SubjectConfirmationData InResponseTo="ONELOGIN_6f26b11b-b290-4d2c-b79d-
c46010fe686c" NotOnOrAfter="2020-10-23T11:49:29.291Z"
Recipient="[Link]
0f/login"/>
</SubjectConfirmation>
</Subject>
<Conditions NotBefore="2019-10-23T11:44:29.258Z" NotOnOrAfter="2019-10-
23T12:44:29.258Z">
<AudienceRestriction>

Version 15.14 427

15   Workspace administration

<Audience>[Link]
c0f/metadata</Audience>
</AudienceRestriction>
</Conditions>
<AttributeStatement>
<Attribute Name="signavio_licenses_v1">
<AttributeValue>SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub</AttributeValue>
<AttributeValue>Workflow</AttributeValue>
</Attribute>
<Attribute Name="email">
<AttributeValue>[Link]@[Link]</AttributeValue>
</Attribute>
<Attribute Name="first_name">
<AttributeValue>John</AttributeValue>
</Attribute>
<Attribute Name="last_name">
<AttributeValue>Doe</AttributeValue>
</Attribute>
<Attribute Name="signavio_groups_v1">
<AttributeValue>Employees</AttributeValue>
<AttributeValue>Sales</AttributeValue>
<AttributeValue>Process owners</AttributeValue>
</Attribute>
</AttributeStatement>

Enable SSO using SAML

Before you start, you need the configuration metadata from your IdP. Read more
in the previous section Configure your IdP.
Follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, click Setup > Manage SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub authentication.
The configuration dialog opens.

2. Select SAML 2.0 based authentication from the drop-down list.

The configuration dialog opens.

3. To enable IdP-initiated authentication, select Enable SAML 2.0 authen-

tication.
IdP-initiated authentication means that a user who logs in to the IdP must
select SAP Signavio, and is then redirected to your workspace and logged
in.

4. With SP-initiated authentication, a user who is logged out from SAP Sig-
navio and tries to access your workspace, is redirected to the IdP, must log
in to the IdP, and is then directed back to SAP Signavio and logged in.

Version 15.14 428

15   Workspace administration

To additionally enable SP-initiated authentication, select Allow service pro-

vider initiated authentication.

5. For SP-initiated authentication, the initial request sent by the SP to the IdP
can be signed with a certificate. If the authentication request is signed, the
IdP has additional means to verify that the request was sent by the SP.
To enable signing the authentication request, select Sign authentication
request.

6. To enable just-in-time provisioning using SAML, select Create new user

accounts automatically.

7. If disabled, enable Use the latest SAML 2.0 capabilities.

Latest SAML 2.0 capabilities ensure secure authentication and

furthermore provide additional capabilities like assigning user
groups and licenses when provisioning users.
If you are configuring SSO for the first time, this option is enabled
by default and you must keep it enabled in order to successfully
enable SSO for your workspace.

If you've already configured SSO in SAP Signavio Process Man-

ager version earlier than 14.6, you must first update your IdP con-
figuration as described in section Configure your IdP and only
then enable the option Use the latest SAML 2.0 capabilities
manually.
For convenience, it is automatically enabled once an IdP-ini-
tiated SSO is successfully executed using the updated IdP con-
figuration.

8. Paste the configuration metadata provided by your IdP to the field XML
Metadata.

9. Confirm with Save settings and close the dialog.

Hint on links in invitation emails

SAP Signavio Process Manager users can sent invitations emails to internal and
external stakeholders.

Version 15.14 429

15   Workspace administration

If single sign-on is enabled but not enforced in your workspace, these invitations
emails contain 2 web links:
o Access using single sign-on (requires a company email account)
The following applies:
o Users who are logged in to their company system are directly directed
to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.
o Logged out users need to enter their company credentials to log in.
o New users need to register with their company email and get a SAP
Signavio account.
o Access as a guest (you will be asked to register with your name and
email address)
The following applies:
o Users with a guest account log in with their guest account credentials.
o New users need to register.

Read more on the invitation features of SAP Signavio Process Manager in sec-
tion Inviting stakeholders to comment on a diagram.

Invite new users by email

If SP-initiated authentication and JIT provisioning is enabled, you can invite users
to your workspace by sending them an email.
Follow these steps:

1. Get the workspace link:

o Share a link to any content within your workspace, for example by
copying the URL from your browser address bar.
o Create a link to the workspace by adding the workspace ID as an URL
parameter, for example [Link]
ID>

2. Paste the link to an email and send it to the users you want to log in with
SSO using SAML.

Version 15.14 430

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Enforce SSO to disable login with credentials

When SSO is enforced for your workspace, users can't log in using their SAP Sig-
navio credentials. All users have to log in through the IdP.
If SP-initiated authentication is enabled, users are logged in when clicking a link
to any content within your workspace, for example a published diagram in SAP
Signavio Process Collaboration Hub, or a link that includes the workspace ID as
an URL parameter.
When SSO is configured but not enforced for your workspace, the following
applies:
o Users can log in through the IdP.
o Users can also log in by entering their email and password on the SAP Sig-
navio login page.
o If SP-initiated authentication is enabled, a logged out user is always redirected
to the IdP when clicking a link to content in your workspace.

When you've set up enforced SSO, make sure SSO is working before
logging out from your workspace. Otherwise all users, including you,
won't be able to access the workspace. To test the SSO configuration,
log out and log in again with another user account.
In case of problems, please contact our SAP Signavio service experts
on the SAP ONE Support Launchpad so they can disable this option
for you.

To enforce SSO, follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, click Setup > Edit security configuration.

The configuration dialog opens.

2. In the Password policies section, enable Enforce SSO login.

3. Confirm with Save.

[Link] Next steps

Manage access rights

Manage security settings

Version 15.14 431

15   Workspace administration

15.7.9 Managing access to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration

Hub for Active Directory services

This chapter only applies to the on-premises version.

This section describes how to manage access rights for Active Directory users
and user groups on SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.
A prerequisite is that you have integrated SAP Signavio Process Collaboration
Hub with your Microsoft Active Directory. For an overview of authentication
options to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub, see Granting read-only
access to diagrams.
Modeling users with the corresponding permissions have the possibility to pub-
lish diagrams to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.
If you have purchased and configured the corresponding module, you can set
read access permissions for diagrams published in SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub based on users and user groups in a shared domain. SAP Sig-
navio uses the Windows network account list to give users access to SAP
Signavio Process Collaboration Hub with their Windows network access cre-
dentials.
When using SAP Signavio's on-premises version, you can integrate SAP Sig-
navio Process Collaboration Hub with Active Directory. For further details, see
section Configuring SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub & Active Dir-
ectory in the Administrator guide.

[Link] Managing read access to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub

As a user of the publishing module, you are able to determine fine-grained

access to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub. You allow other users to see
diagrams as well as folders in your workspace.

Granting read access to a diagram in SAP Signavio Process Col-

laboration Hub does not enable SAP Signavio Process Collaboration
Hub users to open the diagram in other applications like the Editor or
Explorer.

Version 15.14 432

15   Workspace administration

You can grant read access to users that are logged into your domain. It is also
possible grant access rights to entire user groups.
To define read access, proceed as follows:

1. In the explorer, click in the Setup > Manage access rights. The user man-
agement dialog opens.

2. Switch to the Read access tab.

3. Select a folder or diagram in the left navigation column. The dialog shows
the access rights connected to the object and, if existent, the folder the right
was inherited from.

Select the folder you want to configure read access for.

4. Navigate to the folder or diagram. There are two ways to add access rights
for a user:

Version 15.14 433

15   Workspace administration

o Type in a user name by using the search functionality - as soon as you

start typing, a drop down list with matching users appears. Select the
user name.
o Click the input field and select a user name from the drop down list. To
navigate the sites, use the arrows below the list.
Click Add. The user can now be found in the list of granted access rights.

5. Read access will be established for the user.

[Link] Removing read access

Follow the first three steps in the paragraph above and continue as follows:

1. Select the user you want to remove the read access from.

2. Click Remove next to the user name.

If you cannot see the remove option for a diagram or folder, the
read access right was inherited from a parent folder. Navigate to
this folder by clicking its name in the column Inherited from.

3. Confirm the action with Yes.

Version 15.14 434

15   Workspace administration

15.8 Configure general software settings

To configure the general settings for all modelers, open the explorer and click
Setup > Edit general configurations.

15.8.1 Explorer settings

Name of this Sets the name that shows up in the workspace selection for
workspace users who are members of multiple workspaces. By default, the
name is the name of the organization you entered when regis-
tering the workspace, plus workspace owner's full name in par-
entheses.

Organization Sets the name of your organization, which is displayed in dia-

owning this grams you create with QuickModel and in most reports.
workspace

Enable private If you enable a private My documents folder, any content in this folder
folder 'My doc- can only be accessed by the user owning the folder. This folder can't be
uments' for accessed by any other user on the system, not even administrators.
every user

Currency Defines the default currency used in the simulation tool and in
different reports.

Automatic Lets you define whether and when commentators' email

subscription addresses should be added to an email subscription that
informs them about changes in the corresponding documents.

Table Defines what information the Explorer's list view is displaying.

columns More detailed instructions are available under Working with
folders and diagrams.

15.8.2 Editor settings

Color palette
Enables you to customize the colors of the color palette that is accessible in the
Editor. To adjust a color, overwrite one of the default hexadecimal values in the
palette and press enter to see the color preview change.
Enforcing matching dictionary item types

Version 15.14 435

15   Workspace administration

By default, mappings between BPMN elements and Dictionary category entries are
enforced, as recommended by BPMN. When this check box is enabled, the following
BPMN element types only references Dictionary entries in the corresponding cat-
egories:
IT system elements reference entries in the IT Systems category
Data object elements reference entries in the Documents category
Task elements reference entries in the Activities category
Pool/Lane elements reference entries in the Organizational Units or IT Systems cat-
egories.
This preselection keeps Dictionary entry references consistent and prevents an
unsuitable usage of Dictionary entry references. However, this restriction can be dis-
abled by clearing the Enforce matching dictionary item types check box.

15.8.3 Help settings

Here, you can enable a set of help options that show news and tips about our soft-
ware and link to further information about Business Process and Business
Decision Management.
By default, all options are activated. You can also define custom help options that
can for example link to sites in your intranet. You can define these settings sep-
arately for the explorer and SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.

15.8.4 General settings

Enable the upload of documents/pictures
Enable this option to allow users to upload documents and pictures.
Enable content subscriptions
Enable this option to allow users to subscribe to content such as process models. If a
user subscribes to content, the user receives email notifications on changes. When
you disable this option, user can't subscribe to workspace content. For already exist-
ing subscriptions, email notifications are no longer sent.

15.9 Configure language settings for all users

You can define the different languages that diagrams can be translated into.
Whenever a diagram is created or edited, you can for example translate labels of
modeling elements and element documentation to each language that is defined
in the workspace. Users then have the option to select the suitable language.

Version 15.14 436

15   Workspace administration

o We recommend to only configure your workspace for multiple lan-

guages if you actually use them.
o Users of SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub can switch
between languages that are defined in the workspace in their per-
sonal profile.

15.9.1 Add a language

Follow these steps:

1. Open the explorer and click Setup> Define languages.

2. The configuration dialog opens.

3. Choose the languages you want to add to your workspace:

4. Prioritize the languages by moving them up the list.

The language on position 1 is the default language of your workspace, it is
used as the standard language for all diagrams that are created.

5. Click Save to apply your changes.

15.9.2 Set a default language

The default language of your workspace is used as the standard language for all
diagrams that are created.

Changing the default language has a major impact on your workspace.

For example, you have to open and save all diagrams again for a cor-
rect diagram preview. You need to contact our support team to get an
execution code for this change.

To set a default language, follow these steps:

1. Open the explorer and click Setup> Define languages.

2. In the configuration dialog, prioritize the languages by moving them up the

list.

Version 15.14 437

15   Workspace administration

The language on position 1 is the default language of your workspace.

3. Click Save to apply your changes.

15.9.3 Remove a language

Follow these steps:

1. Open the explorer and click Setup> Define languages.

2. In the configuration dialog, click Remove next to the language you want to
remove.

3. Click Save to apply your changes.

15.10 Settings for SAP Signavio Journey Modeler

This section provides a quick overview about the necessary information to set up
SAP Signavio Journey Modeler for your users.

15.10.1 Licenses
To activate SAP Signavio Journey Modeler for your users, you need to assign
SAP Signavio Journey Modeler licenses in the new user management. You can
access the user management in two ways:
o In the settings for SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub, click User Man-
agement.
o In SAP Signavio Process Manager, go to Setup > Manage users &groups.

Details on user management can be found in section Manage users and groups.

15.10.2 Access rights to journey models

At the moment, journey models inherit the access rights of the folder in which
they are stored. Read more about access rights to folders in section Manage
access rights.

Version 15.14 438

15   Workspace administration

15.10.3 Layout and formatting

Elements of a journey model can have different colors. How to adjust the colors
available in your workspace is described in section Editor settings.

15.11 Managing approval workflows

We are working on expanding and improving the functions related

to process governance. This section will be completely revised
soon.
For more information about SAP Signavio Process Governance, con-
tact sales@[Link].

You need an administrator account to use this function.

SAP Signavio Process Manager enables you to define and manage approval
workflows for publishing diagrams. Approval workflows route a diagram to a pre-
defined list of people, who need to approve that the diagram is ready to be pub-
lished. This enables your organization to ensure the quality of all diagrams
published in the SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.
You can define approval workflows in SAP Signavio Process Governance . To
define approval workflows, you need to purchase licenses for SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Governance in addition to your SAP Signavio Process Manager licenses.
To use the approval workflow feature, click Setup , then Manage approval work-
flows in the top drop-down menu of the Explorer.

15.11.1 Activating the approval workflow feature

If you opened the settings as explained above and if approval workflows are inact-
ive a dialog opens for you to activate the feature. Activate the check box below
the short introduction text and click Activate :

Version 15.14 439

15   Workspace administration

Activate the approval workflow feature.

Click Next to confirm and start configuring the approval workflow preferences:

The activation was successful.

Now, you can manage your approval workflows.

15.11.2 Configuring Approval Workflows

To effectively use approval workflows, you should restrict your user's

rights to publish diagrams in the SAP Signavio Process Collaboration
Hub. Read more about access rights management in the section Man-
age users and access rights .

Now that the approval workflow feature is active, click Setup , then Manage
Approval Workflows in the top drop-down menu of the Explorer in order to open
the following configuration dialog:

Version 15.14 440

15   Workspace administration

The approval workflow configuration dialog

The dialog enables you to:

o Open your workspace in SAP Signavio Process Governance

Clicking the link opens your SAP Signavio Process Governance workspace in a
new browser tab, so you can manage your tasks and processes (approval work-
flows) there.
o Manage approval workflows

All approval workflows defined in SAP Signavio Process Governance (and the
default approval workflow) are listed as links in this section. Click an approval
workflow to edit.
o Deactivate the approval workflow feature
If you want to stop using the approval workflow feature, you can deactivate
it.
o Synchronize users with SAP Signavio Process Governance
After you created new users in SAP Signavio Process Manager, you need to
synchronize SAP Signavio Process Manager with SAP Signavio Process
Governance, so your new users can be included in your approval work-
flows. Click Synchronize users now to create a SAP Signavio Process
Governance account for all your SAP Signavio Process Manager users who
did not have a SAP Signavio Process Governance account before.

Version 15.14 441

15   Workspace administration

Confirm the synchronization.

If your organization is using SAP Signavio Process Governance

for approval workflows in SAP Signavio Process Manager, syn-
chronizing the workspace will delete SAP Signavio Process
Governance users who have been previously deleted in SAP Sig-
navio Process Manager.

o Synchronize configuration with SAP Signavio Process Governance

You only need to click this button if there are problems with the configuration
between your SAP Signavio Process Manager and SAP Signavio Process
Governance workspaces--if the tenant ID is missing in SAP Signavio Process
Governance, for example. Most of the time, the configuration updates itself auto-
matically when changes are made. If you do need to manually fix the con-
figuration, click Synchronize configuration now to trigger a synchronization of all
diagram states, SAP Signavio Process Manager URLs and the SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Manager tenant ID.

Confirm the synchronization.

15.11.3 Access control for approval workflows

If the option Use workflow access permissions is enabled, permissions for pro-
cesses set in SAP Signavio Process Governance are used for approval work-
flows.

Version 15.14 442

15   Workspace administration

'Use workflow access permissions' checkbox

"Start process" permission and "See process" permission

When an approval workflow is created or edited in SAP Signavio Process
Governance, it is possible to restrict who can see or start a process.
For details on how to set these permissions in SAP Signavio Process
Governance, read more in section Access control.
o If a user is permitted to see but not start an approval workflow, that workflow is
visible as disabled in the drop-down list. In case this user still tries to start the
approval workflow, an error message is shown.
o If a user is not permitted to see a workflow, the workflow won't be listed.

If you enable the option Use workflow access permissions , every

user who wants to start an approval workflow needs a SAP Signavio
Process Governance account. If a user tries to start an approval work-
flow while not having an account for SAP Signavio Process
Governance, an error message is shown.

15.11.4 Diagram states

You can also edit the diagram states within an approval workflow.

Version 15.14 443

15   Workspace administration

The table in the Diagram states tab contains all states a diagram can be in. Icon
and name of a state are displayed in the explorer as soon as the state has been
triggered for the corresponding diagram. If the check box Publish is activated, a
diagram will be automatically published in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration
Hub after the corresponding status has been triggered (for this, it is, of course,
necessary that your workspace has a SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub).
Edit the states by clicking the corresponding table fields:

Edit the states a diagram can have within an approval workflows

The Reset expiration column is only relevant if you want to configure

Approval Expiration .

Changes in state configuration (as well as the deletion or creation of new states)
are automatically transferred to SAP Signavio Process Governance and are
instantly available when selecting states in the SAP Signavio Process
Governance workspace.
Click the + icon to add a new state:

Add a new state.

To delete a state, click the trash button next to the corresponding column and con-
firm the action:

Version 15.14 444

15   Workspace administration

Delete a state

Confirm the action.

You can assign diagram attributes for process participant roles. This enables you
to define the roles of participants in processes within SAP Signavio Process Man-
ager. In SAP Signavio Process Governance, you can then assign approval tasks
to these roles.
For example, the default approval workflow process is assigning the task busi-
ness approval to the process owner role. This means that the business approval
for a process is automatically assigned to the user whom you have defined as the
process owner in the corresponding attribute.

15.11.5 Participants
Configure the Participants attributes in the Participants tab.
Here, you can assign diagram attributes to SAP Signavio Process Governance
roles. This requires the creation of corresponding attributes on BPMN diagram
level in SAP Signavio Process Manager. Read more about custom attributes in
the chapter Add and manage notation subsets .

Assign the attributes and save the configuration.

Version 15.14 445

15   Workspace administration

When creating or editing a business process diagram, you can now add the email
addresses of the corresponding participants to these attributes.

Define process participants.

With this feature, you can only use the email addresses the cor-
responding users used to register themselves in SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Governance.

When configuring approval workflows in SAP Signavio Process Governance you

can assign responsibilities to the different participants.

15.11.6 Approval Expiration

In this tab you can set expiry dates for diagram approvals. Expiry dates ensure
your diagrams are regularly re-checked, for example to fulfill compliance rules.

Open the ‘Approval Expiration’ tab

By default, the expiry frequency is set to Never .

Version 15.14 446

15   Workspace administration

o To define one static expiry frequency for all diagrams, set the drop-down
menu Select how the timespan is determined to Fixed period .

Define a static fixed frequency for all diagrams

Next, define the expiry frequency in the field Number of months . In our
example, the system triggers a new approval workflow after twelve months.
o To define the expiry frequency per diagram, set Select how the timespan is
determined to Custom attribute (type: number) . Next select the attribute you
want to use to configure the frequency. To configure custom attributes, see
section Add and manage notation subsets.

Expiry frequency using an attribute on diagram level

Version 15.14 447

15   Workspace administration

Next, define the expiry frequency in the field Fallback value if attribute not set .
This field serves as the default value if a diagram's expiry frequency attribute
value is empty.
In our example, the approval workflow is automatically triggered again after
twelve months.
To select the workflow you want the system to trigger once a diagram approval
expires, you need to switch to the Diagram states tab. Here you can define the
states that are considered as approvals in the Reset expiration column.

Select the states

To use both expiring and non-expiring approvals, set up a specific

approval workflow that triggers only states that the expiry function
doesn't regard as approved. For example, create the states Approved
(expires) and Approved (no expiry) . Activate the check box Reset
expiration only for Approved (expires) . Workflows triggering this state
will expire, workflows triggering Approved (no expiry) won't.

Version 15.14 448

15   Workspace administration

15.11.7 Reapprovals
To schedule reapprovals, set an expiry period in the Approval Expiration tab and
mark at least one of the diagram states in the Diagram states tab as Reset expir-
ation .

[Link] Existing approvals

Existing approvals are affected by changing the Approval Expiration or the Dia-
gram state configuration.

Approval Expiration

If you change the expiration timespan, the new expiration period is used to sched-
ule the reapproval.
Example: If a diagram was approved two months ago and you set the reapproval
period to one month, the reapproval workflow is triggered immediately.

Diagram state

If you change the diagram state that resets the expiration, reapprovals only
depend on the new states. De-selected states are no longer considered for
already initiated expiry periods. For the newly selected states, the expiry period is
calculated from the time this state was reached.
Example: You have two diagram states, approved and rejected . So far,
approved was activating the approval expiration, now you want to change the dia-
gram state to rejected . As soon as the diagram state is changed, the reapprovals
linked to approved are discarded by the system. The system also searches for
revisions with the state rejected and recalculates the expiry period, starting from
the date the diagram was set to rejected . This means that changing the diagram
state does not immediately trigger the reapproval workflow, and that it may take
less than the complete timespan for the reapproval workflow to be triggered.

15.11.8 Creating and editing approval workflows

You can edit approval workflows and add further approval workflow processes.
To create or edit an approval workflow, click Setup - Manage Approval Work-
flows in the top drop-down menu of the Explorer and click either Open work-
space in SAP Signavio Process Governance or click a link to an existing
approval workflow:

Version 15.14 449

15   Workspace administration

Open your SAP Signavio Process Governance workspace

In case you did not select a specific workflow, you are redirected to your SAP Sig-
navio Process Governance workspace. Go to the Processes tab to see all exist-
ing processes, including your approval workflows:

The ‘Processes’ tab provides an overview over existing processes

Now, select an approval workflow for editing it:

or click New process to create a new approval workflow:

We will now assume you created a new approval workflow, so we can guide you
through all the details of creating approval workflows in SAP Signavio Process
Governance. You can also edit all options explained here the same way when
opening an existing workflow.
Enter a name for the approval workflow and hit Enter :

Version 15.14 450

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Setting the workflow trigger

If you have a SAP Signavio Process Governance stand-alone license, you need
to define SAP Signavio approval as the trigger for the process.

Set 'SAP Signavio approval' as trigger

In case you are using SAP Signavio Process Governance as part of SAP Sig-
navio Process Manager, the approval workflow trigger is set automatically.

[Link] Creating actions

Next, go to the Actions tab:

Go to the 'Actions' tab

Version 15.14 451

15   Workspace administration

Here you can create actions for the approval workflow and link them with each
other. To create the first process element, click the Start event button:

Add a start event to the process canvas

[Link] Changing states

Click the Signavio drop down and select Change state to create a new SAP Sig-
navio Process Manager task:
src="../images/[Link]" />
Create a new task to be executed by SAP Signavio Process Manager system.

Connect start event and task, label the task and select to which state the model
should be changed by the trigger:

Version 15.14 452

15   Workspace administration

The task will change the diagram state to 'in progress'.

The states can be defined in SAP Signavio Process Manager (see Diagram
states). When the task has been executed in SAP Signavio Process Governance,
SAP Signavio Process Manager will automatically set the diagram, for which the
approval workflow is executed, into this state.

[Link] Creating and assigning user tasks

Use the interactive context menu to create the first user task and name the task:

Use the interactive context menu.

Label the task.

Assign the task to one or several of your editor & Decision Manager users by click-
ing the + button below the Assignment tab and selecting a user:

Version 15.14 453

15   Workspace administration

Assign the task to one or several users.

Alternatively, you can assign the task to one of the process participant roles. This
is recommendable for most cases, as it eases approval workflow management
when having several process owners and participants within the different pro-
cesses.

[Link] Adding fields for additional information

In the Form tab you can add several fields providing information about the to-be-
approved diagram:

Version 15.14 454

15   Workspace administration

Add a field.

To edit the field's information. like label and initial value, click the corresponding
field and edit it in the pop-up on the right:

Finally, a form for a user task could look like this:

Version 15.14 455

15   Workspace administration

Example of a form for a user task

[Link] Adding exclusive gateways

Now, add an exclusive gateway followed by two (or more) SAP Signavio Process
Manager Change state tasks:

Add an exclusive gateway followed by SAP Signavio Process Manager tasks.

[Link] Defining task labels

Define task labels as well as the state changes the tasks will trigger. If you want
to end the workflow after these steps, add end events :

Version 15.14 456

15   Workspace administration

The gateway represents a user decision, meaning the user executing the pre-
vious task can decide which of the following tasks should be triggered.
When clicking the gateway you can define the labels of the dialog that will be dis-
played to the executing user when the corresponding decision is to be made:

Define dialog labels.

To define the outcome or the possible process flows, simply name the task fol-
lowing a decision:

Version 15.14 457

15   Workspace administration

Name the task.

The possible sequence flows have been defined.

[Link] Setting automatic decisions

Alternatively, gateways can be resolved automatically.

Here, you need to select Automatic decision and define the conditions for gate-
way resolution:

Version 15.14 458

15   Workspace administration

Gateways can be resolved automatically.

In our example, it does not make sense to resolve the gateway automatically. You
can refer to the above illustration as a reference for automated gateway res-
olution in a similar case.

[Link] Publishing the process

You have now created your first custom approval workflow.

Click Publish to run this process :

Publish the workflow.

The new approval workflow can now be started from the explorer.

Version 15.14 459

15   Workspace administration

15.11.9 Deactivating the approval workflow feature

To deactivate the approval workflow feature, open the Explorer and go to Setup -
Manage approval workflows .
Now, the approval workflow management dialog opens. Click Deactivate :

Deactivate the approval workflow feature.

Confirm the deactivation:

15.12 Manage notations, attributes, and the dictionary

You can configure notations and create custom diagram attributes according to
your specific needs. In addition, you can customize dictionary categories and
attributes in order to ensure consistency and enable easy re-use of objects
throughout your process landscape.

15.12.1 Next steps

o Add and manage notation subsets
o Add and manage custom attributes

Version 15.14 460

15   Workspace administration

o Managing modeling conventions

o Manage attribute visualization layers
o Manage the dictionary

15.12.2 Manage the dictionary

This section provides a quick overview about the necessary information to set up
the dictionary for your users.

[Link] Access rights

You can set access rights for the complete dictionary or limit the access to spe-
cific categories. Read more in section Set access rights for the dictionary.

[Link] Custom attributes

How to create custom attributes for dictionary categories is described in section

Add a custom attribute for a dictionary category.

[Link] Import dictionary entries

If you need to add multiple entries at once or want to update existing entries, you
can import dictionary entries as XLS files. Read more in section Import dictionary
entries.

[Link] Special dictionary categories

How to set up different categories for risks and controls is described in section
Create dictionary categories for risks and controls.
Dictionary entries can be used as data input objects or data definitions in DMN
modeling. For such entries, you need to set up a dictionary category that is activ-
ated for DMN modeling. Read more in section Set up a dictionary category for
DMN modeling.

15.12.3 Add and manage notation subsets

You need an administrator account to use this function.

Version 15.14 461

15   Workspace administration

You can configure which diagram types and diagram elements modelers can use
in your workspace.
You can define subsets for each diagram type and enable or disable diagram ele-
ments in these subsets.

[Link] Subset examples

To support modeling for different purposes in the process landscape, we recom-

mend you start with notation subsets that are split by model complexity.

End-to-end process diagrams

End-to-end process diagrams provide a high-level perspective on your operations.
For this level, we recommend using only the following elements:
o start and end events
o tasks
o collapsed sub processes
o pools/lanes
o connectors

Complete processes
For modeling complete processes, start with the BPMN Core Elements subset and
extend it if necessary.
Technical process steps
The technical level specifies the role IT systems play in your process. To specify tech-
nical details like exception handling and data storage, you need to make use of a
large set of BPMN elements.

[Link] Add a subset of elements for a notation

To define a subset for a modeling language, follow these steps:

1. Go to Setup > Define notations/attributes.

2. Select the modeling language.

3. Click Add subset .

4. Enter a name for the subset.

5. To list the diagram elements grouped by type in the shape repository, activ-
ate Group diagram element types.

6. Click Save.
The subset is listed under the modeling language.

Version 15.14 462

15   Workspace administration

7. By default, every element is selected for the new subset. Select or remove
elements for the subset.
All changes are saved immediately.

8. Click Close to leave the settings.

[Link] Copy a subset

You can copy subsets and edit the copy.

Follow these steps:

1. Select the subset to duplicate.

2. Click Copy subset.

3. Edit the name.

4. To list the diagram elements grouped by type in the shape repository, activ-
ate Group diagram element types.

5. Click Save.

6. Edit the subset.

All changes are saved immediately.

7. Click Close to leave the settings.

[Link] Edit or delete a subset

It is not possible to edit or remove default subsets.

To edit or remove custom subsets, follow these steps:

1. Select the subset you want to editor delete.

o To edit the subset, click Edit subset.
You can now edit the subset name and change the element grouping
preferences.
o To delete the subset click Remove subset and confirm in the dialog.

2. Click Close to leave the settings.

Version 15.14 463

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Next steps

o Define default colors and font formats for element types
o Add and manage custom attributes

15.12.4 Define default colors and font formats for element types
You can define custom default shape and font formats for element types. These
formatting attributes are defined for all notation subsets. For example, if you
change the background color of the Task element, the system changes all BPMN
subsets accordingly. You can still overwrite these settings when formatting an ele-
ment in the editor as described in the chapter Format elements and labels .
The following default formatting options are available:
Font size Default : 12
Font bold Default : False
Font italic Default : False
Font color Default : #000000 (black)
Background color Default : #ffffcc (yellow)
Border color Default : #000000 (black)
Solid color (no gradient) Default : False

You can change the default format settings in the Modeling Languages tab of the
notations/attributes configuration dialog:

1. Switch to the Default Formats tab and select an element type. In our
example, we want to highlight the labels of all collapsed subprocesses of
your BPMN diagrams in pink by default:

Version 15.14 464

15   Workspace administration

2. Select the setting you want to adjust and click Edit or double click the set-
ting - in our case Font color :

3. Adjust the settings accordingly. Here, we use the drop-down menu to select
the color of our choice or insert the respective hexadecimal value:

Version 15.14 465

15   Workspace administration

4. Click Apply to save the changes. All existing elements of the corresponding
type in the diagrams of your workspace will now be adjusted. SAP Signavio
Process Manager will use the changed format for new diagrams as well.

When opening a diagram containing one or more corresponding elements, an

information dialog informs you that the elements have been changed:

If you want to revert the changes, press Ctrl + Z or click Undo.

[Link] Next steps

Add and manage custom attributes

15.12.5 Add and manage custom attributes

You can add custom attributes for diagram elements and dictionary categories.
Custom attributes work in the same way as standard attributes in a modeling nota-
tion and can also be displayed in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.
Custom attributes can be added for modeling elements and dictionary categories.

[Link] Add a custom attribute for a modeling element

Follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, select Setup > Define notations/attributes.

2. In the tab Modeling language, select a notation.

3. Select a diagram element or dictionary category. To select more than one

element, press Shift or Ctrl.

4. In the tab Custom Attributes, click Add .

5. You can create a new custom attribute or reuse an attribute you already
have available in your workspace.

Version 15.14 466

15   Workspace administration

o To reuse a custom attribute, select it from the list.

o To create a new attribute, enter a name and a description for the new
attribute. Select the data type for the attribute. You can create list
attributes by activating As list.

6. Click Create attribute to save.

You can't edit the data type or the As list option after saving the
attribute.

[Link] Add a custom attribute for a dictionary category

Follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, select Setup > Define notations/attributes.

2. Switch to the tab Dictionary.

3. Select a dictionary category or dictionary subcategory.

4. In the tab Custom Attributes, click Add .

5. You can create a new custom attribute or reuse an attribute you already
have available in your workspace.
o To reuse a custom attribute, select it from the list.
o To create a new attribute, enter a name and a description for the new
attribute. Select the data type for the attribute. You can create list
attributes by activating As list.

6. Click Create attribute to save.

You can't edit the data type or the As listoption after saving the
attribute.

Reusing attributes

To make the same attribute available for different elements or dictionary cat-
egories, you can reuse attributes that are already available in your workspace.
Reused attributes have the same ID.

Version 15.14 467

15   Workspace administration

In SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub, attributes can be populated from a

linked diagram if an attribute with the same ID is available for both the linking ele-
ment and the linked diagram.

[Link] Manage custom attributes

In the tab Custom Attributes, you can manage the custom attributes in your work-
space.
To access the custom attributes you want to change, follow these steps:

1. In the Explorer, select Setup > Define notations/attributes.

2. To edit an attribute for a modeling element, stay in the tab Modeling lan-
guage.
To edit an attribute for a dictionary entry, switch to the tab Dictionary.

3. Select a notation or a dictionary category.

4. Select a diagram element or dictionary category. To select more than one

element, press Shift or Ctrl.

5. The custom attributes for your selection are listed.

o To view the attribute details, click an attribute.
o To change the order in which custom attributes are listed in the attrib-
ute panel, select an attribute and move it up or down with the arrow
buttons.
o To edit an attribute, click Edit. You can't edit the data type or the As
listoption.
o To remove an attribute, click Remove and confirm. If the attribute is
used for more than one element, you can decide to remove it from all
elements or only from the selected element.

[Link] Configure custom date attributes

To change the timestamp format on diagrams, tasks, and dictionary categories,

customize the date attribute. By default, the format is m/d/Y (for example,
01/09/2017).

Version 15.14 468

15   Workspace administration

Format options

Option Meaning Example

j current day of the month, without zeroes 1
d current day of the month, with zeros 01
D abbreviated day of the week Wed
l full day of the week Wednesday
F current month name February
M abbreviated current month name Feb
n current month in numerals without leading zeroes 2
m current month in numbers with leading zeroes 02
y current year, in two digits 17
Y current year, in four digits 2018
a lowercase am and pm
A uppercase AM and PM
g 12 hour format without leading zeroes 9:15
h 12 hour format with leading zeroes 09:15
G 24 hour format without leading zeroes 9:15
H 24 hour format with leading zeroes 09:15
i minutes, with leading zeroes 05
s seconds, with leading zeroes

Example: Friday, September 1st, 2017 at 03:05 pm:

o y-m-d is displayed as 17-09-01
o y/m/d is displayed as 17/09/01
o F j, Y is displayed as September 1, 2017

Version 15.14 469

15   Workspace administration

o g:i:s A is displayed as 3:05:00 PM

o l, F d, Y g:i:s A is displayed as Friday, September 01, 2017 3:05:00 PM
o F j, Y, g:i a is displayed as September 1, 2017, 3:05 pm

[Link] Next steps

o Create custom attributes to link documents
o Define custom attributes for RACI
o Attribute management

[Link] Define custom attributes for RACI

Responsibilities can be assigned directly to tasks. To enable modelers to do this,

you need to define custom attributes.
To define custom attributes for RACI, follow these steps:

1. In the Explorer, select Setup > Define notations/attributes.

2. From the list Modeling Language, select Business Process Diagram

(BPMN 2.0).

3. From the list Diagram element types, select Task.

4. In the tab Custom Attributes, click Add.

5. In the Add custom attribute dialog, enable Create new attribute.

6. Enter the name of the responsibility you want to assign to the task in the
field Name.

o Enter the names exactly as listed the table below. When you use
different names, you won't be able to assign
RACI responsibilities to tasks.
o The additional definitions are only available when using custom
attributes, not for connectors.
o RACI definitions are only available in English, German and
French.

Version 15.14 470

15   Workspace administration

English German French

R responsible or führt durch or réalisateur

additional responsible or führt zusätzlich durch
additionally responsible

A accountable erteilt Freigabe or autorité

ist gesamtverantwortlich

C consulted wird konsultiert consulté

I informed wird informiert informé

7. To enable dictionary suggestions for data type, select Dictionary link.

8. We recommend to enable As list.

You can't edit the data type or the As listoption after saving the
attribute.

9. To ensure suggested dictionary entries are roles, select in Only for the cat-
egory Organizational Units.

10. To save the custom attribute, click Create attribute.

Next steps

o Add and manage custom attributes

[Link] Create custom attributes to link documents

When you create a custom attribute of the data type Document/URL, modelers
can use this attribute to link to documents in SAP Signavio file storage, your doc-
ument management system, or in your network. They can also use this attribute
to link to online documents.
To create a custom attribute for linking documents, follow these steps:

1. In the Explorer, select Setup > Define notations/attributes.

2. Select a notation , one or more subsets and a modeling element.

Version 15.14 471

15   Workspace administration

3. In the tab Custom Attributes, click Add.

In the Add custom attribute dialog, enable Create new attribute.

4. Insert a name and a description for the attribute.

5. For data type, select Document/URL.

6. Select As list to enable linking multiple images or documents to one ele-

ment.

You can't edit the data type or the As listoption after saving the
attribute.

7. Click Create attribute to save.

Next steps

o Add and manage custom attributes

15.12.6 Add custom categories for dictionary entries

This feature is only available for customers with an Enterprise license.

You can define attributes for dictionary entries, like you can define them for dia-
grams. You can also define custom dictionary categories and subcategories.

[Link] Category types

Category types have two purposes:

o They are used by the system when creating reports (for example, RACI, doc-
ument use, or process documentation reports) to identify objects of a certain
category.
o They act as filters when dictionary references are suggested while modeling.
For example, dictionary entries of the type IT System are only suggested
when the user attempts to label an IT System element. Entries for which no
type is set are suggested for any element.

Category types can be defined for both root level categories and child categories.
The following category types are available:

Version 15.14 472

15   Workspace administration

Organization Organizational entities, that can be used to assign responsibilities for

actions. Examples would be whole organizations (for example 'ACME
Inc.'), organizational units or departments (for example 'Finance'), roles
(for example 'Chief Financial Officer'), or even external process par-
ticipants like partners, suppliers, government institutions or customers.
Document Anything that can hold information and that is used or created during pro-
cesses. This can be physical documents (for example printed applic-
ations), digital files (for example PDF forms), entries in databases, or
variables in a computer program.
IT-System Anything that can process documents or data, from standard software,
individualized applications, and custom scripts, to hardware systems, like
individual server instances, data centers, and hand-held devices, to integ-
rated systems, like application servers, scanners, printers, or personal
computers.
Event Anything that can trigger a process, either during the execution or as the
result of a process. Events are usually described by defining the situation
or state reached once the event has occurred, for example "Customer
order received" or "Goods sent".
Activity Actions that are performed within processes. Actions usually connect all
other types of objects. They are performed by organizational units or
roles, can read and create documents or data, can use IT-systems, can
cause events, and usually achieve certain goals.
Goal The reasons behind why processes are executed at all and why they are
designed the way they are: business goals to be achieved, key per-
formance indicators to be met, or stakeholders to be satisfied.
Requirement Typically descriptions of the differences between as-is and to-be pro-
cesses or IT-systems, for example change requests, functional or non-
functional specifications, or tickets in a requirements management sys-
tem.
Others Categories with this type have no defined meaning attached to them and
are recommended to users for diagram elements that don't match more
specific types. One example is the BPMN group element.

[Link] Create a new category

To create dictionary categories, follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, go to Setup> Define notations/attributes.

2. Open the Dictionary tab. The dialog to configure dictionary attributes
opens. All categories are listed.

Version 15.14 473

15   Workspace administration

3. To create a sub-category, first select the parent category.

Sub-categories can't be parent category of other categories, a cat-

egory path is either one or two levels deep.

4. Click Add. In the dialog, set the following:

Version 15.14 474

15   Workspace administration

Preference Description
Name Specify a name for the category (mandatory)
Parent cat- Select the parent category.
egory
Use for data Activate if you want to use the category for DMN input data (see Set up a
modelling dictionary category for DMN modeling ).
Publishing Determines whether dictionary entries should be published in SAP
mode
Signavio Process Collaboration Hub manually or automatically.

manually
an updated dictionary entry has to be explicitly published to display
the most recent version in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.
This enables strict quality assurance (see also Publishing dictionary
entries).
automatically
a new or updated dictionary entry is displayed in SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Collaboration Hub as soon as the entry is saved.

After enabling manually, you need to explicitly grant users the right
to publish dictionary entries, as described at Manage access
rights.

On change, updated automatically

linking dia- diagrams referencing dictionary entries of the corresponding cat-
grams are egory are updated automatically when changed.
unpublished
the changes can be approved manually. You can control whether the
updated dictionary entry is still matching the context of the ref-
erencing diagrams.
Color Select a color for the category.
Type of cat- Select a category type.
egory

5. Click Create. The new category is created.

o To edit, remove or rearrange categories, click the corresponding icon in the

toolbar.

Version 15.14 475

15   Workspace administration

o To deactivate a custom category, disable the checkbox between the cat-

egory's color and its name.

Dictionary categories for risks and controls

For risks and controls, it is not possible to use subcategories. If you need more
than one category for risks and controls, we recommend using multiple risk attrib-
utes. This means you create one dictionary category for each type of risk, for
example financial risks, legal risks, or health risks.

[Link] Manage custom attributes for dictionary entries

You can manage custom attributes of dictionary categories in the same way you
manage custom attributes of elements. Read more in section Add and manage
custom attributes.

[Link] Next steps

o Add and manage custom attributes
o Manage definitions for risks and controls

15.12.7 Set up a dictionary category for DMN modeling

Dictionary entries can be used for input and output data in decisions of DMN dia-
grams. For that, you need to set up a dictionary category that is activated for
DMN modeling.

Version 15.14 476

15   Workspace administration

Follow these steps:

1. Open the explorer and click Setup > Define notations/attributes.

The configuration dialog for notations and attributes opens.

2. Go to the Dictionary tab.

3. You have the following options:

o To create a new category, click Add.
o To create a new sub-category, select the parent category and then
click Add.

The creation dialog opens.

4. To activate the category for DMN modeling, set the option Use for to Data
Modeling.

5. Specify the other category settings as needed.

We recommend naming the category in a meaningful way. Then,

modeling users can easily identify it as a category for DMN mod-
eling.

Read more on the settings in section Add custom categories for dictionary
entries.

6. Confirm with Create.

The category is created.

[Link] Next steps

Create dictionary entries for input or output data in decisions

15.12.8 Manage definitions for risks and controls

With the centralized risks and controls management, you can configure custom
risks and controls data types and manage risk and control objects in the dic-
tionary.
This way, you can ensure your risks and controls are consistent throughout your
process landscape and facilitate re-use of those already defined.

Version 15.14 477

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Create dictionary categories for risks and controls

For risks and controls, it is not possible to use subcategories. If you

need more than one category for risks and controls, we recommend
using multiple risk attributes. This means you create one dictionary cat-
egory for each type of risk, for example financial risks, legal risks, or
health risks.

To create dictionary categories, follow these steps:

1. In the explorer, click Setup > Define notations/attributes.

2. Switch to the Dictionary tab and create two new categories:
o One category for risks

o One category for controls

Version 15.14 478

15   Workspace administration

3. Set the type of the category to Risks or Controls.

4. To customize your risks and controls definition, add additional attributes to

these categories. The attributes resemble the table headers in your risks or
controls tables, for example severity, control interval, or responsibility.

SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub only supports the fol-

lowing custom attribute types in risk management tables:
o Single line text
o Drop-down box
o Number
Custom attributes of other types won't be displayed in risk man-
agement tables in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.

[Link] Configure 'Risk Management' element attributes

Follow these steps:

1. Switch to the Modeling Language tab and create a custom Risk Man-
agement attribute.

Version 15.14 479

15   Workspace administration

2. When configuring the attribute, reference the newly created Risk and Con-
trol categories.

Only the elements of the configured categories can be used in

the risk and control tables. Elements from subcategories are not
available.

3. Define risk and controls for diagrams in your process landscape.

15.12.9 Manage attribute visualization layers

With attribute visualization layers, modelers can display attributes directly on the
diagram canvas using different icons and colors. You as an administrator create
and configure custom rules that define the state of each visualization layer.
Attribute visualization layers are available for the following diagram types:
o BPMN diagrams
o Value chain diagrams
o ArchiMate diagrams
o Organization charts

Version 15.14 480

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Create a visualization layer

In the explorer, follow these steps :

1. Click Setup > Manage attribute visualization.

2. In the dialog, click Add new layer.

A new layer is created.

3. Enter a name for the new layer.

4. In the Visualization drop-down list, you can either select an icon or select
Property value. When you select Property value, instead of an icon the
value of the attribute is displayed.

5. For layers that are visualized with an icon, you can enable Show Details.
The attributes that are used for calculating the rules are then displayed next
to the icon.

6. Define the rules how the icons are displayed. See details below.

7. Click Close to leave the dialog. The changes are applied immediately.

Rules for visualization layers

To set or edit the rules for visualization, follow these steps:

1. Click Setup > Manage attribute visualization.

2. Open the rules by clicking Define rules or the displayed rule.

3. To add a new rule, click Add new rules.

4. Define the rule set for displaying the icon.

Every layer can contain several rules.

5. To set the color for the icon, click the icon.

You can select one of the available colors or enter a hexadecimal color
code.

6. Select values for the three parts of the rule: Property, Relation and Value.

Version 15.14 481

15   Workspace administration

o In the Propertysection, you select the attribute.

o The Relationselection contains several relational operators or
boolean statements, depending on the attribute.
o Set a Value if applicable.

7. You can connect rules with the AND or the OR operator:

o
To connect rules with AND, click and add additional rules.
o To connect rules with OR, add a new rule to the layer by clicking Add
new rules.

Example:
The execution time should be highlighted in red if it is longer than 5 minutes
and highlighted in yellow if it is longer than 3 minutes.
You need 2 rules to achieve this.
You create the first rule:

Add the second rule:

The rules are connected with AND, which is usually what is used for overlays.

Version 15.14 482

15   Workspace administration

To add rules connected with OR, you click instead of Add new rules to
add additional rules.

15.12.10 Managing modeling conventions

Access to this feature depends on your license.

The modeling convention feature enables users to check if diagrams stick to cer-
tain rules regarding notation(/BPMN-language), labeling, process structure and
diagram layout. This check can be displayed while modeling (or saving). Addi-
tionally, a modeling conventions report can be generated.
SAP Signavio offers SAP Signavio Best Practices modeling conventions as well
as custom modeling conventions.
To manage modeling conventions in your work space you need to be a member
of the Administrators group.
To access the modeling convention dialog open the explorer and click Setup,
then Define modeling conventions in the top drop-down menu.

Version 15.14 483

15   Workspace administration

The following dialog will pop up:

In this dialog you can manage the existing modeling conventions and create new
ones.
This dialog offers an overview over the existing modeling conventions. Fur-
thermore conventions can be (de-)activated:
o Globally for the whole work space
o And specifically, the check button in the Editor and the auto-check in the
save dialog

[Link] Defining custom modeling rules and conventions

Access to this feature depends on your license.

In addition to the SAP Signavio Best Practice modeling convention, it is possible

to define custom modeling rules and conventions, that fit exactly to your needs.
Custom rules can be defined to complement already existing modeling con-
ventions, whereas defining a new convention means creating a customized set of
rules, either from scratch or derived from an existing convention.

Version 15.14 484

15   Workspace administration

If you want to create a whole new modeling convention, select Add custom mod-
eling convention in the upper right corner of the dialog:

Now you can chose between creating a new convention from the beginning or
copying an existing convention:

Afterwards, the new convention shows up as a new column in the convention

table and you can now configure it by activating rules and adjusting the import-
ance of rules and other parameters:

Version 15.14 485

15   Workspace administration

The new modeling convention is saved after closing the dialog and is now
included in the convention checks if activated (default setting).
To add a custom rule, click Add new custom rule in the corresponding section of
the convention's table:

A dialog will appear. Here you can insert the name and description of your new
custom rule:

Version 15.14 486

15   Workspace administration

After clicking Create , the new rule appears in the modeling convention dialog,
where it can be edited by clicking on the small pen-icon:

These custom rules cannot be checked automatically by our system.

They need to be checked manually.

In addition to creating this kind of custom rules, you can define custom mandatory
attributes. If a process diagram contains empty mandatory attributes, this will be
reported by the modeling convention check.
To define mandatory attributes within an existing modeling convention, open the
modeling convention dialog and click Add new rule under Definition of man-
datory attributes :

In the following dialog, you can now select the attributes you want to be man-
datory:

Version 15.14 487

15   Workspace administration

After saving the configuration, the attribute set will be added to the modeling con-
vention table.
To change the selection of mandatory attributes or to delete the mandatory attrib-
ute set, click the small pen icon.

15.12.11 Managing external data sources

The external data sources interface for DMN data objects is available
for your On Premises installation on request. In case you want to activ-
ate the interface, please contact our SAP Signavio service experts on
the SAP ONE Support Launchpad .

Version 15.14 488

15   Workspace administration

In the SAP Signavio Decision Manager, you can use to define the data types of
input columns in DMN model decision tables.
For the data types string lists (enumerations) and hierarchies , you can set up
external services to retrieve corresponding data objects.

[Link] Architecture

The following diagram shows the system architecture of the external data source
interface:

The component on the left represents the SAP Signavio system. The right part of
the diagram represents a third-party service with access to the to-be transferred
data. It may contain a bridging application that reformats third party data so the
SAP Signavio Decision Manager can read it.
There are two options to set up a service so that third party data can be accessed
by the SAP Signavio Decision Manager.
The options are represented by the two outgoing request/response channels in
the diagram.
o Direct access: For this, the service URL defined in the SAP Signavio Decision
Manager has to be accessible via HTTP(S) GET requests. The service

Version 15.14 489

15   Workspace administration

response needs to match the SAP Signavio data format. See how to match the
format below.
o The Range Accessor Service: SAP Signavio offers a reference web applic-
ation that can either be used as an adapter to map data from existing services
or to build up an entirely independent data service. To use this web app
provided by SAP Signavio, you need to calibrate SAP Signavio accordingly.
Read more at Range Accessor Service.

[Link] Direct Third Party Access: Data Format

The SAP Signavio system needs the response of an external service request to
comply to the following JSON structure:

<response> := <enumResponse> | <hierarchyResponse> | [<enumItem>*]

<enumResponse> := { type: "enumeration", enumItems: [<enumItem>*] } <enumItem> := { 
id:<String>, title:<String> }

<hierarchyResponse> := { type: "hierarchy", hierarchyItems: [<hierarchyItem>*] }

<hierarchyItem> := {id:<String>, title:<String>, children: [<hierarchyItem>*] }

The response is either declared as an enumeration or hierarchy and contains a

type definition and items.
The following examples serve as references for the data structures necessary.
Example enumeration:

{ type: "enumeration",
enumItems: [
{id:"firstPlace", title:"Gold medal"},
{id:"secondPlace", title:"Silver medal"},
{id:"thirdPlace", title:"Bronze medal"}
]
}

The enumeration response is a JSON object with a type declaration and a JSON
array of enumeration items. Each item is a JSON object with the mandatory attrib-
utes id and title . Any other attributes will be ignored.
Example hierarchy:

{
type: "hierarchy",
hierarchyItems: [{
id: "am",
title: "America"
}, {
id: "eu",
title: "Europe",
children: [{

Version 15.14 490

15   Workspace administration

id: "uk",
title: "United Kingdom"
}, {
id: "de",
title: "Germany",
children: [{
id: "berlin",
title: "Berlin"
}]
}, {
id: "fr",
title: "France"
}]
}, {
id: "as",
title: "Asia"
}]
}

The hierarchy response is a JSON object with a type declaration and an array of
hierarchy items. Each item is an object with the mandatory attributes id and title
attribute and the optional attribute children . children is an array having the same
format as hierarchy items. Any other attributes will be ignored.

The id value must not contain any whitespace characters and the
value of the title attribute has to start with an alphabet letter.

[Link] Range Accessor Service

SAP Signavio offers a reference web application that can either be used as an
adapter to map data from existing services or to build up an entirely independent
data service.
To use this service, extend the AbstactExternalValueRange class (using a non-
abstract class) and dispatch the RangeServingServlet . This can facilitate the
reuse of an existing service. The service can be called and the data can be
mapped to the specified data format.
In either way, the output has to comply with the data format as specified above.
The sample web app SAP Signavio Range Accessor Service contains (among
others) the following files and folders (packages) of interest:
[Link] (com/signavio/rangeservice/servlet)
[Link] (com/signavio/rangeservice/conversion/)
public byte[] getValues(HttpServletRequest req) throws JsonProcessingException {...} .
The subclasses in the example subpackage serve as simple examples of service
implementations for enumeration and hierarchy providers.
[Link] (com/signavio/rangeservice/util/exchange/)

Version 15.14 491

15   Workspace administration

To ensure proper functionality, don't change, delete or move other

files, folders and jar files. Some of them are only of interest at compile
time, some at runtime

[Link] Creating external data sources

To make use of an external service, it has to be registered in the corresponding

SAP Signavio workspace. Open the explorer and click Setup - Define nota-
tions/attributes in the explorer and choose the Dictionary configuration tab, then
click the link in the explanatory header text:

Click the link to open the management dialog for external data sources.
Now, click Add :

Version 15.14 492

15   Workspace administration

A service consists of a name, a unique URL and a caching configuration:

o Name
The name is used as the identifier in the SAP Signavio dictionary.
o URL

This is the service URL accessible by an HTTP GET request responding

with data in the SAP Signavio data format as specified above.
o Cache

It is possible to cache the data temporarily. If activated and configured, the

referenced service will not be queried for the caching period, as the system
will use the cached values.
It is highly recommended to activate caching. Otherwise, the service data
will be newly requested each time the dictionary entry is loaded. Without
caching, if the service is temporarily unavailable, the request the SAP Sig-
navio Decision Manager is making to the service will timeout and the data
will be unavailable until the request is answered.

Click Add to register the service:

Version 15.14 493

15   Workspace administration

To learn how to reference external services when modeling data objects in the
Dictionary, read more at Referencing external data sources .

15.12.12 Creating and managing process documentation

templates
Process documentation can include diagrams as well as all element descriptions,
and dictionary entries. The documentation is created in Microsoft Word or PDF
format.
You can create custom templates that suits your organization's needs and gen-
erate a process documentation based on a template.
You can, for example,
o create an overview of all BPMN 2.0 process diagram tasks in your diagrams
o create a matrix with all dictionary entries linked in the diagrams
o create a detailed overview of the element usage in your diagrams

Not only the content of process documentations can be configured, but also their
visual properties.
Process documentation templates are stored in the Process documentation tem-
plates folder. This folder will appear in the folder tree on the left side of the
Explorer if you activate the process documentation templates as described
below.

[Link] Activating the process documentation templates

1. Select in the menu bar under Setup the Show process documentation tem-
plates entry.

2. Select in the navigation on the left the Process documentation templates

folder.

Version 15.14 494

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Creating a new template

1. Navigate to the template overview by selecting Templates in the folder tree

on the left side of the Explorer.

If the template folder is not shown in the folder tree, you can activate
the display as described above.

2. Select in the menu bar under New the Process documentation template
entry. You can also use create example template and then customize this
according to your needs.

Version 15.14 495

15   Workspace administration

To create and edit new templates, you are directed to the Editor. Here, you can
define the document structure, edit header and footer or specify diagram details.

[Link] Working with templates

Editing templates is similar to editing diagrams - elements are placed on the can-
vas via drag&drop and customized via attributes, which you can edit on the right
side in the attribute editor. The alignment of the elements is done mostly auto-
matically.
When you create a new template the following sections are applied automatically:
o cover page
o table of contents , which is automatically updated
o content pages , containing the actual process documentation

You can adjust the sections as needed, add new pages, or remove one of the
standard sections.

1. To delete a section, first select the element to delete, and then click in the
menu bar Delete .
2. In the panel on the left, under Document Structure all available elements
are listed. To add an element, drag the element on the canvas while holding
the left mouse button.
3. You can format labels of elements in the menu bar. Select the element and
then click the text format button. Here, you can define font size and color.
This can be useful to distinguish between various pieces of information that
are displayed as a list from each other, or to highlight certain information.

General attributes

Many shapes have similar general attributes that can be set in the attribute panel.
These will be explained here. Other, shape specific attributes will be explained in
the section about the corresponding shape.

Version 15.14 496

15   Workspace administration

o Color - You can change the background color of a section, sometimes also the
color of a label. You can either choose a color from the color picker or define a
hexadecimal value.
o Label - Many shapes have a label that will stand in front of a value (for
example 'Organization: [name of organization]'). You can define whether a
label should be displayed (check/uncheck the box 'Show label') and what the
label should be by configuring the corresponding attributes.
o Show Label - Define if the label shall be displayed for the element by checking
or unchecking the box.
o Hide page header/footer - Available in the More Attributes section of all sec-
tions - check or uncheck the box to hide the header or footer for the whole sec-
tion.
o Display - Here you can choose whether you would like the information to be
displayed in a list or in a table.

Importing/exporting templates

If you want to use an already applied template in an other SAP Signavio work-
space, you can export it here. Templates are exported as SAP Signavio archive
SGX file and can imported in another workspace for reuse.

1. Select the template file you want to export.

2. Click in the menu bar Import/Export and then the Export SAP Signavio
archive (SGX) entry. The corresponding dialog opens.
3. By default, the latest revision of each template will be exported. However,
you can disable this option.
4. Click Export . The selected template is downloaded as SGX-file.

[Link] The cover page

By default, when you create a new template, the first section is the cover page.

Cover page attributes

The cover page has a header and a footer, two spaces for content and the doc-
ument title in the center of the page.
You can configure the following attributes for the cover page section by clicking
onto the page and opening the attribute panel:

Version 15.14 497

15   Workspace administration

o Title - Configure the title of a process documentation (per default, it is set to

Process Documentation ).
o Subtitle - An explanatory subtitle (in the example below it is "Business pro-
cesses 2012")
o Show a separator - When a subtitle is given, it can be separated optically by a
horizontal line.
o Alignment - The title and subtitle can be aligned left, right or center. This
option only affects the text on the cover page.

Template parameters

In addition you can define template parameters for the cover page. Each tem-
plate parameter shape, available in the Document Structure header in the shape
repository, contains information about the process documentation file in general.
Template parameters can contain one of the following variables:
o Author
o Organization (default)
o Date
o Version

In the attribute panel, you can define which kind of information should be dis-
played. The data is automatically retrieved and added every time when you cre-
ate the actual documentation. You can also change the parameter label (for
example, 'author') and determine whether this should be displayed before the
value.

1. Drag the desired template parameter from the palette on the cover page.

2. Configure its type in the attribute editor.

Version 15.14 498

15   Workspace administration

Adding an image

You can insert an image of your choice into the cover page. The image can be
selected from the workspace or uploaded from your computer. The cor-
responding element can be found in the modeling palette under Static contents .

1. To add an image drag the Image element from the Static Contents section
of the shape repository to the cover page.
2. Select a picture from your computer or from the SAP Signavio workspace by
clicking the Edit button of the attribute Image. The dialog Edit: Image, link
a file/picture opens.

4. Click Save to insert the image.

Sample cover

Version 15.14 499

15   Workspace administration

[Link] The table of contents

The table of contents is created and updated automatically. When you create
comprehensive templates, this update may take some time. In this case we
recommend to deactivate the automatic updating during modeling by unchecking
the box of the attribute Preview.

If you enable the preview again, the contents is updated.

[Link] The process documentation

The process documentation pages are configurable and can be adapted to your
needs.

Version 15.14 500

15   Workspace administration

Configuring the header and footer

For each of the three sections, you can design a separate header and footer.
Thus, you can specify for example page numbers and at the same time prevent
that they appear on the cover and in the table of contents.

1. Click at the top or at the bottom of a page (if there is no header or footer,
you can drag the corresponding element from the palette to the page).
2. In the header and footer section you will find all the elements that you can
specify. Drag the required element to the desired location.
3. In the attribute editor, configure the display of each element.

Each section's header and footer must be designed separately.

The following elements and configurations can be dropped into a header or

footer:
Element Description
Page number In the attribute panel, check the box Continue numbering to continue
counting from a previous section. Otherwise the numbers for this section
will start at 1. Change the attribute value for Style to switch from Arabic to
Roman numbers, for example.
Date Displays the documentation creation date.
File name Displays the name of the file that is generated when exporting the doc-
umentation, for example, 'Process_Handbook_Order-to-Delivery'.
Version Displays the version of the process documentation, for example, 1.0.0.
Modification Displays the last modification date.
Text Write a text you want to display in the header or footer into the attribute
editor.
Image Here you can put a logo or a small picture. Upload it or choose from your
workspace.

Sample footer

Version 15.14 501

15   Workspace administration

Configuring the header is not possible in the trial edition.

Chapters and sections

Before you can add any variable elements to the content section, you need to add
a chapter/section element.
If you drop another chapter into a chapter, a sub-chapter will be created. If you
drop a chapter below another chapter, a new chapter will be created. In case you
don't need an elaborate chapter structure, you can simply place a per Diagram or
a Folder structure element. These are needed as a container for information ele-
ments on diagram and element level. Chapters and sub-chapters can be named
and will be numbered and added to the table of contents automatically.
When you added a chapter, you can place static information elements. These ele-
ments do not need a container. Static information can be defined in the attribute
panel and does not change with the diagrams a handbook includes.
A static attribute can for example be a disclaimer, a chapter overview, an image
or a table. You can put text directly into the table by double clicking it. Note that a
table can contain a header or a footer.
You can enforce page breaks, for example after large chapters, by placing a
Page Break element.
When configuring the display of dynamic diagram information, you can either use
a chapter per diagram with the Per Diagram element or use the Folder Structure
element to create a chapter per folder (with a sub chapter for each diagram). In
any case, the order of the diagrams is aligned to the folder structure.

1. Create a chapter by dragging a Chapter/Section element from the shape

repository to the template.

2. To divide this chapter into sub-chapters, drag another Chapter/Section ele-

ment on it.

Version 15.14 502

15   Workspace administration

3. In a chapter, you can drag different static elements whose values are set
during the modeling of the template. Such elements do not need any con-
tainers.
4. In the attribute editor, you can choose between the numbering style of the
chapters (Arabic numbers (default), Roman numbers or bullet points) for the
whole section. You can also define if the corresponding chapter should be
listed in the table of contents and if the numbers are displayed or hidden.

It is possible to create dynamic content based on the diagrams a process doc-

umentation is created for. Dynamic content is kept in the Per Diagram or Folder
Structure element.
Dynamically created chapters will get a small loop symbol on their upper right
corner in the template. You can easily combine static and dynamic chapters by
for example, dragging a Chapter/Section element onto a Per Diagram element.

Sample chapter 'Introduction'

A chapter can contain different elements. For example, the chapter "Introduction"
could contain a free text element as the introduction text. Drag the Text element
from the section Static Content in the shape repository to a chapter. Add free text
to the introduction template.

Sample 'Complete overview of the individual diagrams'

In the following example, a graphic for all diagrams is displayed in the chapter
"Overview of individual diagrams":

1. Drag the container element to the appropriate chapter.

Version 15.14 503

15   Workspace administration

For each diagram, the container element will later create a new sec-
tion.

2. Drag the element Diagram Image from the section Diagram Details to the
Per Diagram -element.

3. In the attribute editor, you can restrict what diagram type to be inserted (if
for example only BPMN 2.0 process diagrams should be documented, dis-
able all other chart types).

Version 15.14 504

15   Workspace administration

Diagram details

In addition to a graphical representation, you can represent numerous inform-

ation on the diagram as a whole, such as the diagram attribute and modeling ele-
ments of a certain type. The subitems indicate the specific attributes for each
template element that can be defined:

Version 15.14 505

15   Workspace administration

Element Description
Information Displays one of the diagram attributes Author, Diagram type, Last mod-
about the dia- ified, Link, Path, Revision number, Last author, Publishing status, Pub-
gram lishing date or Authors (all people who worked on the diagram), which can
be chosen in the attribute panel. You can add more than one shape to dis-
play different attributes.
Diagram Creates an image of the diagram. The following attributes can be
image
defined:
o Rotate : defines if the diagram image should be rotated 90°.
The default setting ‘Automatic’ rotates thediagram if it is too
large to fit.
o Orientation : defines in which direction a diagram should be
rotated.
o Stretch over multiple pages : if activated, a diagram is printed
in its original size, over multiple pages if necessary.

Attribute on Select an attribute (or more in 'Multiple choice'), which value

diagram
level should be presented for each diagram (for example process
description).
o Attribute : Specify which attribute to be displayed in the
browser.

Process par- Displays all roles of a diagram. Pool/lanes, additional owner and
ticipants
organizations that are linked through a dictionary entry are
included here.
o Lanes in diagram : Specify whether lanes should apply as pro-
cess participants.
o Additional process participants : Select which process par-
ticipants should be taken into account in the overview (depend-
ing on their RACI property).
o Omit pools : Specifies whether pools should be included in the
overview.

Data objects Lists all used data objects of a diagram.

Version 15.14 506

15   Workspace administration

Element Description
IT Systems Lists all used IT systems of a diagram.
Process trig- Lists all start events of a diagram.
ger
o Only named events : Specifies whether events that have no
name, should be listed as process triggers.

Process res- Lists all end events of a diagram.

ults
o Only named events : Specifies whether events that have no
name, should be listed as process results.

Linked dic- Displays all dictionary entries linked in the diagram regardless of
tionary
entries their category. Entries that are linked via a diagram element as
well as links via own attributes are considered.
o Categories : Select from which categories dictionary entries
should be included in the overview. To enable a better over-
view in the list view, you can create a heading for each of these
categories in the form of a sub-chapter.

Document This overview displays all versions of the diagram including the
revisions
creator and revision comment.
o Limit : In the attribute editor, you can define the maximum num-
ber of revisions displayed, default: 10.

Element details

Information shapes on element level require another kind of sorting shape as dia-
gram elements will be listed in a certain way here. You have to choose between a
table or a list view. If you add for a table, for each new information a column will
be added for the table.

1. Add a Table of Process Elements or a List of Process Elements to the doc-

umentation template. To change the layout later, alter the value of the Dis-
play as -attribute.
2. The new element will function as a frame to display element-based inform-
ation. Now you can add content to the table/list and define their attributes.

Version 15.14 507

15   Workspace administration

3. The columns 'Name' and 'Responsible' are created by default. Now you can
drag and drop 'Element Details' elements into the table/list. A column will be
added for each new element.

In list view, subitems are added instead of columns that you can also
select and edit.

4. If you want to delete a column, select it and click the Delete button in the
menu bar of the Editor, or alternatively use the delete key on your keyboard.
5. If you have selected an Attribute on element level or Attribute on element
level (Multiselection) , specify now a column header (attribute Title in the
attribute editor) and select the attributes to be viewed.
6. In the attribute editor, click the Edit button. In the dialog that opens, select
the corresponding attribute for each modeling element. The elements Pro-
cess participants , Data objects , IT systems and Used dictionary entries
provide information about the named item regarding the listed elements.
7. Configure the appearance and content of the table (or list) in the attribute
editor.

Table column elements

The following elements can be dragged into a table as a column:

Element Description
Attribute on ele- Select an attribute whose value will be listed for each element in the
ment level diagram. A dialog will open, allowing you to configure the selection.
Attribute on ele- Select multiple attributes whose value will be listed for each element
ment level (multise- in the diagram. A dialog will open, allowing you to configure the
lection) selection.
Process par- Insert a column that displays the element's process participants
ticipants (organizations, departments or additional participants).
Data objects Insert a column that displays the data objects that are connected to
the element.

Version 15.14 508

15   Workspace administration

Element Description
IT systems Insert a column that displays the IT systems connected to the ele-
ment.
Linked dictionary Insert a column that displays all the dictionary entries linked to the
entries element.
Element type Insert a column that displays the element type.

The resulting table could look as follows:

Sample tables

Sample: element overview table

Sample list

Sample: element overview list

Sample exported table

This example table contains the name, the responsible role and documents that
are connected to each element of the diagram:

Version 15.14 509

15   Workspace administration

An exported element overview table

Table and list-specific attributes

You can configure the following properties of a table/list of process element

shapes in the attribute panel:
o Diagram element types : choose elements that are supposed to be displayed
for each modeling language or notation.
o Numbered : define whether the elements should be numbered.
o Ignore unnamed elements : select whether to ignore or list unnamed ele-
ments.
o Sorting : element information can be sorted by diagram and process flow or
alphanumerically by element type and label.
o Display as : Choose between list and table.

If all flows after a gateway have probabilities, flows are sorted by prob-
ability.

Version 15.14 510

15   Workspace administration

If only some flows have probabilities, the sorting follows additional

rules:
o If both outgoing sequence flows have probabilities, then the one
with the higher probability is listed first.
o If only one or none have probabilities, then the positioning of their
target element on the canvas is used:
o The one positioned higher ends up in a higher list position.

o If both are on the same height, then the element that is further

left on the canvas is listed in a higher position.

o If neither of them has a target element, then their IDs are com-
pared to ensure consistent behavior.

[Link] Defining multiple languages for templates

It is possible to define multiple languages for diagrams in SAP Signavio Process

Manager. This feature is also available for templates.
If multiple languages are defined for you workspace, a little flag symbol in the
upper right corner of the template editor will allow switching the language of the
template content.

Elements that are not available in the selected language will be highlighted. By
clicking their title, you can translate them.

The original language will be displayed in the attribute editor. You can translate
the elements here.

Version 15.14 511

15   Workspace administration

If templates were defined in multiple languages you can choose the desired lan-
guage each time a process documentation is created.

15.13 Embedding SAP Signavio diagrams in 3rd-party

systems
There are several options to make SAP Signavio diagrams available in 3rd-party
systems:
o You can embed SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub via an iframe.
Then, all diagrams are available to users. Read more in section Embedding
SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub via an iframe.
o You can also embed single SAP Signavio diagrams:
o Embedding diagrams as HTML code
o Embedding diagrams as a Google gadget
o Embed a diagram as an image
o Embedding diagrams in MediaWiki
o Embedding diagrams in Microsoft SharePoint wiki pages

15.13.1 Embedding SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub via

an iframe
SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub can be embedded in third-party sys-
tems via an inline frame (iframe). When using an internal wiki, SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Collaboration Hub can be embedded to provide direct access for authorized
users. Like this, users can access the interactive functionality of SAP Signavio
Process Collaboration Hub alongside traditional documentation systems, such as
Atlassian Confluence.

Version 15.14 512

15   Workspace administration

Learn how to integrate an iFrame into a Confluence documentation.

The access control rules that normally apply to SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub also apply to an embedded instance:
o A user who is logged in will see the SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub
preview, that means every diagram of the workspace he can access, as well
as his private diagrams.
o In case SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub is integrated with your Dir-
ectory Service, a user will be able to see diagrams they have read access to.
o A user who is not logged in will receive an SSL connection error.

[Link] Trusted domains

SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub can only be embedded in

third-party systems via iframes if trusted domains are used. If a
domain not included in the trusted domains is used, web browsers
don't load the page, and instead show a security violation page to the
users.

To embed SAP Signavio products in an iframe using trusted domains, you have
the following options:
o Use one of the public trusted domains
o Add workspace-specific trusted domains

Use public trusted domains

Some common third-party tools use domains that are public trusted domains.
When you embed SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub in the following
domains, no further action is required on your side:
o *.[Link]
o *.[Link]
o *.[Link]

Version 15.14 513

15   Workspace administration

Add workspace-specific trusted domains

When you want to embed SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub in other third-
party tools, you have to add the domains to the security configuration and adapt
the URLs.
Follow these steps:

1. In the Explorer, open Setup> Edit security configuration.

2. In the section Domain policies, add the trusted domains.

3. Add the parameter ?t=<workspace_id> to the URLs used for embedding.

[Link] URL format

To embed SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub in a website or wiki via

iframe, add an iframe tag and insert the SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub
URL as its source. Make sure to use a URL of the form [Link]
[Link]/intralink/portal?t=<workspace ID > (European Server), [Link]
[Link]/intralink/portal?t=<workspace ID > (US server) or [Link]
[Link]/intralink/portal?t=<workspace ID > (Australian server).
It is also possible to define a diagram that is displayed by default. To define a
default diagram, its diagram identifier can be added to the URL: [Link]
[Link]/intralink/portal#model/<DiagramID>?usp=sharing. The example iframe
below defines such a start diagram. To find the diagram link, open the cor-
responding diagram in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub and copy its
URL.

When defining a start diagram, make sure that this diagram has been
published to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub in the correct
revision. Otherwise, SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub guests
that are not logged in will not be able to see it.

An iframe that embeds SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub can look like
this, for example:
<iframe
src="[Link]
width="90%"
height="90%"
name="SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub">
</iframe>

Version 15.14 514

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Next steps

o Find the workspace ID

15.14 Link training content from SAP Enable Now to

BPMN processes
You can combine training content from SAP Enable Now with business pro-
cesses from SAP Signavio Process Manager. For that, you import a BPMN pro-
cess in SAP Enable Now, link training content to the process steps, and import
the extended process into SAP Signavio Process Manager.
In the BPMN process, the links are then available as process step attributes. The
actual training content stays in SAP Enable Now. SAP Signavio users can click
the links to be redirected to the training content in SAP Enable Now.

SAP Enable Now supports BPMN diagrams created in SAP Signavio

Process Manager.

To link training content with a business process, follow these steps:

1. In SAP Signavio Process Manager, create a custom attribute for the pro-
cess steps in BPMN diagrams.
The attribute is used to add the link to the training content. The data type of
the attribute must be Document/URL. Read more in section Add and man-
age custom attributes.

2. Export your BPMN diagram from SAP Signavio Process Manager as XML.
To do so, follow the instructions in section Export a BPMN diagram as
XML.

Include linked subprocesses in the export, otherwise they are

lost during the re-import into SAP Signavio Process Manager.

3. Import the XML file to SAP Enable Now.

Version 15.14 515

15   Workspace administration

4. In SAP Enable Now, link training contents to the process steps. Use the cus-
tom attribute for this.

5. Export the process diagram from SAP Enable Now.

6. Import the diagram into SAP Signavio Process Manager. To do so, follow
the instructions in section Import a BPMN 2.0 XML diagram.

Import the diagram as a revision. To do so, select the original dia-

gram in the explorer. In the import dialog, activate the option to
create a new revision.

The training content is linked with the BPMN process.

Find detailed user instructions on the SAP Signavio integration in SAP Enable
Now in the SAP Help Portal.

15.15 Integrating SAP Signavio Process Manager with

SAP Signavio Process Governance

We are working on expanding and improving the functions related

to process governance. This section will be completely revised
soon.
For more information about SAP Signavio Process Governance, con-
tact sales@[Link].

To use this feature, you need SAP Signavio Process Governance licenses.
With the SAP Signavio Process Governance integration, you combine SAP Sig-
navio Process Manager with an execution system.

15.15.1 Setup
To establish a link between SAP Signavio Process Manager and SAP Signavio
Process Governance, open the explorer, select a diagram and click SAP Sig-
navio Process Governance - Execute in SAP Signavio Process Governance .

Version 15.14 516

15   Workspace administration

If the integration has not been set up, an activation dialog is displayed. Activate
the check box at the bottom of the dialog and click Activate.
A new dialog will guide you through the deployment of your first process as
described at Process deployment .

15.15.2 Process design

You can design SAP Signavio Process Governance processes like any other pro-
cesses .
We recommend to check the BPMN elements that are supported by SAP Sig-
navio Process Governance, read more in section Processes.
Let's take a look at a simple document approval process:

The process consists of only basic BPMN elements.

We recommend to stick to the following elements for your first SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Governance processes:
o Pools/Lanes
o Simple Start and End Events
o Exclusive and Parallel Gateways
o User and System Tasks
o Sequence Flows

When designing a process, it often helps to make use of the Collaboration and
Simulating BPMN diagrams features.

Version 15.14 517

15   Workspace administration

For example, to increase process awareness and encourage feedback, you can
publish the diagram in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.

15.15.3 Process deployment

To transfer a process to SAP Signavio Process Governance, select it in the
explorer and click SAP Signavio Process Governance - Execute in SAP Sig-
navio Process Governance .
If the process contains elements that are not supported by SAP Signavio Process
Governance, a warning is shown. If these elements are relevant for process exe-
cution, adjust the process accordingly.
Select the diagram language the process should have in SAP Signavio Process
Governance and click Transfer :

15.15.4 Adjusting deployed processes

Sometimes you will find it necessary to adjust the process after a couple of test
runs in SAP Signavio Process Governance.
o You can adjust the process in SAP Signavio Process Manager and re-deploy it
as described above at Process deployment .
o You can adjust the process directly in SAP Signavio Process Governance as
described at Processes . Then, you can use the Execute in SAP Signavio
Process Governance function in the explorer to transfer the changes back to
SAP Signavio Process Manager.

For more information about process execution, refer to the sections Working with
approval workflows and Starting a new process case .

15.16 SAP Signavio Process Manager for SAP

Solution Manager 7.2
SAP Solution Manager is one of SAP's Application Lifecycle Management (ALM)
offerings.
SAP Signavio Process Manager can be used as an interface for SAP Solution
Manager.

Version 15.14 518

15   Workspace administration

You can import the following content type from SAP Solution Manager to SAP Sig-
navio Process Manager:
o The Executable Library as dictionary entries
o The Process Step Library as dictionary entries
o Process diagrams as BPMN diagrams

SAP Solution Manager is the leading system, this means changes made in SAP
Signavio Process Manager are overwritten by an import.
You can export the following content types from SAP Signavio Process Manager
to SAP Solution Manager):
o Folders
o Sub folders as scenarios
o BPMN diagrams as processes
o Tasks as Process Steps and linked dictionary entries as Process Step Ori-
ginals
o Custom attributes

15.16.1 Process structure on the SAP side

How processes are created and structured differs between SAP Solution Man-
ager and SAP Signavio Process Manager.
In SAP Solution Manger, unlike SAP Signavio Process Manager, there is a dis-
tinction between process definitions and visual process diagrams.
A structure that contains process definitions is called a scenario. A process defin-
ition can contain a list of Process Steps. Process Steps are stored in the Process
Step library and can contain additional links, material and attributes. This list of
Process Steps can be used to create visual process diagrams.

15.16.2 Set up the integration with SAP Solution Manager 7.2

SAP and SAP Signavio have jointly created a document with an integ-
ration overview and best practices, you can find it here.

To set up the integration, follow the descriptions in the sections Configure SAP
Solution Manager and Configure SAP Signavio Process Manager.

Version 15.14 519

15   Workspace administration

If you need additional information, please contact our SAP Signavio service
experts on the SAP ONE Support Launchpad.

15.16.3 Next steps

o Configure SAP Solution Manager
o Configure SAP Signavio Process Manager
o Import Solution Manager content to the dictionary
o Export to Solution Manager
o Troubleshooting

15.16.4 Configure SAP Solution Manager

To prepare SAP Solution Manager for the integration with SAP Signavio Process
Manager, first configure your systems to allow communication with SAP Signavio
Process Manager and then set up the solution you want to integrate.

[Link] Scopes

You can limit the imported content with Scopes. Scopes are defined in SAP Solu-
tion Manager, for details see this section of the SAP Solution Manager WIKI.
If you don't select a Scope for the import, the full branch content is used as the
basis for all imports.
The first export to SAP Solution Manager creates a completely new folder and
process structure.
When you limit the imported content with a Scope, your Scope needs to include
the folder that the export created. Then all following exports update the content of
that folder.
If content is not included in the Scope, this content won't be updated during later
imports, but imported again as a copy.

[Link] Necessary user rights

You need to enter credentials for a user in the connection setup. The rights this
user needs can be system-specific.
To create the user in SAP Solution Manager, follow these steps:

Version 15.14 520

15   Workspace administration

1. In the User Maintenance, create a new user, for example with the name
CONNECTOR.

2. In Logon Data, set the User Type to Service.

3. In Roles, assign the following roles:

o SAP_SM_SL_DISPLAY
o SAP_SM_SL_EDIT_BPMN
o SAP_SM_SL_ADMIN

4. Adjust the role SAP_SM_SL_ADMIN:

a. Double-click SAP_SM_SL_ADMIN and create a copy.

b. Add a prefix to the name of the copy, for example Z_SAP_SM_SL_

ADMIN.

c. In Display Roles, go to Authorizations > Edit Authorization Data and

Generate Profiles.

d. Navigate to Solution Manager > Solution Administration > Activity.

e. Double-click the description text ("Create or generate...") next to Activ-

ity .

f. Enable activity 61 Export.

g. Save and generate the adjusted role.

5. Save the user.

This section only provides an overview of the necessary settings.

For a detailed description of the SAP Solution Manager User Man-
agement, refer to the SAP Help Portal.

[Link] Network & firewall requirements

Ensure your security settings allow incoming requests from SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Manager to your SAP Solution Manager server (to the URL/port you need to
specify later). The IP addresses of the SAP Solution Manager integration service
are [Link], [Link], and [Link] for [Link] . You
need to use all 3 of them.

Version 15.14 521

15   Workspace administration

For [Link] (US server), the IP addresses are

[Link], [Link], and [Link]. You need to use all 3 of them.
For [Link] (Australian server), the IP addresses are
[Link], [Link], and [Link]. You need to use all 3 of them.

Shield your SAP Solution Manager server

You can optionally use a reverse proxy to shield your SAP Solution Manager
server. The following diagram shows communication between SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Manager and Solution Manager:

The specific Solution Manager API endpoints we use for this integration are doc-
umented by SAP here.
If you want to set up a reverse-proxy, you find all the necessary information in the
linked SAP documentation. The protocol being used to access this API is always
HTTPS. SAP Signavio Process Manager never tries to establish a connection
using unsecured HTTP requests.

[Link] Basic administration

Activate Process Management in SAP Solution Manager as described in the

SAP Solution Administration documentation .

Version 15.14 522

15   Workspace administration

Ensure that in the list of gateway services for Process Management,

the following services are activated:AGS_GBC_ODATA_BPMN_SRV
(Graphical Component BPMN Gateway Service) AGS_GBC_ODATA_
GOM_SRV (GBC GOM Gateway Service)PROCESSMANAGEMENT (SAP
Solution Manager APIs for third party tool integration)

[Link] Solution administration

SAP recommends that you use exactly one solution for the production
scope of your SAP Solution Manager.

To set up the solution you want to integrate, follow these steps:

1. Open theSolution Administration, either through the GUI or by executing

the transaction soladm.
2. Create a new solution or select an existing one.

Creating a new solution

3. Select the branch you want to use for the integration.

4. Leave the browser tab open or document the names of the Solution and
Branch. You'll need them when configuring the integration on the SAP Sig-
navio Process Manager side.

You'll also need the SAP solution administration later for Configure
attribute mappings .

Version 15.14 523

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Next steps

Configure SAP Signavio Process Manager

15.16.5 Configure SAP Signavio Process Manager

When you have configured SAP Solution Manager as described in section Con-
figure SAP Solution Manager, you can configure SAP Signavio Process Man-
ager.
To set up SAP Signavio Process Manager for the integration, you first set up the
connection as described in this section. You then define attribute mappings as
described in section Configure attribute mappings.

[Link] Connection user

You need to enter credentials for a user in the connection setup. The rights this
user needs can be system-specific.
How to create the user in SAP Solution Manager is described in the configuration
of SAP Solution Manager, in section Necessary user rights

[Link] Set up the connect

ion to SAP Solution Manager

1. In the SAP Signavio Process Manager explorer, select Setup - Manage

SAP Solution Manager 7.2.
The settings open in a new tab.

2. Point to your Solution Manager endpoint, which typically is <solu-

tionManagerURL>:<port>sap/opu/odata/sap/PROCESSMANAGEMENT/ . <solu-
tionManagerURL> stands for the base URL of your SAP Solution Manager
server and <port> for its port number.
o Your SAP Solution Manager server needs to accept incoming
requests on the port you specified in the URL from SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Manager's Solution Manager integration service. The IP
addresses of this service are [Link], [Link], and
[Link] for [Link] . You need to use all 3 of
them.

Version 15.14 524

15   Workspace administration

For [Link] (US server), the IP addresses are

[Link], [Link], and [Link]. You need to use all 3
of them.
For [Link] (Australian server), the IP addresses
are [Link], [Link], and [Link]. You need to use
all 3 of them.

3. Enter your credentials.

4. Enter your solution name.

5. Enter a branch name of your solution.

o We recommend using the design branch for the SAP Signavio Process
Manager import. You find more information about branches in SAP Solu-
tion Manager in this article from SAP.

6. You can limit the imported content by selecting a Scope ID.

o Scopes are defined in SAP Solution Manager, for details see this sec-
tion of the SAP Solution Manager WIKI.
o If you don't select a Scope, the full branch content is used as the basis
for all imports.

7. Set up the authentication, for details see below.

8. Click Save.

[Link] Using self-signed certificates for server-side authentication

SAP Signavio accepts certificate chains signed by any common cer-

tificate authority by default. Uploading a certificate is only necessary
when your Solution Manager server tries to authenticate itself against
SAP Signavio using a certificate, which is self-signed instead of signed
by a trusted certificate authority.

You can use self-signed certificates with your connection configuration. Once
uploaded, this certificate is trusted on every request sent to Solution Manager.

Version 15.14 525

15   Workspace administration

Self-signed certificates must be in the SSL X509 format encoded with Base64
(this happens by default when exporting certificates from a web browser). If your
certificate is in the PKCS7 format, you need to convert it. Make sure your cer-
tificate is in the following format:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
followed by the content of the certificate on a new line.
Then, on another new line, finish the certificate with
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
To upload your certificate, in the Configure tab, click Select a certificate next to
SSL Certificate.

[Link] Keystore for client-side authentication

You can additionally upload a keystore containing a private key so that your Solu-
tion Manager server can validate that requests are indeed coming from the SAP
Signavio Solution Manager connector (client-side authentication).
To set up client-side authentication, follow these steps:

1. In the SAP Signavio Process Manager Explorer, select Setup - Manage

SAP Solution Manager 7.2.
The settings open in a new tab.

2. In the tab Connection settings, upload the keystore for client-side authen-
tication.

3. Enter the keystore password.

4. Click Save.
Two-way authentication is set up.

The PKCS12 format is accepted for keystores. Uploaded files are validated.

[Link] Technical information

SAP Signavio uses the API of the Process Management component of Solution
Manager 7.2 to read and update the branch content. We use GET and PUT
requests via https.

Version 15.14 526

15   Workspace administration

For session handling, the SAP Signavio connector authenticates with GET
request, sending a username and password and requesting a CSRF token. The
response from Solution Manager is an unauthenticated session and a CSRF
token. The token from the first request is used for all further communication. It's a
unidirectional connection.

[Link] Next steps

o Configure attribute mappings
o Import Solution Manager content to the dictionary

15.16.6 Configure attribute mappings

You can configure attribute mappings that specify how content structures in SAP
Signavio Process Manager are aligned to content structures in SAP Solution Man-
ager.
To configure mappings, follow these steps:

1. Switch to the Attribute mappings tab.

2. Define the SAP Solution Manager attribute that stores the SAP Signavio
Process Collaboration Hub link to exported processes.
3. Optionally, you can configure mappings between SAP Signavio Process
Manager custom attributes and SAP Solution Manager attributes.

The following SAP Signavio Process Manager attribute types are supported:
o Boolean
o Number
o Single-line text
o Multi-line text
o Drop-down (enumeration)
o Dictionary link

If the SAP Signavio Process Manager attributes are defined as lists, the mapped
Solution Manager 7.2 attributes have to be of the type multivalue to be com-
patible.
Read more about how to configure attributes in Solution Manager in this SAP
blog post .

Version 15.14 527

15   Workspace administration

15.16.7 Import Solution Manager content to the dictionary

You can import the following from SAP Solution Manager into the SAP Signavio
Process Manager dictionary:
o All existing Executables
o Process Steps from the Process Step Library

SAP Solution Manager is the leading system, this means changes made in SAP
Signavio Process Manager are overwritten by an import.

Trigger the import to SAP Signavio Process Manager before you start
modeling your processes. This makes the imported content available
to the modelers when you start mapping your processes.

You can import one or both content types into the dictionary. When you import
both types, modelers can use both in diagrams.

[Link] Create custom dictionary categories

We recommend that you create custom dictionary categories specifically for SAP
Solution Manager content. Only workspace administrators should have write
access to these categories.
o The custom dictionary category for Executables must be of the type Others
o The custom dictionary category for Process Steps must be of the type Activ-
ities

How you create custom dictionary categories is described in section Add custom
categories for dictionary entries.

[Link] Import Executables

Updates on dictionary items made in SAP Signavio Process Manager

are overwritten by an import. We recommend that only workspace
administrators get write access to the Executables category.

Version 15.14 528

15   Workspace administration

In SAP, Executables are program functions that form the building blocks of a solu-
tion's business processes. You can import the definitions of available Execut-
ables from SAP Solution Manager to SAP Signavio Process Manager as
dictionary entries and use them in your process models.

All Executables

All Executables from the Executable Library from the connected SAP Solution
Manager are copied into the designated dictionary category.
Only title and description attributes are imported.
Type Name Title
Transaction TRANID
Program PROGID
FIORI_SEMANTIC_OBJECT / FIORI_
Fiori-App
ACTION
URL WEBLINK
Custom URL CUSTELEMENTID
SF-App SFDEEPLINK
Web Dynpro ABAP Application WDYAPPID
Web Dynpro ABAP Application Con-
WDYAPPCONFIGID
figuration
BSP Application BSPAPPID
CRM WebClient Application CRMWEBCLIENTLOGLINKID
CRM People-Centric UI CRM_BSP_FRAMEID
Java Web Dynpro WDY_JAVA_SOLMANID

To configure and run Executables imports, follow these steps:

1. Open the Dictionary Mappings tab.

2. Select the custom dictionary category of the type Others.

3. Click Import Transactions.

The Executables are imported.

Updates for Executables made in SAP Signavio Process Manager are over-
written by an import.

Version 15.14 529

15   Workspace administration

Current limitations

o When Executables are imported, the full library is imported. Limiting which
Executables are imported is not possible, since the Solution Manager API
only allows to import the full branch content.
o The folder hierarchy from Solution Manager is not imported, all Executables
are added to the same dictionary category. A dictionary entry for an impor-
ted Executables contains the Solution Manager folder path for this Execut-
able.
o Only the name and description of the Executables are imported into the dic-
tionary. It isn't possible to import attributes.

[Link] Import Solution Manager Process Steps

Updates on dictionary items made in SAP Signavio Process Manager

are overwritten by an import. We recommend that only workspace
administrators get write access to the Process Steps category.

When you import Process Steps to the dictionary, modelers can link BPMN tasks
directly to Process Steps. This way, the tasks contain all additional links, material
and attributes defined in the linked Process Steps when exported to Solution Man-
ager later.

1. Open the Dictionary Mappings tab.

2. Select the custom dictionary category of the type Activities.

3. Click Import Process Steps.

The Process Steps are imported.

Current limitations

o All Process Steps are added to the same dictionary category, the folder hier-
archy from Solution Manager is not imported. A dictionary entry for an impor-
ted Process Step contains the Solution Manager folder path for this Process
Step.
o Only the name and description of the Process Steps are imported into the
dictionary.

Version 15.14 530

15   Workspace administration

o If a Process Step is created in SAP Signavio Process Manager as a new dic-

tionary item and referenced by at least one task, this addition is imported to
SAP Solution Manager. A new Process Step original is created in the library
and the exported Process Step references it. All other updates on dictionary
items made in SAP Signavio Process Manager are overwritten by an import.
This is why we recommend that only workspace administrators get write
access to the Process Steps category.

15.16.8 Copy processes from SAP Solution Manager 7.2

You can copy processes, for example SAP Best Practice Process Models, includ-
ing folder structures, from SAP Solution Manager to SAP Signavio Process Man-
ager.
While executable transactions and process steps are imported regularly, pro-
cesses are usually copied only once.
SAP Best Practice Process Models are provided by SAP as templates for best
practices processes, the copied process models can then be customized in SAP
Signavio Process Manager.

Once you have copied diagrams from SAP Solution Manager 7.2, we
recommend to edit the diagrams in SAP Signavio Process Manager.
How you use the modeling tools is described in section Modeling.

[Link] Current limitations

The following limitation applies to copying processes from SAP Solution Man-
ager:
o If processes are available in multiple languages in SAP Solution Manager,
only the default language is copied.

[Link] Prerequisite: Create a Process Document

For the integration to work, you need to create a Process Document for all rel-
evant processes before you start the first import.
While creating of this document is necessary for successfully importing content
from SAP Solution Manager, the document can be ignored once it was created.
How to generate a Process Document is described in this SAP blog post.

Version 15.14 531

15   Workspace administration

In the section Assignment group filters, you need to select Diagrams and Docu-
mentation. When you follow the procedure described in the blog post, this is Step
3.

[Link] Process structure on the SAP side

In SAP Solution Manger, unlike SAP Signavio Process Manager, there is a dis-
tinction between process definitions and visual process diagrams.
A structure that contains process definitions is called a scenario. A process defin-
ition can contain a list of Process Steps. Process Steps are stored in the Process
Step Library. This list of Process Steps can be used to create visual process dia-
grams. The same process definition can be represented as several, equally valid
visual process diagrams. This means a process definition can include one or mul-
tiple visual process diagrams.
You can also create visual process models with draft Process Steps not stored in
the Process Step Library. In this case, the process definition doesn't contain a list
of Process Steps and is represented as visual diagrams only.
Visual process models can contain links to sub-processes.

Mapping of the SAP process structure to the SAP Signavio Process Manager process structure

A scenario is copied as a folder. Process definitions, the list of Process Steps and
visual process diagrams are copied.
If Process Steps were previously imported into the dictionary, imported BPMN
tasks are linked to Process Steps. For more information about the dictionary
import, see section Import Solution Manager content to the dictionary.
Custom attributes are copied if they are configured in the mapping, for details see
section Configure attribute mappings.

[Link] Import of process diagrams

In SAP Solution Manager, the same process definition can be represented as sev-
eral, equally valid visual process diagrams.
In SAP Signavio Process Manager there is no separation between processes and
process diagrams. This means if in SAP Solution Manager there are multiple dia-
grams of the same process, these diagrams are imported as separate process
diagrams.

Version 15.14 532

15   Workspace administration

Preceding and subsequent processes

For linking preceding and subsequent processes, you need to configure a custom
attribute in SAP Signavio Process Manager. This attribute has to be of type Dia-
gram link (as list).
To link preceding processes, the attribute needs to be defined for BPMN 2.0 start
events. To link subsequent processes, the attribute needs to be defined for
BPMN 2.0 end events.
How you create custom attributes is described in section Add and manage cus-
tom attributes.

Current limitations for diagram import

At the moment, the following limitations apply to copying process diagrams from
SAP Solution Manager:
o Only the diagram types Process and Collaboration are imported, universal
diagrams are not imported.
o Pools and lanes are not yet linked to dictionary items .
o Only a single subprocess can be linked in SAP Signavio Process Manager,
while SAP Solution Manager supports multiple links. If no default link is
defined, then the first link is used.
o Events are not linked to interfaces.
o Elements of the type System (IT systems in SAP Signavio Process
Manager) are not imported.

[Link] Trigger a copy from SAP Solution Manager

When you trigger a new copy, a new folder is created, with new copies
of the diagrams and folder structure. Existing copies aren't overwritten.

1. In the SAP Signavio Process Manager Explorer, select Setup - Manage

SAP Solution Manager 7.2.

2. Switch to the Processes tab.

3. Select the custom attributes for linking preceding and subsequent pro-
cesses. For details, see section Preceding and subsequent processes.

Version 15.14 533

15   Workspace administration

4. In the Copy section, you can enable Add process name to the diagram
name.
By default, only the diagram name from SAP Solution Manager is used.

5. Click Copy process diagrams and folders.

Copying starts. The copy procedure can take a while, depending on the
number of copied processes. Don't close the window or start a second
import until you see a result message
When the copy procedure has finished, you get a notification how many pro-
cesses were copied.

A new folder is created automatically, with the naming pattern Solution-

Branch-timestamp .

When you trigger a new copy, a new folder is created, with new copies
of the diagrams and folder structure. Existing copies aren't overwritten.

1. In the Process Manager Explorer, select Setup - Manage SAP Solution

Manager 7.2.

2. Switch to the Processes tab.

3. Click Copy processes and folders. Copying starts. The copy procedure can
take a while, depending on the number of copied processes.
When the copy procedure has finished, you get a notification how many pro-
cesses were copied.
A new folder is created automatically, with the naming pattern Solution-
Branch-timestamp .

15.16.9 Export to Solution Manager

You can export the following content types from SAP Signavio Process Manager
to SAP Solution Manager:
o Folders
o Sub folders as scenarios
o BPMN diagrams as processes

Version 15.14 534

15   Workspace administration

o Tasks as Process Steps and linked dictionary entries as Process Step Ori-
ginals
o Custom attributes

Conflicts during import or export can be found in a log output.

Export BPM projects to SAP Solution Manager

When you export content to SAP Solution Manager for the first time, all
selected folders and all objects in these folders are newly created.
Later exports update the content and do not create duplicates.

Follow these steps:

1. Select the folder you want to export and select Import/Export - Export to
SAP® Solution Manager® 7.2 .

You can't export single diagrams, you always need to export the
folder containing the diagram.

A new tab opens.

2. Click Start.
The status of the export is shown.

After a successful export, the selected folders and processes are available in
SAP Solution Manager.

[Link] Export links to executable transactions to SAP Solution Manager

Executable transactions are not exported to SAP Solution Manager. Instead,

links to the transaction definition in Solution Manager are exported with any
BPMN task that contains transaction references, either directly or indirectly via
reused Process Steps. Changes made in SAP Solution Manager are updated in
SAP Signavio Process Manager when the import is triggered again. No new
object is created in this case.
Changes to executable transactions on the SAP Signavio Process Manager side
are ignored during export. This means that when you create a new Process Step
as a dictionary entry linking to an executable transaction, this executable

Version 15.14 535

15   Workspace administration

transaction is not recognized in SAP Solution Manager.

You need a custom attribute for the export, for referencing transactions in busi-
ness processes. We recommend that you create an attribute specifically for this
purpose.
How to create custom attributes is described in section Add and manage custom
attributes.
To include links to executable transactions in your exports, follow these steps:

1. Configure a custom attribute of the type Dictionary link (list) for the element
type task of BPMN diagrams.

2. Restrict the attribute to only support dictionary entries of the category you
configured for the import of transactions.

3. Switch to the SAP Solution Manager configuration and open the tab Dic-
tionary Mappings.

4. In the Export section, select your custom attribute.

Now linked transactions are part of your export.

5. To start an export, close the configuration tab and switch back to the
explorer .

[Link] Export Process Steps to the Process Step Library in SAP Solution Man-
ager

Solution Manager requires that every Process Step in a process references a Pro-
cess Step original from the Process Step Library. For every exported BPMN task,
one of the following actions is performed:

If the task references a Process Step (via an imported dictionary item)

no new Process Step original is created in Solution Manager. The exported Process
Step references the existing Process Step original.
If the task references a dictionary item that hasn't been imported from the Process Step
Library
A new Process Step original is created in the library and the exported Process Step
references it. For all following tasks referencing the same dictionary item, the expor-
ted Process Step will reference this Process Step original (this means only one ori-
ginal is created per dictionary item). For subsequent exports, the Process Step
original is reused.
If the task references no dictionary item:
a new Process Step original is created and the exported Process Step references it.
On subsequent exports the Process Step original is reused.

Version 15.14 536

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Changing the link of an dictionary item

Removing a link to a dictionary item or linking to a different dictionary item in SAP

Signavio Process Manager doesn't adjust the existing link in SAP Solution Man-
ager if the item was exported with a different state before.
If you want to change a link to a dictionary item, follow these steps:

1. Delete the task in SAP Signavio Process Manager.

2. Create a new task with the new link.
3. In SAP Solution Manager, delete the outdated item.
4. Export the new item to SAP Solution Manager.

[Link] Deleting items

You can't delete SAP Solution Manager items in SAP Signavio Process Manager.
Deleted items in SAP Signavio Process Manager are still present in the SAP Solu-
tion Manager after an export. To delete an item, for example a model, a directory,
or an attribute, you must delete it on the SAP Solution Manager side.

15.16.10 Troubleshooting
[Link] Setup/connection settings

If you have problems setting up the integration, test the availability of the Process
Management Gateway Service (typically sap/opu/odata/sap/PROCESSMANAGEMENT/
):

1. In the SAP GUI, execute the SAP Gateway Client transaction /IWFND/GW_
CLIENT .

2. Send a GET request against: sap/op-

u/odata/sap/PROCESSMANAGEMENT/?$format=json .
You also need to ensure this request is accepted when made from the origin
SAP Signavio Process Manager's integration service.

Version 15.14 537

15   Workspace administration

Problem/Error Solution
message
URL is not o Check which URL you have entered for the Solution Man-
reachable/no
message ager. Often this address is an internal one that cannot be
reached from the internet. This means the request needs to
be rerouted, using a reverse proxy, the SAP Cloud Platform
Integration (SCPI), a load balancer, an API management
tool, or something similar. The internal domain has to be
replaced by the URL of this gateway. The component of the
Solution Manager that we access via the API is sap/op-
u/odata/sap/ProcessManagement.
o Check the user rights. If the rights are not sufficient, you get
an unspecific the error message. In that case, you can view
the login of the user in the Solution Manager to confirm that
an incorrect URL is not the cause of the problem.

Connection Check the Solution Name you've entered. It has to be the technical
failed (the Solu- name of the Solution that can be found in the properties section of the
tion does not Solution in the Solution Manager. By default it's the solution name in cap-
exist) ital letters.
Connection Check the branch name you've entered. It has to be the technical name
failed (the of the branch that can be found in the properties section of the branch in
Branch does the Solution Manager. By default it's the branch name in capital letters.
not exist)
Credentials are Check the username and password you've entered to log in to the Solu-
incorrect tion Manager.

Version 15.14 538

15   Workspace administration

Problem/Error Solution
message
Connection 1. Trace the request and check if there is an incoming
can't be estab-
lished request of the IPs [Link], [Link], and
[Link] (US: [Link], [Link], and
[Link], AU [Link], [Link], and
[Link]) at your firewall and/ or the used gateway.
2. If there is no incoming request, check the URL you've
entered and your firewall settings
3. If there is an incoming request, check if there is a login or
login attempt on the SAP Solution Manager with the cre-
dentials entered in the connection settings tab
4. If there is no login, check your gateway settings
5. If the login to the Solution Manager is successful but you
don't get a message that the connection is established:
o check the SSL settings of your network. If you use a
self-signed certificate inside your network or for your
Solution Manager, this certificate needs to be
uploaded in the settings.
o the self-signed certificate is valid for a specific internal
IP address. For the SAP Signavio side of the con-
nection, the answer to the request is coming from the
gateway and not the internal server IP.
6. If you still can't establish a connection, please contact our
SAP Signavio service experts on the SAP ONE Support
Launchpad. To enable our support team to check the logs
for your workspace, open the Attribute mappings tab, and
note the time you did this.

Version 15.14 539

15   Workspace administration

Problem/Error Solution
message
The connection o For the export, SAP Signavio uses a PUT request, check if
was estab-
lished, but dia- your firewall or gateway are blocking these requests.
o There could be a problem with the session handling and the
grams can't be
exported CSRF Token. For the PUT request SAP Signavio uses the
CSRF Token, which is received at the initial login of the ses-
sion. This CRSF Token could be filtered out of the header at
the gateway. It is also possible that the Solution Manager
issued a new CRSF Token for each request.

Virus scan If you get the error message Virus scan profile does not exist,
error message
SAP Signavio Process Manager cannot access the SAP Solu-
tion Manager API.
To have a successful virus scan, an SAP-certified virus scanner
software needs to be installed and configured.
If you assume that there is no risk from connections outside
your network, for example your SAP Solution Manager server is
run in an on-premises structure, it is possible to deactivate the
virus scan.
We recommend to configure your virus scan according to the
SAP specifics.

Version 15.14 540

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Export

Problem Solution
The connection o For the export, SAP Signavio uses a PUT request, check if
was estab-
lished, but dia- your firewall or gateway are blocking these requests.
o There could be a problem with the session handling and the
grams can't be
exported CSRF Token. For the PUT request SAP Signavio uses the
CSRF Token, which is received at the initial login of the ses-
sion. This CRSF Token could be filtered out of the header at
the gateway. It is also possible that the Solution Manager
issued a new CRSF Token for each request.

Exports fail SAP Signavio Process Manager is only able to act as connector
to the SAP Solution Manager. This connection is not able to
verify the constraints of SAP Solution Manager attributes, for
example a size limit. When an attribute is mapped that contains
a value that is longer than this size maximum, the export fails. In
that case, check the attribute constraints.

Export single You cannot export single models. To export content, select
models is not
possible folders that contain the models to be exported. Every model and
every subfolder contained in the selected folder is exported.
To export BPM projects to SAP Solution Manager, proceed as
described in Export BPM projects to SAP Solution Manager .

Models linked To export a model that links to another model by a collapsed

in collapsed
subprocesses subprocess, the linked model must be in the same top-level
are not expor- folder as the model you want to export. Additionally, make sure
ted that the linked model and the main model are always exported
together to ensure that the linked data is consistent.

Export to Solu- For exports to update existing structures, the structures need to
tion Manager
produces be included in the scope definition. You need to adjust your
duplicate cop- scope definition in Solution Manager to include the folder that
ies of process the SAP Signavio export created. Then all following exports
and process
steps update the content of that folder. See section Scopes.
Scopes are defined in SAP Solution Manager, for details see
this section of the SAP Solution Manager WIKI.

Version 15.14 541

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Import into the dictionary

Problem/Question Solution
How is the transaction Via the Processmanagement API.
list imported from Solu-
tion Manager? SAP Signavio uses a GET request to retrieve the con-
tent of the specified branch. Only executable trans-
actions listed in the Executable Library in this branch
are imported.

Is it possible to use an SAP Signavio only imports elements from the Execut-
ABAP program from able Library. If the program can fill the Executable
SAP to define the Library or if you can import the program results into that
scope of the trans- library, you can use the program. SAP Signavio always
action list that is imports the complete library from the branch.
imported?
The program extracts
the executable trans-
actions per system,
per module, or per
function.

15.17 System integration scenarios

While SAP Signavio Process Manager is a powerful tool in itself and in com-
bination with other applications of the Business Transformation Suite, many
organization integrate it with third-party or custom systems of their enterprise
application landscape. This document provides an overview of common integ-
ration scenarios.

15.17.1 Migrating content from other process modeling tools

If you have already modeled some of your processes with a different tool, you
want import your diagrams in SAP Signavio Process Manager without cum-
bersome manual copy-and-paste. SAP Signavio Process Manager supports the

Version 15.14 542

15   Workspace administration

open standard BPMN 2.0 XML for process diagram interchange, but you can also
import diagrams of most popular proprietary formats. Read more in the Importing
overview of this user guide.

15.17.2 Synchronizing data between SAP Signavio Process

Manager and enterprise architecture and document management
systems
Many customers want to exchange data between SAP Signavio Process Man-
ager and enterprise architecture and document management systems, either as a
one-time transfer of enterprise application or document definitions, or to setup
continuous synchronization process.
Depending on the requirements, there are different options for an integration:
o For a one-time transfer of data to SAP Signavio Process Manager, you export
the data from your tool in any spreadsheet-like format and use Import dic-
tionary entries to generate the corresponding dictionary entries.
o For the architecture management tool LeanIX, a special interface is available
that allows a seamless synchronization of LeanIX and SAP Signavio Process
Manager data. Read more in the corresponding LeanIX documentation.
o For custom integrations, you can utilize SAP Signavio Process Manager REST
API to automate data synchronization with third-party systems. To license the
SAP Signavio Process Manager API, contact our Sales Team at sales@sig-
[Link].

15.17.3 Access to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub

SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub is the single source of truth for your
process landscape for all people who contribute to your organization. Con-
sequently, it should be easily accessible and integrated with other systems that
provide your employees with crucial information.
o Set up single sign-on for SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub. Read
more in section Single sign-on using SAML.

Version 15.14 543

15   Workspace administration

15.17.4 Integrating SAP Signavio Process Manager with project

management systems and wikis
Many organizations use multiple systems for knowledge management in addition
to SAP Signavio Process Manager, for example ticket tracking/project man-
agement systems and wikis.
You find instructions on how to embed diagrams in third-party systems at Pub-
lishing diagrams to external systems.
If you have very specific requirements, consider licensing the SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Manager API, which consists of the following two components:
o The REST API allows you to retrieve data from SAP Signavio Process Man-
ager via a popular and well-established data exchange pattern.
o The MASHUP API allows you manipulate the visual properties of embedded
diagrams with custom JavaScript.

15.17.5 Single sign-on

Users find it inconvenient to manage authentication credentials for every system
in your enterprise application landscape. Enabling single sign-on improves user
experience (less time spent on login procedures and password recoveries) and
enhances security (less tempted to use easy-to-guess passwords or write pass-
words on post-its). SAP Signavio Process Manager supports Single sign-on
using SAML. SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub also supports Managing
access to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub for Active Directory ser-
vices.

15.17.6 Integrating SAP Signavio Process Manager with ERP

systems
Many customers use SAP Signavio Process Manager to get the most out of their
ERP implementation projects. Integrating SAP Signavio Process Manager with
your ERP system ensures your process definitions are always in sync with your
ERP system's reality.

Version 15.14 544

15   Workspace administration

[Link] SAP Signavio Process Manager for SAP Solution Manager

Engaging business users is a key success factor for SAP implementation projects
and ongoing system operations. SAP Signavio Process Manager is the perfect
business-facing interface for SAP Solution Manager. Read more about integ-
rating SAP Signavio Process Manager with SAP Solution Manager at SAP Sig-
navio Process Manager for SAP Solution Manager 7.2 .

[Link] Custom API integration

If you use a different ERP system, you can implement a custom integration using
SAP Signavio Process Manager's REST API. REST APIs are programming lan-
guage-independent and follow a popular and well-established data exchange pat-
tern. This simplifies the implementation for your IT department, because your
engineers don't need to learn a new programing language or paradigm. To
license the SAP Signavio Process Manager API, contact our Sales Team at
sales@[Link].

15.17.7 Combine content from SAP Enable Now with BPMN

processes
SAP Enable Now is a platform for collaborative content authoring, management,
and sharing. You can align training content from SAP Enable Now with business
processes from SAP Signavio Process Manager. Read more in section Link train-
ing content from SAP Enable Now to BPMN processes.

15.17.8 Integrating SAP Signavio Process Manager with business

process execution (BPX) engines
Business process execution (BPX) engines allow you to execute the process
models you create with SAP Signavio Process Manager. Because process exe-
cution is based directly on BPMN 2.0 (or DMN 1.1) diagrams, BPX engines close
the communication gap between business and IT in combination with col-
laborative process modeling tools. Generally, you can integrate SAP Signavio
Process Manager with any BPX engine that supports BPMN 2.0 XML. Below we
list some of the most popular engines.

Version 15.14 545

15   Workspace administration

[Link] SAP Signavio Process Governance

SAP Signavio provides its own workflow execution platform SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Governance, which enables business users to automate workflows, while
keeping IT involvement at a minimum. Read more in the chapter Integrating SAP
Signavio Process Manager with SAP Signavio Process Governance of the
SAP Signavio Process Manager user guide. We recommend using SAP Signavio
Process Governance for automating workflows with human participation.

[Link] Red Hat Decision Manager

Red Hat Decision Manager is recommendable to automate IT-heavy, high-

volume processes. To get started with setting up an integration of SAP Signavio
Process Manager and Red Hat Decision Manager, read the following articles:
o Exporting diagrams to Red Hat Decision Manager projects on GitHub
o From Design to Execution with JBoss BPM Suite & SAP Signavio Process
Manager

15.17.9 Generating custom reports

The Creating reports function of SAP Signavio Process Manager can provide
you with detailed insights into diagram and usage metrics. For example, Viewing
governance reports offers an overview of usage statistics and helps you confirm
your process management initiative is really taking off. To create customized
reports, you can use process documentation templates or aggregate data of pro-
cess characteristics reports with spreadsheet software like Microsoft Excel. We
recommend creating custom reports by utilizing the REST API only in scenarios
with very specific requirements that cannot be fulfilled otherwise.

15.17.10 Translating SAP Signavio Process Manager content with

external tools and services
If you are part of an internationally operating organization, you might want to doc-
ument at least some of your processes in multiple languages. SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Manager supports the creation of multilingual content - see Translating
diagrams and Translate content with PO files. Some customers prefer to out-
source the content translations to a third party, who does not have direct access

Version 15.14 546

15   Workspace administration

to the SAP Signavio Process Manager workspace. In such a scenario, you can
setup a custom integration - for example with a translation management system -
through SAP Signavio Process Manager's REST API. To license the SAP Sig-
navio Process Manager API, contact our Sales Team at sales@[Link].

15.18 Purchasing additional licenses

Our website provides a detailed overview of the different features and license
types at [Link] . If you want to
purchase or upgrade licenses, please contact our Sales Team at sales@sig-
[Link].

15.19 API access to SAP Signavio Process Manager

Using the SAP Signavio Process Manager APIs requires an explicit

API license. You need to purchase this license in addition to your SAP
Signavio Process Manager user licenses. This document provides an
overview of the capabilities of SAP Signavio Process Manager APIs.
The full API documentation is only available for customers who pur-
chased an API license.

This section provides an overview of the accessible APIs. For more information
on common integration scenarios, see System integration scenarios .
The following diagram illustrates how to access SAP Signavio Process Manager
with the REST API and the Mash-up API.

Version 15.14 547

15   Workspace administration

15.19.1 The SAP Signavio Process Manager REST API

The REST API provides access to SAP Signavio Process Manager resources via
HTTP.
We also provide a collection of requests you can import into the Postman HTTP
client. With Postman, you can execute requests to get to know the API and gen-
erate code snippets to transfer them to your API development project.

[Link] REST API coverage

You can use the REST API to work with folders and diagrams. You can:
o List folders and their contents
o Create, rename, move and delete folders
o Search folders and diagrams. Searching supports filtering by result type
and paging search results.
o List a diagram’s revisions
o Fetch a specific diagram revision in JSON, BPMN 2.0 XML, SVG and PNG
formats
o Create, update, rename, move, copy, publish and delete diagrams

Version 15.14 548

15   Workspace administration

o Import diagrams from BPMN 2.0

o Check BPMN 2.0 diagram syntax

You can also use the REST API to work with the Dictionary and set-up. You can:
o List Dictionary categories and fetch category details
o Create, update and delete Dictionary categories
o Search for Dictionary entries by category, initial letter of the entry name, or
full text. Searching supports sorting and paging search results
o Fetch Dictionary entries
o Create, update and delete Dictionary entries
o Create custom attributes
o Create custom data types

Access to this feature depends on your license.

15.19.2 The SAP Signavio Process Manager Mash-up

(JavaScript) API

Using the Mash-up API: screen shot of an embedded diagram

Version 15.14 549

15   Workspace administration

15.20 Business Transformation Suite

Currently, there are some prerequisites for using this feature. For more
information, please contact our SAP Signavio service experts on the
SAP ONE Support Launchpad.

When you enable the Business Transformation Suite, all users are directed to the
launchpad of the new SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.

Users with a modeling license are no longer directed to the explorer

when Business Transformation Suite is enabled.
The look and feel of the launchpad is different than the old SAP Sig-
navio Process Collaboration Hub, we recommend to inform users in
your workspace about the switch. You find more information about the
launchpad in the section Your launchpad.

15.20.1 Enable the Business Transformation Suite for your

workspace
To enable the Business Transformation Suite for your workspace, open the
explorer and click Setup > Edit SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub con-
figuration.
View a preview of the SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub on the Edit SAP
Signavio Process Collaboration Hub page. See Preview new SAP Signavio
Process Collaboration Hub for more information.
o In the field Activate new SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub enter the
date. You need to enter a date that is at least 72 hours ahead, as it will take 72
hours to enable the Business Transformation Suite for your workspace.
Once the Business Transformation Suite is enabled for your workspace,
each user is directed to the landing page of the SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub. To preview the SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub,
click the link below the
o To disable the Business Transformation Suite for your workspace, click Dis-
able & switch back to the old SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub. The

Version 15.14 550

15   Workspace administration

Business Transformation Suite will be disabled immediately for your work-

space.

Disabling the Business Transformation Suite has no effect on

changes made in your workspace during the activation period. All
changes, for example new diagrams that were created, are kept.

Once the Business Transformation Suite is disabled for your workspace,

users with a modeling license are again directed to the explorer.

15.20.2 Configure SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub

You can configure the appearance and behavior of SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub.
You can add your own logo, adapt the color theme, set up personalized launch-
pads for different audiences, and manage attribute groups and attribute visibility
per audience.
Most of the settings for SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub are accessed
from SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub, for details see section SAP Sig-
navio Process Collaboration Hub Settings.
Some additional settings are available from SAP Signavio Process Manager,
under Setup - Edit SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub configuration.

[Link] Enable view options

Modelers who use SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub can switch between
two views, Preview and Publish.
o In Preview, all items the user has access to are visible, in their current
state. This includes unpublished modifications and items in draft status.
o In Publish, the published versions of items are visible.

You can enable both views for all users of SAP Signavio Process Collaboration
Hub.
o Enable the option Enable view switch for Hub license users.

Version 15.14 551

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Manage overlays

Overlays are attribute visualizations that are added by modelers when they cre-
ate a diagram in SAP Signavio Process Manager.
By default, all overlays are visible.
You can select the following states for overlays:
o visible and active
o visible
o hidden

15.20.3 Preview new SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub

On the Edit SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub configuration page, you
can preview SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub before migrating from Clas-
sic SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub to SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub.

Clicking the URL, opens a preview of your current Classic SAP Signavio Process
Collaboration Hub in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub in a new tab.
Use the preview of SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub to provide enable-
ment and training material for your users before migrating from Classic SAP Sig-
navio Process Collaboration Hub to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.

Version 15.14 552

15   Workspace administration

In the preview, you can create new dictionary items, folders, processes, and con-
figure settings.
Which options are available depends on your license.
All created objects and configured settings in the SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub preview remain when migrating from Classic SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Collaboration Hub to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.

[Link] Next steps

SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub Settings

15.21 Configuring Classic SAP Signavio Process

Collaboration Hub

This section describes the configuration of the classic SAP Signavio

Process Collaboration Hub. To configure the new SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Collaboration Hub, read more in section SAP Signavio Process
Collaboration Hub Settings.

You can adjust the appearance of SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub
according to your corporate identity and choose between several layout and dis-
play options.

15.21.1 General configuration

You can change the configuration of SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub by
clicking Setup - Edit SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub configuration in
the explorer.

[Link] Welcome header

Here, you can configure the text that is displayed as the headline of the SAP Sig-
navio Process Collaboration Hub's 'Home' page. If no text is configured, Wel-
come to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub is displayed instead. You can
configure a text for each language you activated in your workspace settings.

Version 15.14 553

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Entry Point

Whenever a user accesses the general SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub
URL, the diagram you set here will be displayed. If you activated the Homepage,
this diagram will be displayed there. We recommend to reference a value chain
diagram that represents your process landscape.

Select a diagram as entry point.

Choose a published diagram as entry point. If you choose an unpub-

lished diagram, your colleagues will see either the SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Collaboration Hub home page or an error message, depending
on if you have activated the home page or not.

[Link] Enable SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub Homepage

If this box is activated, SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub will display the
Home page as entry page. It shows an entry diagram (if specified), it also gives
you the option to search for key words amongst the published diagrams and sup-
plies information about recent changes in published diagrams. The text that is
provided in the Description attribute of the entry diagram will be displayed next to
the diagram on the entry page. If this attribute is undefined, a default text will be
displayed.
The Search page provides you with the option to search for diagrams, files and
dictionary entries. It also displays information such as the item's description and
when it was last published. This page is only available if the Home page is

Version 15.14 554

15   Workspace administration

activated in the SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub configuration dialog. If

deactivated, a search panel is available in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration
Hub's navigation panel.

[Link] Show diagram path navigation

Select if you would like SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub to display the
breadcrumb panel/hierarchy path of a diagram for Hub users and in the SAP Sig-
navio Process Collaboration Hub preview.

If this option is activated but the diagram is not linked to a hierarchy, the diagram
path will be displayed in the breadcrumb panel instead.

[Link] Comments

Choose whether you want to allow users of SAP Signavio Process Collaboration
Hub to see and/or leave comments.

Version 15.14 555

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Overlays

Here you can choose which of the attribute visualization layers should be avail-
able in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.

The settings are:

o Visible by default
The overlay is displayed when a user opens SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub. Users can hide the overlay by deactivating it via a drop
down menu.
o Hidden by default
The overlay is hidden when a user opens SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub. Users can show the overlay by activating it via a drop down
menu.
o Always hidden

The overlay is always hidden. SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub

users can't activate it.

[Link] Folder overview

Configure the default settings for the folder tree on the left of the SAP Signavio
Process Collaboration Hub:

By default, the folder tree at the left side of SAP Signavio Process Collaboration
Hub is expanded.

Version 15.14 556

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Dictionary information in the folder overview

Configure whether the dictionary should be accessible via the folder tree. The
option Neither categories nor search results additionally prevents dictionary cat-
egories and items from showing up in the search results.

By default, the dictionary is visible in the folder tree.

[Link] Default language settings

You can set the application language for SAP Signavio Process Collaboration
Hub. If the setting is on Automatic , the program will adopt the language settings
of your workspace or, if you are not signed in, your browser.

15.21.2 Appearance
[Link] Template

Select the color template. Besides our signature theme, there are several other
color templates available:

Version 15.14 557

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Using your own company logo

You can use your own company logo instead of the SAP Signavio logo in the top
left of the SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub window. The logo on the load-
ing screen can also be adapted. To switch to your own logo, click the cor-
responding select file button, select the picture file in the corresponding menu
and click OK.

Adapt the top-left logo.

Adapt the loading screen.

If you would like to reset the logo to the default design, click the reset button.
In both cases, make sure that the file is either in PNG, JPG or GIF format and is
no larger than 500 KB.

[Link] Link behind the logo

Specify the URL that is opened when clicking the logo in SAP Signavio Process
Collaboration Hub:

Version 15.14 558

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Embedding mode

When activated, SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub does not have a
header and it's folder overview is collapsed, if it is embedded into an iframe (for
example as part of a Microsoft SharePoint Web Part).

15.21.3 Attributes
[Link] Layout configuration

In this menu, you can select the configuration of the tabs on the top right side in
SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.

Multi-tab (diagram first)

The diagram image, attributes (the Overview tab) and activities are kept in separate
tabs. By default, the Diagram tab is open.
Multi-tab (overview first)
The diagram image, attributes (the Overview tab) and activities are kept in separate
tabs. By default, the Overview tab is open.
One pager
The diagram image, attributes and activities appear on the same page. The tab menu
is no longer visible

[Link] Attribute visibility

If the check box Use custom configuration is activated, you can configure the
attributes that should be displayed in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.
The default configuration is documented in the table below the select menus.
For customizing the view, proceed as follows:

Version 15.14 559

15   Workspace administration

o Activate the check box Use custom configuration:

o Select the notation you want to configure:

o Choose whether you want to configure Diagram attributes or Element

attributes:

o For each attribute, configure whether it should be visible , visible if a value

is assigned ( visible if set ) or invisible:

o Configure the Visibility of linking/linked diagrams: If Use Custom Con-

figuration is activated in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub con-
figuration dialog, you can set the attribute(s) Linking Diagrams and Linked
Diagrams visible to have all diagrams that are linked or linking to the dia-
gram open in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub listed in the cor-
responding section. These linked attributes are defined on diagram level.

Version 15.14 560

15   Workspace administration

You can switch to one of the linked diagrams from SAP Signavio Process
Collaboration Hub's overview tab by clicking its name. Any SAP Signavio
Process Collaboration Hub user navigate through the process levels by use
of the diagram path (if activated), Process level pyramid and breadcrumb
panel or linked subprocesses.

All changes to the look and configuration of SAP Signavio Pro-

cess Collaboration Hub will be available for your colleagues after
their next login.

15.21.4 Configuring access to SAP Signavio Process

Collaboration Hub
SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub users have the ability to read and com-
ment on diagrams published to SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.

Version 15.14 561

15   Workspace administration

SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub users are not exclusively managed in
the Explorer under Setup. To grant Hub users access to diagrams, SAP Signavio
Process Collaboration Hub has to be configured correspondingly. In addition, dia-
grams have to be published explicitly.

[Link] Access right management options for SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub users

Depending on your edition and integration variant of SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub, the access configuration may vary:
o Since version 11.11.0, you can manage SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub users in the same way you manage users of SAP Signavio
Process Manager (username/password-based).

o If you acquired SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub

before the release of version 11.11.0 (January 2018), you can
request the activation of username/password-based SAP Sig-
navio Process Collaboration Hub licenses, please contact our
SAP Signavio service experts on the SAP ONE Support
Launchpad. Then, you can revoke the certificate and send
out email invites to the persons who should register for SAP
Signavio Process Collaboration Hub. In case you have con-
figured authentication via LDAP or SAML, a manual activ-
ation and migration is not necessary.
o The username/password-based authentication mechanism
also supports fine-grained access rights management for
SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub users.

o You are using the on-premises edition without Active Directory integ-
ration: In this case, you only have to make sure that Hub users can access
the URL <serverurl>/intra/portal (if necessary contact your administrator). Once
a diagram has been published, all Hub users can access and comment on
it.
o You are using the Software-as-a-Service version and SAP Signavio Pro-
cess Collaboration Hub with SAML 2.0-based authentication: Hub users can
authenticate via a third-party account using a SAML (Security Assertion

Version 15.14 562

15   Workspace administration

Markup Language) SSO service. Read more in section Single sign-on

using SAML.

Once SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub is configured correctly, published

diagrams are available to all Hub users with access rights.

15.21.5 Integrate SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub in a

Microsoft SharePoint installation

o Integrating SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub with

Microsoft SharePoint 2013 requires your SharePoint system to
support TLS version 1.1 or 1.2. Learn how to activate TLS 1.1/1.2
support at [Link]
[Link]/library/[Link].
o Since Microsoft stopped supporting Microsoft SharePoint version
2007 and 2010, we only support SharePoint version 2013 and
2016.

You can use Windows Azure/Active Directory-based authentication.

o Windows Azure/Active Directory-based authentication

The SAP Signavio SharePoint App authenticates as the accessing Active

Directory user against SAP Signavio via LDAP. The access rights of each
Active Directory user and user group can be configured in the explorer.

[Link] We use the Microsoft SharePoint component of SAP Signavio Process

Collaboration Hub. Why is it not possible to print diagrams?

This problem can be solved by adding SAP Signavio Process Manager to the trus-
ted sites of Internet Explorer. If you use SAP Signavio Process Manager in the
software-as-a-service version, the corresponding URL is [Link]
[Link] (European server), respectively [Link]
(US server) or [Link] (Australian server).

Version 15.14 563

15   Workspace administration

[Link] Configuring SharePoint Search

The SharePoint search allows users to search for documents which are uploaded
into SharePoint and then associated with diagram elements or dictionary entries
in SAP Signavio Process Manager. The full text search is performed using the
Explorer or advanced search in SAP Signavio Process Collaboration Hub.

This feature is only available on request. For more information, please

contact our SAP Signavio service experts on the SAP ONE Support
Launchpad.

1. Open the Explorer to configure the SharePoint search.

2. Select Manage SharePoint search in the Setup menu.

3. Make the following settings in the Manage SharePoint search dialog:

o Search endpoint: Specify the URL of the SharePoint API endpoint.
o User name: Specify the Windows user name.
o Password: Enter the corresponding password.

Version 15.14 564

15   Workspace administration

o Workstation: You can specify a computer name.

o Active Directory domain: You can specify a domain.
4. Confirm your settings with Save.

The performance of the full text search in SAP Signavio Process Col-
laboration Hub depends on the performance of your SharePoint
server.

Version 15.14 565